Electrical

Installer Guide

Fan 55.510
GIVE US YOUR FEEDBACK
Is there additional information that you would like added to this guide? Did you
find content that was inaccurate or missing?

Please give us your feedback.

Section Title Page Feedback

You can either email your feedback to David.R.Chirstie@JCI.com or mail it to:

Randy Christie, M-81
Johnson Controls, Inc.
Controls Group
507 E. Michigan Street
Post Office Box 423
Milwaukee, WI 53201-0423
Table of Contents
Section 1: Introduction to Systems Installation
Section 1: Introduction to Systems Installation

Section 2: Anatomy of a Building

Section 2: Anatomy of a Building

Section 3: Installing Systems

Section 3.0: Installing Systems
Section 3.1.H: JCI HVAC Control Devices
Section 3.2.H: HVAC Review and Plan
Section 3.3.H: HVAC System Layout
Section 3.4.H: HVAC Installation Material and Procedures
Section 3.5.H: Setting HVAC System Switches
Section 3.6.H: Checking Your HVAC Work
Section 3.6.H: Example Checkout Sheet
Section 3.6.H: General System Electrical Installer Verification Form
Section 3.6.H: Electrical Installer Verification Form

Section 4: Contracting Tier & Branch Organization

Section 4: Contracting Tier & Branch Organization

Appendix A: Safety
Contractor Safety Pre-Qualification Criteria
Safety Pre-Bid Information Form
Safety Specifications
Electrical Installer Safety Rules
Job Hazard Analysis Form
Competent Person Identification List
Asbestos Policy
Safety Orientation

Appendix B: Abbreviations & Glossary

Abbreviations
Glossary

©
Copyright, 2006, Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.
Appendix C: Sample Shop Drawings
Sample BACnet Shop Drawings
CD Items
Folder – “Bus Checkout Tools”
COMBus Quick Tester Literature
Palm Pilot N2 Metasys Checkout Tool Guide
Folder “Communication Literature”
LIT-12011034 MS/TP Communications
LIT-636018 N2 Communications
LIT-1162150 LON Works Networks
LIT-TD-2029 LON Wiring Document
Folder titled “Sample Drawings
Sample BACnet Control Drawings
Sample N2 Control Drawings
Sample LON Control Drawings
Sample York Solution AHU FPC Control Drawings

Appendix D: Sample Installation Sheets

Minco AS570 Chill-Out Combination Sensor Installation Instructions
Functional Devices, Inc. PSH500A 500VA Power Supply
A70 Series Four-Wire, Two-Circuit Temperature Control Catalog Page
Cleveland Controls AFS-460 Air Pressure Sensing Switch Catalog Page
CSD Series Current Devices Catalog Page
Setra Systems Model DPT 264 Differential Pressure Transducer Catalog Page
P32 Series Sensitive Pressure Switch Catalog Page
Veris Hawkeye 120 Series SPST Status Relay Catalog Page
M9210-xxx-3 Electric Spring Return Actuators Catalog Page
FEC Standard Control Panel 16 in. x 20 in. Enclosure Catalog Page
FEC/IOM Standard Control Panel 20 in. x 24 in. Enclosure Catalog Page
Functional Devices, Inc. RIBU1C Enclosed Relay Catalog Page
TE-6001 Hardware Assemblies for TE-6000 Temperature Elements
TE-6300W Temperature Sensor Thermowells Catalog Page
VG1000 Series Ball Valves with Non-Spring Return Electric Actuators Catalog Page
Series Y63, Y64, Y65, Y66, and Y69 Transformers Catalog Page

©
Copyright, 2006, Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.
Appendix E: Cable Guidelines
Metasys Cable Standards

Appendix F: Communication Bus Technical Documents

LIT-12011034 – MSTP Communications

Appendix G: FAN 410

Fan 410 Ordering Instructions

Metasys® is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc. All other marks

herein are the marks of their respective owners.

©
Copyright, 2006, Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.
This page is intentionally Blank

Copyright, 2006, Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.

©
TAB PAGE

Directions to printer:

Remove this page and create a Tab titled, “Section 1:

Introduction to System Installations”
SECTION 1:
INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEM INSTALLATIONS

We have put together this Electrical Installer  explain the installation material and procedures
Guide as a first step to introduce traditional required to be successful.
electricians to controls electrical installations.
 detail the practices that must be followed to work
Throughout this guide we will set expectations
safely
and procedures. We know that in order to be
successful it is best to clearly define our  share typical contracting tiers and branch system
expectations right from the beginning. organizational structures.
 introduce you to HVAC terminology and
Goals acronyms.
One of our goals at Johnson Controls, Inc. (JCI) If you have any questions about this guide or any
is to routinely exceed our customer’s other matter please contact the JCI lead system
expectations. We reach that goal whenever we specialist, project manager or sales engineer working
provide them with the best possible products and on your project.
services. We want to make it clear that we
regard this as a readily achievable goal and we
begin every relationship with our customers with Layout of the Electrical Installer Guide
that expectation. This guide is arranged as outlined in the Table of
Contents. Work performance is defined in the body
We also expect to deliver every project to our of the guide. To help answer many of your questions,
customers on time and at the estimated cost. At the appendices include safety requirements,
the same time, we expect to achieve a reasonable glossaries, sample drawings, cut-sheets, guidelines,
profit for each project. To satisfy our customers installation details and cable standards of the most
you must be able to consistently deliver your commonly used JCI systems and products.
work on time and at the estimated cost (or
quoted cost for subcontractors). In conjunction with this guide other materials have
been created to facilitate the execution of your work,
It is also our goal to conduct our work in a safe train your employees and clearly document
manner. In addition to the important human expectations. Two such items are:
considerations, injuries can impact the entire
project schedule, the cost of the job, along with 1. Subcontractors Guide (FAN-55.500). Used
the customer’s overall impression of JCI’s work. primarily to help and provide subcontractors
Cutting corners on safety will not be tolerated on standards for bid preparation and contract
our jobs—satisfying the customer also means administration.
getting the job done safely. 2. Installation Quick Reference Handbook for
HVAC (FAN-410). This handbook provides a
To that end, with safely satisfying customers and jobsite reference to information, general
making a profit in mind, this guide will: guidelines, best practices, and procedures for
field technicians and electricians who install
 introduce you to some HVAC System basic and wire HVAC control systems for Johnson
principles by quickly summarizing the Controls.
“Anatomy of a Building”.
 explain JCI’s controls drawings so they can
Contract Relationships and Tiers
be clearly read and understood.
We provide a variety of services to both the private
 walk you through the process of planning a and government sectors. The contracts we work
systems installation, performing system under, and that you will also be responsible for
layouts and validating your work. installing, are in part determined by the type of work
we are doing. These contracts are typically of three

Johnson Controls, Inc. 1─1

SECTION 1:
INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEM INSTALLATIONS

types: new construction, prime contracts or responsible for performing all of your work
retrofit contracts. (depending on the scope of work requested by us) in
strict accordance with the JCI drawing sets and this
Electrical Installer Guide.
New Construction or Prime Contracts
Generally, in new construction, JCI is a GENERAL SCOPE OF
subcontractor, contracting the controls work
from either a Mechanical Contractor or a SUBCONTRACTOR WORK
General Contractor. JCI is then contractually As a lead electrical installer it is vital that you
obligated to perform in accordance with a higher understand the scope of work for which you are
tier of contract documents, including drawing expected to deliver. It is our intent that you furnish
sets and/or specifications. complete support to Johnson Controls for the
installation of all HVAC and EMCS control systems,
For subcontractors, you will also be held as indicated or required by specific project
accountable to the higher tier documents. All documents. The complete scope of your work is
work performed under this relationship will defined by all contract documents.
conform to the Prime Contract Documents
(plans and specifications), this Electrical Below is a general scope of work outlining the
Installer Guide and all local and national codes. overall work your company must include when
submitting a bid to us. As such, it is the electrical
Typically, the Prime Contract Documents (Plans installer’s responsibility to ensure this scope of work
and Specs) do not clearly identify all of the is delivered.
control wiring and tubing that is to be provided.
One of our first tasks is to develop the system In addition to the Terms and Conditions of our
drawings that completely describe all control subcontract, when your company submits a bid they
wiring and tubing. At this time, we will also agree to the following provisions ensuring the
create the related equipment and materials following execution of work and materials. For the
schedules. items list the following definitions apply:
“Contractor” shall refer to the Johnson Controls
For an example project contract structure, please issuing office, “Subcontractor” shall refer to the
reference Section 4 - Contracting Tiers & Subcontractor who submits a proposal in response to
Systems Branch Organization. this Request for Proposal or Scope of Work
Attachment, “Work” shall refer to the Scope of Work
Retrofit Contracts noted herein and described in the Contract
Documents, along with all attachments and terms and
Retrofit contracts require that JCI modify or
conditions thereof and herein.
enhance existing control and/or mechanical
systems. This work requires special attention to
1. Furnish all work accordance with FAN-55.510,
the existing conditions and additional
FAN-410, product literature, and all Contractor
requirements such as access to the work areas,
project documents and drawings. All work is
performing work in an occupied building,
subject to Contractor approval.
unique system downtime requirements, special
working schedules, and unique patching. 2. Furnish only new material and equipment
manufactured by reputable companies regularly
In retrofit contracts, JCI may be the Prime
engaged in manufacturing the material or
Contractor and be contractually obligated
equipment for a minimum of three years.
directly to the owner or user. For electrical or
mechanical work performed under this 3. Contractor will pursue all legitimate extras as
arrangement, JCI documents may be the only requested by Subcontractor. It is also agreed
documents to define the work. You will be Subcontractor will not be compensated for any

Johnson Controls, Inc. 1─2

SECTION 1:
INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEM INSTALLATIONS

additional work for which Contractor is not the Subcontractor’s warehouse, the Subcontractor
compensated. Any additional work will pick up all materials from Contractor
performed without prior, written warehouse as necessary. All cost associated with
authorization by Contractor shall warrant no the pick-up and delivery of materials from any
extra compensation. Only written authorized location shall be the responsibility of the
changes by the Contractor’s Project Subcontractor.
Manager will be considered.
8. Furnish and install all materials, equipment,
4. Subcontractor will inform Contractor, in appurtenances and related items to meet the
writing, of intent to use/hire any sub- electrical or control tubing requirements.
subcontractor. All sub-subcontractors shall
9. Provide, install and terminate all cable, wiring,
be subject to audit and approval of the
raceways, control tubing, junction boxes, pull
Contractor.
boxes, wire trough, cable tray, “Unistrut”
5. Unless an upper tier contract requires a mounting segments/surfaces and required
higher retainage, 10% retainage will be hangers, and supports, sized and typed as
withheld from all progress payments and up required and specified, anchored and adhered as
to a total of 10% of the contract amount required and specified, etc., to provide a
until installation is complete, subcontract complete job, in accordance with all contract
closeout is verified by the Contractor has documents and the Contractor Installation and
been paid for in full. Material Procedures defined in Section 3 of
FAN-55.510.
6. Subcontractor shall purchase all low voltage
control wiring from the Contractor 10. All raceway tubing or conduit is to be 3/4 inch
authorized distributor. For thermostats or minimum.
sensors with RJ style jacks; factory made
11. Appropriate anchors for the surface (wall,
preconfigured cables shall be used when
ceiling, floor, etc.) and support requirements
possible. Field installed RJ Jacks shall be
shall be used. Anchors, used in drywall
tested by the Subcontractor and documented
applications, must provide support to the back
by machine printed wire labels installed on
side of the wall surface. Plastic, Screw-in or any
each end of the cable (within 6 inches of
other anchor type that do not provide such
each jack) with the date and time the test
support shall be replaced at the Subcontractor’s
was performed and the name or initials of
expense.
the installer performing the test.
12. All control panels will be mounted by
7. Where possible, Contractor will directly ship
Subcontractor.
contractor supplied material and equipment
to Subcontractor’s warehouse, wherein 13. All control devices are to be mounted by
Subcontractor shall be completely Subcontractor.
responsible for receipt, security, delivery to 14. All control devices and panels are shown in
site and storage of same. Where applicable, approximate locations and are subject to final
the Subcontractor is responsible for signing field validation. Actual field installation of
all equipment out of the Contractor’s panels, thermostats, sensors, etc. must be
warehouse or contracted warehouse. The validated through the appropriate job site
Subcontractor is financially responsible for channels prior to installation. Otherwise, the
all lost, damaged or misplaced material that possible relocation of panels or devices shall be
has been assigned, received and signed for at the Subcontractor's expense.
by the Subcontractor. Where it is not
possible or practical to ship Contractor 15. Subcontractor shall mount and wire all loose-
supplied material and equipment directly to shipped controls and panels provided by other

Johnson Controls, Inc. 1─3

SECTION 1:
INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEM INSTALLATIONS

mechanical equipment manufacturers as c. bus voltages (+ to -, - to Com and +

required for the entire project mechanical to Com) are within documented
specifications. tolerances of the appropriate
Communications Bus Guidelines in
16. Power to panels and control devices will be
FAN-410.
provided by the Subcontractor. The
Subcontractor is responsible for making all 23. During each bus segment startup the
final terminations of the power circuits Subcontractor is required to be present and
including any power that may have been run immediately address any issues discovered.
by other Contractors.
24. All communications wiring routing shall be
17. Identify, provide and tag all wire, cable documented on the mechanical or electrical
control tubing, and conduit, as required by plans. Device Addressing and the Location of bus
the Contractor drawings, point schedules End-Of-Lines, repeaters, routers, coordinators,
and project specifications. Only machine power supplies and similar equipment shall be
print labels are acceptable. documented on the mechanical or electrical
plans. These plans shall be kept current and made
18. Install field device and panel tags per the
available, on as progress basis, upon request by
project specifications.
the Contractor.
19. Registered Jacks (RJ) must be protected
25. Subcontractor shall set all controller and device
after installation and prior to connection to
physical switches. Including addressing switches,
the field device by means of protective boots
end of line switches, analog input jumpers,
or other approved means. Any RJ
actuator jumpers, etc.
termination damaged due to lack of proper
protection shall be fixed to the Contractor’s 26. Subcontractor shall not pull any exposed cable on
satisfaction or replaced by the Subcontractor or near sources of excessive heat (hot water,
without additional cost to Contractor. steam pipes, etc.), moisture (un-insulated piping,
valves, pumps, etc.), high voltage equipment
20. Contractor may back charge the
(light fixtures, MCC’s switch gear, panel boards,
Subcontractor for any cost incurred due to
etc) or any other location which could damage or
troubleshooting, improper mounting,
cause interference with the cable.
terminating or any other defect caused by
the Subcontractor’s installation. 27. Subcontractor is responsible for all damper and
valve actuator mounting, wiring, linkage setup,
21. Extra effort should be made to prevent any
alignment, end switches, positioners, and other
unnecessary splices in any of the wiring
components required to compete the damper or
associated with the system installation.
value actions. All outdoor air and exhaust air
Contractor devices are not to be used as
damper actuators shall be pre-loaded, by the
junction boxes.
Subcontractor, with the procedure documented in
22. It is the responsibility of the Subcontractor the Actuator Mounting and Preloading
to turn over a trouble-free communication Guidelines section of FAN-410.
bus free of all ground faults, open lines, and
28. Furnish all penetrations necessary to install the
shorts prior to power up. Each bus segment
equipment, raceways and piping associated with
shall be tested by the Subcontractor to
Subcontractors work in accordance with FAN-
ensure it is:
55.510 and project documents.
a. continuous end to end for each
wire. 29. Provide and install all fire stopping and sealing of
the electrical/mechanical penetrations applicable
b. only one shield ground exists
to Subcontractors work. This includes all areas
per segment.

Johnson Controls, Inc. 1─4

SECTION 1:
INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEM INSTALLATIONS

associated with electrical/mechanical conditions, showing routings, circuits, changes in

penetrations including the area around and the work, and interfacing with existing facilities.
inside sleeves and raceways that may In addition, Subcontractor agrees to keep on site
provide a path for air infiltration. All fire a daily log depicting daily events, project
stopping and sealing must be installed to progress, manpower use, weather and working
meet the applicable project specifications conditions, start/stop dates, etc.
and/or other requirements
36. Subcontractor is required to participate in any
30. Perform all demolition and off-site disposal required inspections and validations by
required per the contract documentation, Contractor, Project Inspectors, Owners, Agents,
including, but not be limited to: Consultants, Contractors or any other party
requiring inspection and validation.
 Demolishing electrical power and
controls that are deemed inactive as a 37. Once the Subcontractor’s foreman, lead
result of retrofit work. Electrical electrician or any other employee responsible for
demolition will begin at the equipment supervision for a project has commenced work
and continue back to the closest they shall not be removed or replaced from a
disconnect, and/or meet specific code project by the Subcontractor without prior written
requirements. Pneumatic demolition will notice and approval from the Contractor. Such
begin at the field device and continue notice and request is required to have a minimum
back to the panel, or if required, from of 5 days advance written notice. Any additional
the panel back to a valved main. costs incurred by the Contractor due to such
changes will be back charged to the
 Demolishing all wire, raceways, and
Subcontractor. Such charges shall include, but be
hangers associated with inactivated
limited to, on or off the project site training,
control systems.
errors or omissions in installation or any other
31. If necessary; patch, repair and paint-to- costs, as determined by the Contractor, to be
match the surfaces surrounding your caused by said change.
demolition and new work. All patching and
38. To the extent that Subcontractor has failed to
painting will be performed by a professional
comply with any specification, or that the
and in a neat manner. All patching shall also
Subcontractor has failed to request written
maintain the intended fire ratings.
clarification or any specification that is
32. Provide any necessary on-site facilities or ambiguous, or that the Subcontractor has
equipment to execute their work including assumed design responsibility for any portion of
trenching, scaffolding, lifts, hoists, storage, the Work, Subcontractor shall be fully
site offices, communication equipment, etc. responsible for all costs necessary to provide a
33. Subcontractor will be responsible for complete and operable system capable of meeting
protecting their work until it is turned over the intent of the Contract Documents.
to and accepted by the owner. Subcontractor 39. Prior to installation the Subcontractor shall size
will repair or replace damaged, defective or all wiring to ensure that (see the Metasys System
defaced work caused by Subcontractor Cable and Wire Standards in FAN-410 for more
negligence. information):
34. Subcontractor is required to attend all a. 24 volt power voltage drop does
project progress meetings. exceed 2 volts from source to farthest
35. Subcontractor is required to maintain, on device under maximum load
site, up-to-date as-built documents. As-built conditions.
documents will portray as-installed

Johnson Controls, Inc. 1─5

SECTION 1:
INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEM INSTALLATIONS

b. Inputs used for analog readings minimum, this report must identify
shall not exceed 3 ohms of the following notes:
resistance for the entire circuit.
i. Validating that every wire, device
40. System Validation shall be provided by the and panel is properly tagged and
Subcontractor, as a minimum requirement, identified per item 17 and 18
the Subcontractor will: above.
a. Test each communication bus ii. Indication the system was
segment as detailed in item 22 checked for ground faults, circuit
above. continuity, short circuits, and
stray voltages prior to power
b. Document communication bus
being applied to the electronic
routing as detailed in item 24
components.
above.
iii. Identification of the Power Circuit
c. Provide RJ Termination test
that feeds the Controller.
labels (for field made cables) as
detailed in item 6 above. iv. Indication that all hard wiring
wire interlocks (safeties, etc. (see
d. For each installed Ethernet
examples in 40.f above)) have
Cable provide length of segment
been checked as applicable.
and proper termination reports
as detailed in FAN-55.510 v. Verification by “Check Mark”
Section 3.6H. that each controller point,
intermediate device, and field
e. For all installed wiring ensure
device has been validated.
no stray voltages or ground
faults are present. vi. Identification of any defective
equipment.
f. Test all ‘Hardwire Interlocks’ to
ensure operation. ‘Hardwire vii. Signature and date of completed
Interlocks’ are considered any validation.
wiring that is not dependent on
b. As-built drawings, including but not
system input or outputs for
limited to:
functionality. Examples include:
120V Circuits, dedicated or i. Marked up Contractor control
shared 24 VAC Circuits, Low drawings including: Riser
Limits, High Limits, Static diagrams, system drawings,
Pressure Safety Switches, etc. points schedules, room
schedules, etc.
41. Within 2 business days of validation
completion, at anytime requested by the ii. Marked up Mechanical or
Contractor, and before final payment will be Electrical plans with details as
authorized, the following documents, at noted in item 24 above.
project completion or during progress, must iii. For any equipment provided, the
be provided to the Contractor: Subcontractor will submit the a
a. Completed Subcontractor quantity established by the
Checkout Sheets for every Contract documents plus four (4)
controller in the system. At a additional sets of Operation and
Maintenance manuals to

Johnson Controls, Inc. 1─6

SECTION 1:
INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEM INSTALLATIONS

Contractor for job record,

describing all equipment
provided by the
Subcontractor. These
manuals will include as-
built drawings, technical
data sheets, replacement
parts lists, recommended
maintenance instructions
and ordering instructions.
Subcontractor will provide a
warranty statement on
company letterhead defining
the start and end of the
warranty period. Warranty
can begin no earlier than
completion of the final
punch list and requires
written acceptance of
Contractor. Any extended
warranty items should be
highlighted on the warranty
statement.

USING APPENDED INFORMATION

A group of appendices is enclosed at the rear of
this guide. This information will be of greatest
value to you as you outline and define the
requirements for an installation. In the
appendices you will find:
• JCI’s Safety requirements
• A list of abbreviations and terms used
by Johnson Controls, Inc.
• Sample drawing sets and product data
sheets.
• System Cable Guidelines
• Communication Bus Technical
Literature Documents and Tools
• Handbooks intended to be used as a on-
the-job guide

Johnson Controls, Inc. 1─7

SECTION 1:
INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEM INSTALLATIONS

This page is intentionally blank

Johnson Controls, Inc. 1─8

TAB PAGE

Directions to printer:

Remove this page and create a Tab titled, “Section 2: Anatomy of

a Building”
SECTION 2:
ANATOMY OF A BUILDING

UNDERSTANDING HVAC HVAC Equipment

Some common HVAC Equipment used to add or
Introduction remove heat in commercial buildings:
HVAC stands for “Heating, Ventilation & Air • Boilers
Conditioning”
• Chillers
A primary mission in HVAC is the removal or
addition of Heat. • Pumps
The first statement of the 2nd law of • Cooling Towers
thermodynamics states: “heat flows spontaneously
• Air Handling Units
from a hot to a cold body.” ALWAYS!
• VAV Boxes
• Unit Ventilators
• Fan & Coil Units
• Unit Heaters

Concept of Loads
What are some typical HVAC Loads? The process of “moving the heat” can be
accomplished by a single system or multiple systems
working together.

Single System Example

Equipment, People and Environmental Loads

Packaged Roof
One goal, for Building HVAC Systems, is to Top Unit
remove heat from these loads, as needed, to
maintain comfort and efficiency. This is
commonly referred to as “cooling.”
Another goal, for Building HVAC Systems, is to
add heat, as needed, to maintain comfort and T
efficiency. This is commonly referred to as
“heating.”

Heat added to space from typical loads

needs to be removed (for cooling). Single System Example
A system like the one above would typically only
require minimal controls (a thermostat) in order to
“move the heat” from inside the facility to outdoors.

Johnson Controls, Inc. 2─1

SECTION 2:
ANATOMY OF A BUILDING

Multiple Systems Working Together

Cooling Tower

Condenser Water

Pump

Pump
Chiller
Chilled Water

Mixed Air

Outside
Air
Discharge Air
Air Handling Unit

Return Air
Variable Air Volume Box

Johnson Controls, Inc. 2─2

SECTION 2:
ANATOMY OF A BUILDING

The multiple systems, shown on the previous page, Usually using the process we established in the
“move the heat” from the typical loads using four preceding paragraphs you can determine the
systems. meaning of the terminology and acronyms that are
encountered.
System 1: Variable Air Volume Box (VAV).
System 2: Air Handling Unit (AHU) HVAC Terminology
System 3: Chiller New Electrical Installers should review Appendix B
for understanding of HVAC terminologies and
System 4: Cooling Tower abbreviations.
As you can see the heat is moved from the space to Based on your knowledge of HVAC terminology
outside air by transfer through these four systems. and the concept of Heat Transfer see if you can
Each system requires independent control; however, identify the following locations on the Multiple
they are dependent on each other for complete heat Systems Working Together Drawing from the
transfer. proceeding page.

In this example heat is moved, via air, from the • Chilled Water Supply Temperature
space to an AHU. In our example, cold air is pushed • Chilled Water Return Temperature
via a fan from the AHU to the VAV box. The air
leaving the AHU is often called Discharge Air • Condenser Water Supply Temperature
(DA). The VAV box has a thermostat that senses • Condenser Water Return Temperature
the room’s condition. As it gets warmer the VAV
box opens allowing more discharge (cold) air to • AHU Discharge Air Temperature
pass into the space. As this occurs warmer air is • AHU Discharge Air Pressure
returned to the AHU. The air returning to the AHU
is called Return Air (RA). At the point where it • AHU Chilled Water Coil
connects to the AHU it is mixed with Outside Air
• VAV Box Discharge Air Temperature
(OA) for ventilation and/or economizer purposes.
This combination of outside air and return air is • Outside Air Damper
called Mixed Air (MA).
The mixed air then moves through the AHU where
By referencing the glossary in Appendix B you can
the heat is transferred to water which is called
see how these terms translate into abbreviations and
Chilled Water (CHW). The heat is then pumped to a
points in an HVAC system, for example the
Chiller where it is transferred to another water
“Chilled Water Supply Temperature” above would
source called Condenser Water (CW). Lastly the
be shown as “CHWS-T” where “CHW” is “Chilled
heat is transferred back to air, and discharged to the
Water”, “S” is supply, and “-T” is temperature.
outdoors, at the Cooling Tower (CT).
This methodology is used for all points and will be
Our goal as an HVAC Controls Contractor is to consist from project to project unless the owner or
provide, install and commission the control consultant for a facility requests different
components required for each individual system and identification methods.
ensure entire system performance.
While there are a vast number of system types for
VAV boxes, Zone Controls, AHUs, Chillers,
Boilers, etc., the basic concept is the same. The
removal or addition of heat, as needed, to maintain
comfort and efficiency.

Johnson Controls, Inc. 2─3

SECTION 2:
ANATOMY OF A BUILDING

This page is intentionally left blank.

Johnson Controls, Inc. 2─4

TAB PAGE

Directions to printer:

Remove this page and create a Tab titled, “Section 3: Installing

Systems”
SECTION 3.0:
INSTALLING SYSTEMS

INTRODUCTION & GENERAL

REQUIREMENTS
The following descriptions for installing This section of the Electrical Installer Guide is
systems apply to all of the work you do for broken down in to the following sub-sections:
Johnson Controls, Inc. If there is a conflict
• Section 3.0 Introduction
between the information presented and that
described in higher tier contract documents, • Section 3.1.H - JCI HVAC Control Drawings
the more stringent requirements shall apply.
• Section 3.2.H - Review & Plan the HVAC
Most systems that Johnson Controls Installation
Electrical Installers will see fall into three
categories: • Section 3.3.H - HVAC Systems Layouts

• HVAC Systems (H) • Section 3.4.H - HVAC Installation and

Material Procedures
• Fire Alarm Systems (F)
• Section 3.5.H - Setting HVAC System
• Security / Card Access Systems (S) Switches
Currently this section only presents HVAC • Section 3.6.H - Checking Your HVAC Work
Control Installations, Procedures, Drawings
amd Best Practices. HVAC Sections will be ELECTRICAL INSTALLER DUTIES
followed by the letter “H.” In the future we Electrical Installers are typically required to:
may add Fire Alarm System Sections (F) and
Card Access Systems Sections (S). • Perform work in accordance with JCI safety
requirements including the Electrical Safety
For HVAC Systems it also explains how to Rules and the Asbestos Policy (Appendix A).
interpret and lay out the raceways, cables and
wiring based on their requirements. It is • Install raceways, cables and wiring to meet
essential that the employee or individual have local or national codes, standards and
some general understanding of the customer system requirements.
terminology used (Appendix B) and a general
• Mount and terminate equipment as needed.
understanding of how to apply them to
HVAC equipment and buildings (Section 1) • Check out and validate field-installed
before attempting to review this Section. equipment with test instruments as needed
(i.e. volt meters, hand held testers, ComBus
Please reference other learning materials for
Quick Tester, Metasys Checkout Tool, Fluke
detailed training on:
Micro Scanner Pro, etc.).
• Introduction to Basic Air Handling
• Keep management informed of job needs,
Systems (C-7007-EN)
progress and issues.
• Electrical Installation for Systems
• Complete paperwork, including but not
(C-8055-EN)
limited to time sheets, expense reports and/or
• Site Coordination (C-8049-EN) on-site documentation.
• Self Performing Electrical • Provide feedback to JCI Engineering on
Installations (C-8077-EN). changes and keep as-built drawings current.
• Resolve job site conflicts regarding
installation issues or escalate concerns to
management as required.

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.0─1

SECTION 3.0:
INSTALLING SYSTEMS

• Communicate with the customer as defined by the Subcontractor Safety Specifications,

necessary upon arrival and before the subcontractor must submit a completed job
leaving the work site. hazard analysis (JHA) Appendix A, for the work to
the JCI Project Owner.
• Complete a Job Hazard Analysis
(JHA) for all work activities that are Failure to follow JCI Safety Specifications, Electrical
considered immediately dangerous to Safety Rules, or Asbestos Policy will be considered a
life and health (IDLH) as defined by breach of contract that may result in the removal of
the Subcontractor Safety the particular installer or the entire subcontractor
Specifications (Appendix A). from the site. JCI employees failing to follow safety
work practices will be subject to disciplinary action
QUALITY CONTROL including termination.
Proper operation and professional looking
installations are important to our customers. ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS
Therefore, the installer shall implement and Asbestos-containing materials (ACMs) may be
maintain throughout the project a Quality present in many of the building areas or materials the
Control Program. This self-policed program installer will come in contact with. JCI considers
shall document and certify that all work asbestos to be the building owner’s responsibility—
performed by the installer is in accordance our Asbestos policy requires employees and
with this guide and all contract documents. subcontractors not perform work of any nature
involving ACM's. This includes identification of
It is the sole responsibility of the installer to suspect material, removal, disposal or any related
perform and maintain all work in accordance work.
with all contract documents.
To meet regulatory requirements, each building
The installer shall not build on defective owner must conduct an asbestos survey to identify
work. The installer shall immediately repair the locations and condition of ACMs in their
or replace any defective work for which they building(s). As part of JCI’s contracting process, the
have been contracted to provide. If the customer is required to provide the portion of the
installer is a subcontractor, this shall be done survey that pertains to the scope of work performed
at no additional cost to Johnson Controls, Inc. by JCI or its subcontractors. Before the work begins,
For subcontractors, Johnson Controls the survey documentation is reviewed by JCI to
reserves the right to periodically inspect determine if the ACM identified could interfere or be
installation work in accordance with this disturbed by our work or that of our subcontractors.
document and other contract documents. If If necessary, the ACM is removed by a qualified
installations are found to be unacceptable by contractor, and work proceeds accordingly. The
the JCI project manager or lead system subcontractor or JCI project owner will notify the
specialist, the work shall be corrected and/or installer of those locations of ACM in the work area
replaced at the subcontractor’s expense. not impacted by the work and left in place.
In the case of an inadvertent disturbance of ACM, the
SAFETY installer must stop work immediately and contact the
The Installer shall perform all work in JCI project owner for direction.
accordance with JCI’s Safety Specifications
and Electrical Installer Safety Rules in If at any time during the system installation, the
Appendix A, OSHA Standards and any local installer encounters unidentified suspect ACM that
or state equivalent requirements. could be disturbed by the work, they must stop work
and contact the JCI project owner for verification.
For work activities identified as immediately
dangerous to life and health (IDLH) as

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.0─2

SECTION 3.0:
INSTALLING SYSTEMS

AS-BUILT DOCUMENTS sample copies of HVAC checkout forms reference

The installer shall maintain on site, updated Section 3.6.H.
on a daily basis, as-built documents. The as- You should validate with your Lead System
built documents shall include, as a minimum, Specialist or Project Manager if these documents are
the following information: required before starting work.
 As-installed notes For projects that do not require checkout forms, use
 Changed conditions of these forms is optional.

 Design changes The forms provide a means for you to ensure and
document the status and quality of your work. They
 Change orders are available upon request.
 Mechanical or Electrical Plan
Markups showing:
o Trunk Routing
o Device Addressing
o Location of End-Of-Lines
o Location of Repeaters
o Location of Routers
o Location of Coordinators
o Location of Power Supplies
 Circuit breaker identification
 Notes of major events and delays.
The installer shall make these documents (or
copies) available to JCI personnel upon their
request. All originals shall be submitted to
Johnson Controls Branch Office upon project
completion.

CHECKOUT FORMS
JCI may be contractually required to provide
checkout forms to our customers. For these
projects, upon completion of the work and
prior to the JCI commissioning phase, the
installer shall submit written documentation
verifying that all cables, wires or tubing have
been checked for proper installation,
termination, tagging, continuity, and are free
from ground faults. This documentation, as a
minimum, shall be in a checklist form, listing
all points wired or tubed, who inspected the
work and the date of the inspection. For more
information on checking your work including

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.0─3

SECTION 3.0:
INSTALLING SYSTEMS

This page is intentionally blank.

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.0─4

SECTION 3.1.H:
JCI HVAC CONTROL DRAWINGS

In addition, it will also often contain a Table of

JCI HVAC CONTROL DRAWINGS Contents for the drawing set as well as a Legend of
OVERVIEW Symbols.
JCI Control Drawings typically contain the
following: Riser Diagrams
Riser diagrams are usually generic in nature and are
• Title Page
designed to show the installer:
• Riser Diagrams
• generally how the bus cabling (N2, FC-
• System Drawings (per System type) MS/TP, SA or LON Bus) should be routed.
• Point Schedule (per System type if • which system controllers are intended to be
required) connected to which supervisory controller or
engine.
• Room, Valve and Damper Schedules
In Appendix C are sample control drawings for Note: Because of the engineering
N2, BACnet, LON, and Factory Installed requirements it is critical for the Electrical
Systems. Installer to not alter which supervisory
controller the system controllers are
Keep in mind, engineers are not installers and
connected to (without permission).
may not consider the impact engineering will have
on the installation. Basically said “Engineers • anticipated addressing for each controller.
engineer systems, not installations.” With that in
• bus numbers (for controllers or engines that
mind you should always consider and recommend
can have more than one bus).
changes that would reduce installation costs. The
earlier you can communication such requests the • expected locations of supervisor and system
more likely the change can be accepted. While controllers.
these changes may not always be possible this
communication serves other purposes:
• The Engineer will not forget your
recommendation and may in fact learn
something that could be considered for
the next project.
• You will be ensured that others working
with you will know you are adding value
beyond just pipe, wire, mounting and
termination.
Each of the control drawing sections and types has
a specific purpose. The following paragraphs are Figure 1 Riser Diagram
intended to give an overview of each section or
type of drawing.
It is important for Electrical Installers to understand
Title Page the routing shown is general in nature and they are
The title page is critical because it defines the expected to route the bus cables in the manner that
name, address, and project numbers assigned. It will provide the lowest cost.
will often define who the General and Mechanical Actual cable routes used to pull bus cables must be
Contractor are as well as the Architect and Project reflected on the Mechanical or Electrical Drawings.
Engineer of record. These drawings should also marked with:

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.1.H─1

SECTION 3.1.H:
JCI HVAC CONTROL DRAWINGS

• Device Addressing Flow Diagram or Drawing

• Location of all bus: Usually these system drawings will have a Flow
Diagram. The Flow Diagram is merely a high-level
o End-Of-Lines representation of mechanical equipment and
o Repeaters identifies the location of control devices depicting
how air and/or water moves through the system.
o Routers 1 STAGE
C E
o Coordinators RA C C DA
CLG-O ZN-T
WC-ADJ
o Power supplies RETURN

SUPPLY

o Similar equipment
Figure 2 Flow Diagram
System Drawings
For a given mechanical system, the “system Note: While flow diagrams accurately depict how air
drawing” can be made of one or multiple or water moves through a system the actual
drawings within the JCI Control Package. The mechanical equipment will often look quite different
system drawings will consist of a System Flow than the drawings represent them.
Diagram, Object (Point) Identifiers, Sequence of
Operation, Bill of Material, Point Schedules and Object (Point) Identifiers
Termination Details.
These are device or point identification tags. For the
Sometimes simple system drawings, such as HVAC Control Drawings, these identifiers are used
Variable Air Volume (VAV) boxes, will be shown throughout the system diagrams. They are the
entirely on one page while larger Air Handling binding link between the systems diagram
Units (AHU) and Central Plants can be shown on components and are critical to using and
several pages. For these simple systems, the understanding how the different diagram components
separate Point Schedules and separate work together.
Termination Details are usually omitted. Under
They appear on the flow diagram to indicate where
these simple system situations, all of the
the device is to be located, on the Bill of Material to
terminations and cable requirements should be
show the part number and description of the control
defined on the point-to-point wiring diagrams.
component(s), on the point schedule or line
For the more complex systems, the Point connection diagram to show how the device(s) are
Schedules are usually used to summarize the Point connected to the system and on the termination
Types and Numbers, Equipment Locations, Cable details showing how each cable or wire is landed.
& Termination Numbers, Intermediate Device They will sometimes be shown throughout the
requirements, Reference Details, etc. Sequence of Operations to show how the device is
used to operate the equipment.

Sequence of Operation,
This is a simple textual description defining how a
system is required to function or operate. For “Plan
and Spec” projects, the Sequence of Operations is
usually in the project specifications or directly on the
project mechanical system drawings.
While often overlooked as important, the Sequence
will most often be the single most important item
focused on by the owner, consultant and/or

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.1.H─2

SECTION 3.1.H:
JCI HVAC CONTROL DRAWINGS

commissioning agent to validate system The fields used, and their description, on the point
performance. As such, it is critical that every JCI schedule is as follows:
installation employee and subcontractor
• Tag: Correlates the point to another part of
understand the Sequence completely. This ensures
the project (For example, consultant’s points
we understand the anticipated system performance
listing or, if required, special device tagging
we are being paid to provide.
requirements.)

Bill of Material • General Information

This is normally a three-column table located in o Point Type: Identifies a control point
the drawing set. The first column will normally be type as either
the device or point identifier, the second Column analog/binary/configurable/universal or
is the JCI or Vendor part number or numbers Input/Output.
associated with the point and the third Column o System Name: The mechanical system or
will give a brief description of the part. software system name for the point. (i.e.
The part number can be used, in conjunction with AHU-1, VAV-1, RTU-1, etc.)
Product Data Sheets, to learn more about a o Object Name: Hardware and software
specific part including engineering data or unique (within the system) object name
detailed installation instructions. for the point. (i.e. DA-T, MA-T, etc.).
Bill of Material Note: The same object name is used for
Tag Qty Part Description the same type of point not only
CLG-O 1 INC VLV VG1241AE+906AGA Incremental throughout a given project but between
Actuation
SF-C 1 RIB24P 20AMP DPDT 24VAC/DC
projects too.
TX-1 1 Y65T31-0 XFMR,120-208-240/24,40VA,FOOT
ZN-T 1 TEC2626-2 MS/TP.2ON/OFF/FLT.3SP FAN
o Expanded ID: Brief textual description of
the point.
Often multiple parts numbers and quantities are
associated with a single Object Identifier or • Controller Information
multiple Object Identifiers are associated with one o Controller Details: Type of controller,
part. expansion module or IOM the point is
Point Schedules connected to.
For most complex systems, Point Schedules are o Trunk Nbr: The number of the trunk that
used to summarize information for the Electrical the controller is attached to.
Installer in a table format. ONLY points that o Trunk Addr: The address of the
connect to a controller will show up on a Point controller.
Schedule.
o Cable Destination Bay/Terminal:
Some points we wish to control cannot be directly Termination point at the controller,
connected to a controller due to voltages or other expansion module or IOM.
considerations. When this condition exists we will
indentify an “Intermediate Device” to be installed o Module Type: Function module type
between the point and our controller. As an used (For DCM controllers only)
example if we wanted to controller a 120v o Termination Out: Actual terminations,
Exhaust Fan it cannot be directly connected and expansion module or IOM.
will require a relay for the interface to be
completed. • Panel Information
o Panel: Panel designation or name

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.1.H─3

SECTION 3.1.H:
JCI HVAC CONTROL DRAWINGS

o Panel Location: Description of the o Ref Detail Shape: Reference detail that
panel’s location (i.e. Mech. Room illustrates the typical wiring detail.
101)
o Comment: Miscellaneous comments
o Slot Number: Number of the slot regarding information for the controller
where a DCM or XM controller is or point.
installed in a NCU or NEU base
frame.) Point Schedules can be viewed as a master list of
o Reference Drawing: Cross-reference hardware connection points for a given system. It is
to a drawing, if needed. important for the electrical installer to be aware that
some items like 24 VAC Power and bus wiring to a
o Cable Number: Cable Number can be
“Smart VSD” are not shown on the Point Schedule.
project specific or as simple as the
These types of connections are shown on the
Object Name or ID.
Termination Details or Riser Diagrams.
• Intermediate Device
o Wiring/Tubing: Quantity and type of Termination (Reference) Details
wiring from the panel to the Termination details are referenced on the Point
intermediate device (i.e. 2/22 means a Schedule as “Ref Detail Shape.” There is typically
22 AWG cable with two conductors one sheet per System that will show the engineered
(1 twisted pair)). details associated with the termination of a given
point at the field device, system controller,
o Termination In: Termination intermediate devices and any hardware “dip switch”
designations on the field device for settings. You may also see Termination Details
the input side. referenced as Wiring Details.
o Device: Name of the intermediate
device used, if any. (i.e. IDEC Relay).
o Termination Out: Termination
designations on the intermediate
device for the output side. (i.e. COM,
NO (9,5))
o Location: Description of the
intermediate device’s location.
• Field Device
o Wiring/Tubing: Quantity and type of
wiring from the panel or intermediate
device to the field device.
o Termination In: Termination
designations on the intermediate
device for input.
o Device: Name of the field device
Figure 3 Termination Details
used.
o Location: Description of the field
device’s location. Once you are familiar with using the termination
details you may notice several similarities in how
they are coded alpha-numerically.

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.1.H─4

SECTION 3.1.H:
JCI HVAC CONTROL DRAWINGS

• The first part of the details is an • N2 Trunk: The N2, LON or MS/TP Bus
alphabetic letter or letters indicating the trunk number.
type of controller.
• N2 Address: The N2 or MS/TP Bus Address
• The second numeric portion of the details number.
indicates the type of point or device the
• Sensor Code Number: The room sensor part
detail is for.
number.
For example, the “D” in detail D131 indicates the
termination detail is for a DX-9100 controller and • Box Information: Typically the mechanical
the “131” indicates it is a RTD Temperature drawing designation for a VAV box.
Sensor Input. If the same sensor were used on an • Box Engineering Data: Various VAV box
FEC controller, the termination detail would be details including K Factor, Box Size and
F131. For a UNT controller it would be UC131. Flow.
The valve and damper schedules do not often require
System Drawings As Built Drawings use by electrical installers. Most of the information
Regardless of drawing type you are required to is for JCI Engineering and the Mechanical Contractor
maintain and keep current “As-Built” drawings for ensuring the correct valve or damper is installed
reflecting any change made to the systems. on the appropriate mechanical equipment system.
While not every mechanical system has a valve or
Room, Valve and Damper Schedules damper, they can be handy to electrical installers for
Room Schedules are good references for performing system counts and understanding the
establishing several items. Most often, they can be quantity of devices that have to be connected.
used by electrical installers to establish quantities
and location of zone controls. The typical fields Factory Installed Controls
available include:
• Bldg/Flr. The Building (if multiple) and Overview
floor or area in which the room is located. For factory-installed components and wiring,
Johnson Controls has two important options:
• Room No. & Name: Room Number and
Name. Note: Often construction room • FPC Systems - three subtypes:
numbers and name can change for owner
o FPC systems with controller
acceptance.
o FPC systems without controller
• System Name: For systems like VAV
boxes, this will be the AHU that serves o FPC systems with remote panel
that box (i.e. AHU-1, etc.). For other
• Factory-Mounted End Devices (FMEDs)
systems, it will be the name of the
Mechanical Equipment itself (i.e. FCU-1, FPC Systems with a controller are limited to
etc.). BACnet® Systems.
• Reference Drawing: This should list the The drawing sets for these systems have system
Mechanical Drawing (or other contract diagrams that may include flow diagrams and
document) that shows the physical mechanical system layouts.
location of the equipment. Online access to FPC Solution AHU system drawings
• Controller Code: The controller part is available to Johnson Controls personnel with an
number. Internet connection. The drawings are available for
download on the MOM system, an online database
• NAE Address: Address of the NAE or NC containing as-built drawings for shipped FPC
System Supervisory Controller.

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.1.H─5

SECTION 3.1.H:
JCI HVAC CONTROL DRAWINGS

systems. To reach the MOM system Web site, go needed. This drawing lays out how each low
to voltage power, input or output connects to
http://c7mdcs121.cg.na.jci.com/MOMWeb/default their respective Home Run Cable.
.aspx.
Contact your branch equipment support person for
access information.

FPC Systems
Factory Packaged Control systems are air
handling units that feature traditional field control
component devices mounted and connected at the
factory.
The following drawings are usually provided for
all three system types:
• FPC Device Location Drawing is an
engineered drawing (to scale) showing
where each device, by object identifier, is
mounted by the factory.

Figure 5 I/O Header Diagram

In addition, the FPC with controller may contain a

project review and signoff drawing that is used by the
field branch office and factory to clarify scope.
You should understand the differences between these
three types of systems and know what your project
will require based on this knowledge.
Samples for each of these four drawings types are
Figure 4 FPC Device Location Drawing provided on the CD in Appendix C.
These systems are the most turnkey option available
regarding factory wiring and connection and almost
• FPC Power/Safeties/End Device Wiring any system that can be configured with our
Diagram(s). One or multiple drawings, estimating tools can be ordered with FPC.
typically laid out in a ladder diagram
manner, depicting factory wiring and
terminations. Important Considerations for all FPC Systems
• A factory installed raceway is often sealed at
• I/O Header Diagram. Each factory-
the AHU sections to prevent condensation. It
connected unit has one or more “Home
is imperative that the integrity of the factory
Run” and “Low Voltage Power” cables.
installation not be compromised. As such, do
The quantity of cables is dependent on the
not add cabling, wiring, or tubing to the
required inputs and outputs. Each of these
factory raceway.
Home Runs are provided with I/O
Headers located in the AHU sections as

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.1.H─6

SECTION 3.1.H:
JCI HVAC CONTROL DRAWINGS

• Not every object or point device is factory wiring and cables installed at the factory.
installed on an FPC system (for example,
space temperature, space humidity, and If factory wiring methods are brought into
field bus cabling). question by project authorities having
jurisdiction (for example, local inspectors
• Adding a controller enclosure to an AHU and engineering firms), contact your Solution
increases the total length of the AHU. It is Air Handling Unit support team.
important to ensure that the extra length
of the controller enclosure is taken into • Factory installation of control devices allows
consideration when the project is mounting in optimum locations. These
designed and bid. locations provide the best functionality with
the highest quality, but may limit
• AHUs are often shipped in multiple serviceability. If devices fail, direct
sections on separate skids for logistical replacement in the same location may not be
reasons. These separate sections have possible. Under these conditions, determine
factory-provided modular wire-connectors an alternate field replacement location.
that connect the internal wiring in one
section to the wiring to another section. • Solution AHUs often have low temperature
This task is typically performed by the cutouts mounted inside the air stream of the
mechanical contractor, but it is in your unit. When mounted in this manner, the
best interest to ensure this connection is sensing elements in these devices have
terminated properly and tested. special mounting allowances. For more
information, see A11 and A70 Series Low
• Control Valves are typically field Temperature Cutout Controls in FAN-410.
installed by the Mechanical Contractor.
Factory wiring for control valves typically • Some factory-installed devices have manual
terminates at a four by four electrical resets that interrupt the operation of the
junction box at or near the mechanical Solution AHU. To avoid possible injury, it is
piping associated with the valve. It is in critical that you follow proper lock-out/tag-
your best interest to communicate with out procedures when resetting these devices.
the Contractor that is installing the valve
• Single Point Power (SPP) ordering options
to ensure the field labor and material costs
allow 120 VAC power wiring to the FPC
to add pipe and wire is minimized.
control panel to be factory pre-wired to FPC
• MS/TP compatible VSDs are not factory Panel field defines by installation of a power
connected to the FPC panel controller transformer (typically at the supply fan
bus. If required, the field bus cables must starter) to provide power to the panel. You
be field installed. must understand how the unit was ordered to
validate power requirements.
• The wiring installed at the factory meets
ETL SEMKO Testing Laboratory FPC System with Controller
requirements. This certification mark These systems are the most popular turnkey option
indicates that the product has been tested available for field installation. They ship with a
for, and has met the minimum factory-installed controller and with wiring that is
requirements of, a widely recognized U.S. mostly complete.
product safety standard; that the
manufacturing site has been audited; and The Project Review and Signoff drawing clarifies
that the applicant has agreed to a program how points are handled. Each object identifier should
of periodic factory follow-up inspections be listed on a legend defining whether a point is
to verify continued conformance. ETL factory or field supplied. An X indicates that a point
certifications are also applicable to the device is factory supplied. Factory-supplied points

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.1.H─7

SECTION 3.1.H:
JCI HVAC CONTROL DRAWINGS

can be factory mounted and wired or shipped

loose for field installation.

FPC System without Controller

FPC systems without a controller are wired much
like the FPC system with a controller. The only
differences are that in the FPC panel:
• no controller is mounted in the panel at
the factory
• each cable is terminated within the FPC
panel on a terminal strip (by the factory)
The final wiring terminations for the controller
must be completed in the field. You should
attempt to install a (shipped loose) controller and
associated field point devices using the lowest
total installed cost solution. Be sure to
communicate any desired installation or wiring
changes early, so they can be reviewed and
approved prior to installing the system.
FPC System with Remote Panel
An FPC system with a remote panel is wired
much like the FPC with controller. The only
differences are that in the FPC panel:
• No controller is mounted in the panel at
the factory.
• Each cable is tagged and is not terminated
in the FPC panel at the factory.
You must mount the remote panel, provide
raceways and cables, and terminate the cables.

Factory-Mounted End Devices (FMEDs)

These systems are the least turnkey option
available regarding factory provisions. Field
devices are mounted only (for the devices that can
be factory installed). No power wiring, low
voltage cabling, raceways, or panels are provided.
Some end devices that are factory installed can be
almost impossible to gain access to in the field. It
is strongly recommended to select one of the
wired solutions when possible.

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.1.H─8

SECTION 3.2.H:
HVAC REVIEW AND PLAN THE INSTALLATION

Good communication with JCI employees and other

HVAC SYSTEM REVIEW AND PLAN THE trades on the project is invaluable. Items to consider
INSTALLATION before starting installing the electrical controls
During this step, a thorough review of the project system include:
requirements is performed with the LSS/Project
• Review, discuss and confirm the project
Manager and Electrical Installer. The Electrical
requirements with the JCI Lead System
Installer will need to be familiar with installation
Specialist or Project Manager in detail. Gain
requirements established by the specification
an understanding of all expectations
especially those that are inconsistent with Johnson
including:
Controls’ standards. The Electrical Installer
should thoroughly review any nonstandard o Job location, accessibility and
systems. The Electrical Installer should always parking requirements
plan all systems installations with lowest installed
o Special site requirements (e.g. safety,
cost in mind.
security, drug testing, etc.)
Scope of Work and General Requirements o Contacts – owner, general contractor,
Review mechanical contractor, etc.
Planning the Installation is required. At a o Installation priorities and status of
minimum, you should have the following items: Project
• Plan & Specification Package (as required): o JCI and installation materials
o Complete set of project drawings handling and storage
including Mechanical, Electrical and o Completion dates, schedule
Architectural requirements
o Complete Project Specification: o Any other information pertinent to
 General Conditions the required execution of work
 Division 15, 16 & 17 • Perform a general review of the JCI Control
Drawings to gain an overview of the scope of
o Accepted Alternates and Addendums work. If the job is a retrofit, make sure JCI is
o Any other Plan & Spec information as available to meet you on site so other unique
applicable requirements can be discovered and
addressed together.
• JCI Package:
• Review the installation requirements defined
o System drawings by the project specifications. You must
o Equipment schedules understand the specific installation
requirements for every project. Some
o Product data sheets
examples include:
o Site survey (if required o Are there any minimum raceway,
o Asbestos site survey (for buildings cable or wire sizes?
build prior to 1982) o Are there any special installation
o Checkout sheets (if requested or requirements (rigid up to 8 feet
required) above the finished floor)?
o Other information as applicable o Are there any special tagging
requirements?

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.2.H─1

SECTION 3.2.H:
HVAC REVIEW AND PLAN THE INSTALLATION

Note: Often the specification will critical installation issues that need to be addressed
reference you to other sections of the spec immediately (i.e. wall rough in, high ceilings,
for this information (i.e. Div 16 or inaccessible areas, underground, concrete pours,
specific equipment sections of Div 15) etc.). Once that is complete, you are prepared to
finalize your planning:
• Review the Mechanical Drawings to
establish physical locations of equipment • Casually introduce yourself to the
referenced on JCI Drawings. Pay special mechanical supervisor for the project.
attention to any mechanical equipment, Discuss the project in general and try to gain
this may require underground work or some idea of the construction schedule and
have other special rough in requirements. their expectations.
Note this review is not specific to devices Note: It is usually best at this stage to avoid
(temp sensors, etc.) but just to get the conflicts. If you gain any information that is
general layout of the overall jobsite. We different that the expectations set by the LSS
will get to the specifics of device layout or PM, contact them immediately.
later.
• Next, it is a good idea to discuss the project
• Review the Electrical Drawings to see if with the Division 16 electrical supervisor.
any power or control wring shown by JCI Are there any job site specifics to watch out
drawings are also shown there. When for (electrical inspector unique items,
power or control wiring is shown on installation material submittal items, etc.)?
Division 16 electrical drawings, it is most Also, get a feel for items discovered in
often required to be installed by the drawing review and shown on the electrical
Davison 16 electrical contractor. construction plans. Again, if you learn
anything different than was has been
• Review the Architectural Drawings to see
communicated; contact your LSS or PM
if there are any high or inaccessible
immediately.
ceilings. Look for any walls that are not
sheetrock that may require special rough-
Establish an Installation Plan
in needs. Pay close attention to anything
Now you are armed with the necessary information to
that might have to be coordinated for
establish an installation plan. This plan typically does
underground work, concrete pours or
not have to be documented, but will help you and
block wall installation.
others understand what needs to be done, where you
• Review the asbestos survey to see if there expect to start and when you must finish the controls
are locations of ACM’s that may be electrical installation. Once System Layout is
impacted by your work. complete material and labor resources can be clearly
communicated.
Note: If locations of ACMs identified in
the survey will be affected by your work, The larger the project, the more complex the effort.
contact the JCI project owner so Most Johnson Controls major projects will have a
arrangements can be made to have the Microsoft Project Schedule created by a Project
material removed by the customer or their Manager.
contractor.
Any attempt to build an installation plan before you
understand what is required is nothing more than a
On the Job Site Planning waste of time.
Now that you have some understanding of what is
required, you are better prepared to visit the
jobsite. Once on-site, review the general project
construction status. Try to establish if there are

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.2.H─2

SECTION 3.3.H:  
HVAC SYSTEM LAYOUT 
 
If exact locations are not specified in the building
HVAC SYSTEM LAYOUT plans, the Electrical Installer can decide the best
AHU or Central Plant layout is a task normally installation location for each control device and panel
done by the Lead System Specialist (LSS) or Lead but locations selected obviously must allow the
Electrical Installer, who spots the devices at the devices to perform their intended task. As each
job site. Obviously, this must be completed before location is decided, it is marked with a tag. The tags
installing raceways, junction boxes, and pulling are attached to the actual HVAC equipment, pipes,
cables or wiring. ducts, or walls to show where the field devices will
This section focuses solely on project layout tasks be mounted. The tags also identify cable and tubing
at a system. Upon completion of this section, you requirements, including quantity, size and colors.
should gain an understanding of how to:
• At the job site, determine and mark HVAC System Layout Steps
installation locations for all field control At the Mechanical System on the Job Site:
devices and panels in an HVAC system. 1. Plan your approach.
• Tag each device location to indicate the type • Check the building plans or contract
of cable, wire, and/or tubing required to documents. Do they specify the locations
connect field control devices. of any field devices or panels? If so, you
cannot change those locations without
Identifying Physical Locations requesting permission.
Locating control devices is best done at the job
site, where you can see the reality of the physical • Mentally comprehend the entire system,
space. The building plans are two-dimensional and lay it out accordingly. Always do the
making it hard to see obstacles such as columns or panels last. Try to locate the panel close
beams, which can prevent the installation of a to the largest concentration of cables and
control in a particular location. In addition, it can field devices, in order to minimize
be hard to determine the exact route of ductwork raceway, cable, and wire requirements.
from drawings alone. Note: Control panel locations are seldom
shown on project plans. It is a best
Note: If the contract documents specify the exact practice to submit a Request for
location of individual control devices and/or Information (RFI) identifying our
panels, Johnson Controls is responsible for intended panel location. This ensures
installing in the indicated location or requesting that the space can be used without fear of
permission to move the devices or panels to a interfering with other trades.
different location.
2. Pick a device to start with. Use the point list,
flow diagram and your knowledge of the
Gather Necessary Information
mechanical equipment to decide the best
Start with the System’s Point Schedule and Flow installation location for mounting that device.
Diagram. The Point Schedule can be considered a
“Master List” of all points on the system but you 3. For each field device, mark the installation
should be aware that some points such as power to location using a tag made from duct tape
devices and bus cabling may not be shown. Such (preferred) or surveyor’s tape (for an overhead
points will normally be shown on the termination pipe that is hard to see from ground level). Using
details or riser diagrams. It is recommended for a marker, write the object name of the device and
you to review these details to ensure ALL the the type, size and quantity of installation
required cables are accounted for and then add materials on the tag.
these cables to the Point Schedule. For cable or wire, include the object name,

Johnson Controls, Inc.

3.3.H─1
SECTION 3.3.H:  
HVAC SYSTEM LAYOUT 
 
number of conductors, gauge, and color if • If time allows, you can mount the control
required (i.e. DA-T, 2c/22, Yel). devices during the layout process. This
allows the installer to connect the flex to the
Pay close attention to: devices during raceway installation. It is
required for the installer to follow all device
• Wire size and load requirements for
mounting installation requirements described
Outputs (i.e. Multiple Actuators).
in the product literature (provided with each
• Wire size and temperature offsets for device), Section 3.4.H of this guide, FAN
Analog Inputs (ie. The resistance of 410.
wire could alter accuracy of
temperature reading on runs greater • Reference: Appendix E, Wiring Guidelines
than 100 feet.). for more information on preferred cables and
other information critical to proper
• Note: For more information on wire
installation.
sizes vs. load requirements and wire
sizes vs. temperature offset, please 4. Repeat for all remaining control devices in the
refer to Appendix E. system.
• For tubing, include the type, size, and 5. Using the Point Schedule, check your work to
quantity if used (i.e. 2 x 1/4" poly). make sure you have not missed any devices.
• The Point Schedule details object 6. Once all of the devices are located, determine:
names, number of conductors, and
normal wire gauge. Do not overlook a. Where to mount the control panel in
any power wiring requirements order to require the least amount of pipe,
shown in the Termination or cable and wire. Some other panel
Comments columns of the Point mounting considerations include:
Schedule. Be sure to count these i. Contract Drawings may show a
when figuring the number of location.
conductors!
ii. Accessibility for raceway to
Johnson Controls Electrical Budget Tool (EBT)
enter the enclosure.
provides a sample layout drawing for each
standard system. The drawing will show devices, iii. Space available for other panels.
cables, raceways, panels, etc. The intent is to iv. Clearance requirements when the
simply show the installation requirements in panel door is opened.
electrical installer terms. These drawings can be
used as a starting point when working with v. Installing height.
Standard Systems. The drawings were created for vi. Wall or Surface type.
budgeting purposes and are intended to show one
possible wiring layout. Actual equipment vii. “Free standing” Panel
locations must be verified for each standard requirements.
system. b. How to route the raceways to the panel.
Other Notes: c. Determine if all cables meet the
• Avoid writing directly on walls or guidelines documented in the “Metasys
ductwork with markers. Someone may tell Cable Standards.” Considerations include
you to clean it off! We recommend the length or run limits for resistive
use of duct tape or masking tape that later temperature inputs, 24VAC voltage drop
can be easily removed.

Johnson Controls, Inc.

3.3.H─2
SECTION 3.3.H:  
HVAC SYSTEM LAYOUT 
 
calculations, use of shielded cable for
inductive load switching, etc.
d. Size the raceways based on the
quantity and size of cables keeping in
mind any minimum raceway sizes
discovered during the specification
review. Fan 410 and the Metasys
Cable Standards document in BOS
(and in Appendix E) provide sizing
charts when Anixter cables are used.
7. Once the system is laid out, pay close
attention to anything that could reduce the
installation cost through field engineering.
Examples include changing line voltage
interlocks to low voltage or moving relays
from the panel to the field device. Call JCI to
discuss any desired engineering changes
before installing the system. Once approval is
obtained for the change, update drawings for
As Builts.
8. On the as-built documents or checkout forms,
document anything that differs from what you
expected.

Summary
System Layout is really one of the final steps to
installation planning. Once System Layout is
complete material and labor requirements can be
clearly understood and communicated.
System Installations performed before a complete
system layout is finalized often result in increased
cost and/or an incomplete system installations.

Johnson Controls, Inc.

3.3.H─3
SECTION 3.3.H:  
HVAC SYSTEM LAYOUT 
 
This page is intentionally blank.

Johnson Controls, Inc.

3.3.H─4
SECTION 3.4.H: INSTALLATION
MATERIALS AND PROCEDURES

The required penetrations shall be accomplished with

INTRODUCTION tools and equipment intended for this purpose. All
The following descriptions of materials and penetrations shall be accomplished in a workmanlike
procedures apply to all of the work you do for manner, clean and free from ragged or torn edges.
Johnson Controls. If there is a conflict between Penetrations shall be located to permit the raceway or
these materials and procedures and those cable to pass through the center of the penetration.
described in higher tier contract documents or Penetrations shall be sized to accommodate sleeves,
local codes, the more stringent requirements when required, and 1/2 inch space around the
shall apply. As such, users of this guide are raceway.
encouraged to obtain copies of, read, and
understand the installation requirements for their All penetrations shall be made in such a manner as
specific locations and projects. not to destroy the structure’s purpose for which it was
intended (i.e., weather tight, sound insulated,
Where the phrase “subcontractor or electrical firewall, radio frequency, etc.). The Johnson Controls
installer” is used in this section, this is intended project manager or lead system specialist shall be
to mean subcontractor or ALL subcontracted notified of all penetrations prior to performing the
installations and electrical installer for projects work.
that Johnson Controls self-performs. As
indicated in FAN-55.500 Subcontractor Guide, In no case shall the subcontractor or electrical
Subcontractors are expected to include ALL installer penetrate a structural member without
requirements in their bid unless given written written permission from a Johnson Controls, Inc.
direction from Johnson Controls. Lead System Specialist or Project Manager.

ASBESTOS Walls
Penetration of walls shall be in concealed accessible
In some cases, materials containing asbestos
locations, when possible. Walls shall not be used as a
such as wall board, joint compound, ceiling tile,
means of supporting the raceway passing through the
or floor tile may have been overlooked during
wall. In the case of wire, cable or control tubing
the asbestos survey. If at any time you come
passing through the wall, the wall penetration shall be
across a suspect material you believe to be
sleeved. The sleeve shall extend at least 1 inch
asbestos, not identified by the survey, that may
beyond the wall surface on each side and the ends of
be impacted by your work, stop work and
the sleeve shall be protected by a bushing or
contact Johnson Controls project supervision.
grommet.
Do not disturb the material. The Johnson
Controls Project Manager or Lead System
Specialist will work with the customer to have Floor Slabs
the material evaluated so work can proceed. All floor slab penetrations shall be provided in
accordance with the section entitled “Core Drilling.”
All floor slabs are considered structural members.
PENETRATIONS Therefore, the subcontractor or electrical installer
The access to, sizing of, layout of, and shall prepare and submit for approval detailed
construction of all penetrations required for drawings identifying the location and method of each
installation work under any contract shall be the penetration prior to performing the work. Floor slab
responsibility of the subcontractor or electrical penetrations shall be located in concealed accessible
installer. The subcontractor or electrical installer locations, when possible. Penetrations shall be
shall provide all necessary investigative work located adjacent to walls when possible. In no case
required to ensure that the penetrations do not shall penetrations be located in open floor space.
conflict with existing utilities, structural
members, and/or finished work.

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.4.H─1

SECTION 3.4.H: INSTALLATION
MATERIALS AND PROCEDURES

Core Drilling work for installation of our systems shall be the

All core drilling shall be accomplished by a responsibility of the subcontractor or electrical
competent individual having prior experience in installer. The subcontractor or electrical installer shall
performing this work. All core drilling shall be provide all necessary investigative work required to
done with core drilling equipment designed and ensure that the cuts do not conflict with existing
sized for the desired penetration. Floor X-rays or utilities, structural members, and/or finish work.
Scans shall be provided by subcontractors if The cuts shall be accomplished with tools and
required a project. These X-Rays or Scans shall equipment intended for this purpose. All cuts shall be
be included in the contractors bid if necessary. accomplished in a workmanlike manner, clean and
The use of impact devices such as hammer drills free from ragged or torn edges. Cuts shall be sized to
and chisels shall not be permitted. The core accommodate the material incorporated into the
drilling equipment shall be bolted into place to existing work.
prevent movement during drilling. All core
drilling shall be done wet, unless not permitted All cuts shall be made in such a manner so as not to
by the location’s environment. Drilling slurry destroy the structure’s purpose for which it was
shall be removed simultaneously with drilling. intended (i.e., weather tight, sound insulated,
All penetrations shall be plumb, true, and firewall, radio frequency, etc.). The general
square. contractor or owner shall be notified of all cutting
prior to performing the work.
The subcontractor or electrical installer shall be
responsible for providing the water required for In no case shall the subcontractor or electrical
drilling, the complete clean-up of the penetrated installer penetrate a structural member without
area, and the patching of mounting holes. The written permission from the general contractor or
subcontractor or electrical installer shall take all owner.
necessary precautions to protect the surrounding
areas (including that below the penetration) from Drywall Partitions
water, falling debris, etc. Cutting of drywall partitions shall be accomplished
by the use of a sharp knife or saw designed for that
Sleeves purpose. All cuts or penetrations in drywall partitions
Penetrations through all structural members, shall be patched to match the surrounding drywall.
floor slabs, exterior walls, and fire walls shall be All patching shall be tight to the sleeve, box, or
sleeved through the full construction of the conduit passing through the wall. The patching shall
penetrated member. The sleeve shall be sized for be performed in such a manner and with material so
the conduit or cable passing through the as to not destroy the classification of the wall (i.e.,
penetration. In no case shall the sleeve be more sound rating, and fire rating). The space between the
than 1/2 inch larger than the conduit, nor shall it sleeve and conduit shall also be filled as required to
be smaller than 1/2 inch diameter. Sleeves maintain the wall classification.
provided shall be steel. The sleeve’s wall
thickness shall be sized as required, but no less Masonry Walls (Non-Structural)
than 1/8 inch for structural members. Unless The cutting of masonry walls in exposed areas shall
otherwise directed by contract documents, a be made with a saw. The cutting of masonry walls in
sleeve shall be cut flush with the penetrated concealed areas may be done with a chisel. Cuts shall
member. be located, when possible, in the voids of masonry
blocks. All cuts and penetrations shall be patched and
CUTTING, PATCHING AND FIRE filled with mortar to match the surrounding surface.
All patching shall be tight to the sleeve, box, or
PROOFING conduit passing through the wall. The space between
The access to, sizing of, layout of, and the sleeve and conduit shall be filled as required to
construction of all cuts required for installation maintain the wall classification.

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.4.H─2

SECTION 3.4.H: INSTALLATION
MATERIALS AND PROCEDURES

Concrete Walls (Non-Structural) of the fireproofing will be as required by the project

When the cutting of concrete walls is permitted, plans and specifications.
the wall shall be scored with a saw on both sides Fire walls which require “fire pads” behind wall
of the wall prior to chiseling. All cuts and boxes shall be provided.
penetrations shall be patched and filled with
mortar to match the surrounding wall. All Under Floor Air Distribution Systems
patching shall be tight to the sleeve, box, or Under Floor Air Distribution Systems (UFAD) have
conduit passing through the wall. The space special sealing requirements. Plenum Integrity is the
between the sleeve and conduit shall be filled as MOST CRITICAL factor affecting UFAD system
required to maintain the wall classification. operation as they must maintain .05” plenum static
pressure.
Structural Members
The cutting of structural members is not In order to do this they must have proper physical
authorized without prior written approval from construction of Walls, floor, raceways, sleeves, ducts,
Johnson Controls, Inc., the general contractor, etc. Remember the saying ”Make a hole, Seal a
and/or the owner and should be done in hole!. ”
accordance with the contract documents and all ALL wall boxes and raceways must be effectively
applicable codes. sealed. This includes not only the area around a
raceway penetrating a wall but the area inside the
Floor Slabs raceway itself.
When the cutting of concrete floor slabs is
permitted, the floor slab shall be scored on both
sides with a saw prior to chiseling. All cuts and
DEMOLITION
When a new control system is being installed to
penetrations shall be patched and filled with
replace an existing system the proper demolition,
mortar to match the surrounding surfaces. All
removal and off-site disposal of the existing control
patching shall be tight to the sleeve, box, or
tubing, wiring, conduits and raceways, control panels
conduit passing through the floor slab. The
and boards, and electrical/pneumatic controlled
space between the sleeve and conduit shall be
devices is the responsibility of the subcontractor or
filled as required to maintain the floor slab
electrical installer. When working in an occupied
classification.
building, the demolition shall be scheduled to limit
the down time of equipment and to not disturb the
Fire Proofing
occupants.
Fire proofing and/or fire stopping of
penetrations will be the responsibility of the Extra precautions and attention should be taken to
subcontractor or electrical installer creating the ensure safe demolition.
openings. All openings in fire proofed or fire Unless otherwise noted, all electrical or pneumatic
stopped components shall be closed by using fire material removed shall be disposed of in accordance
resistive silicone foam sealant. This sealant shall with all federal, state and local codes and regulations.
prevent the passage of fire, smoke, toxic gases
or water as shown or called for in the project’s It will be the responsibility of the subcontractor or
plans and specifications. Foam sealant shall electrical installer to completely clarify the scope of
conform to the fire rating of the wall or fire rated demolition work and the work schedule with Johnson
floor in which the penetration was made. Controls Management. Subcontractors are required to
ensure this is addressed prior to submitting a bid.
The repair of sprayed-on fireproofing will also
be the responsibility of the subcontractor or
electrical installer creating the damage. Patching

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.4.H─3

SECTION 3.4.H: INSTALLATION
MATERIALS AND PROCEDURES

CLEANUP shall be installed in a workmanlike manner and in

The subcontractor or electrical installer is accordance with the project specifications.
responsible for all cleanup associated with the Tubing will be sized by Johnson Controls personnel.
work they perform. This includes but is not In no case should any tubing less than 1/4 inch be
limited to: used without the written approval of the Johnson
 Removing and disposing of all cartons, Controls project manager or lead systems specialist.
packing debris, wire and cable scraps All tubing shall be identified and tagged in
 Removing all personal trash and debris, etc. accordance with Johnson Controls control drawings
and/or point schedules. All tubing shall be tagged at
 Vacuuming all work areas (when occupied each end, and where spliced or terminated, with a
by owner) Johnson Controls approved identification system.
 Vacuuming all control panels
Copper Tubing
 Removing all fingerprints and markings on All copper tubing shall be ASTM B75 round
finished surfaces, including equipment seamless hard drawn copper or annealed soft tubing.
control panels and ceiling tiles The minimum wall thickness should be 0.022 inch.
It is mandatory that cleanup be performed every Soft tubing should be used where the installation
day. If the subcontractor fails to clean up, requires many bends or turns and where the tubing
Johnson Controls will issue a written directive to will be concealed. Hard tubing shall be used for long
do so. If the subcontractor continues not straight runs or where the tubing is exposed and a
cleaning up the job site, Johnson Controls may neat job is required. Hard drawn copper shall be used
perform the work and backcharge the for all high pressure air mains above 50 psi, for all
subcontractor. Johnson Controls may also control lines run in close proximity to steam lines, or
terminate the subcontractor for failing to comply as specified within the contract documents. Hard
with the directive. drawn tubing should be supplied with one end pre-
flared to ensure a cost effective and time-saving
AIR PIPING installation.
For subcontractors, all air piping and fittings
required for a complete installation of the Polyethylene Tubing
pneumatic control portion shall be furnished, All plastic tubing shall be flame retardant virgin non-
delivered, and installed by the subcontractor. Air metallic tubing listed for UL 94 and conforming to
piping shall be seamless copper tubing or stress-crack test ASTM D1693. The minimum wall
polyethylene tubing. thickness should be 0.040 inch. An acceptable
Tubing provided under the subcontract shall be manufacturer is Dekoron, part number 1219 FR.
manufactured by a manufacturer regularly
engaged in supplying such products for at least Polyethylene Tubing in a Carrier System
two years. Also, this manufacturer’s products When required by contract documents, install
must have been installed and successfully used polyethylene tubing in a conduit or raceway system.
in similar installations for at least two years. It is the subcontractor’s responsibility to ensure that
Tubing and fittings shall be new material, clean the conduit and raceway selection, size and
and free from rust, oil, grime, etc. installation methods are in accordance with contract
documents and all state and local codes. At no time
Conceal tubing whenever possible. Exposed shall the fill ratio exceed 40%. See Appendix E.
tubing may be run only in mechanical rooms,
storage rooms, or other areas where mechanical Polyethylene Whips
systems’ piping is exposed. All control tubing On projects requiring copper tubing installation,
contract documents may allow the actual connection

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.4.H─4

SECTION 3.4.H: INSTALLATION
MATERIALS AND PROCEDURES

to a control device with polyethylene tubing. In All solder used to join copper tubing shall contain
these instances, the subcontractor should use 50% tin and 50% lead or 95% tin and 5% antimony.
pre-manufactured polyethylene whips. A All joints should be coated with a self-cleaning flux
polyethylene whip should meet all requirements prior to soldering.
for polyethylene tubing and be pre-flared on the
end that connects to the copper tubing. An Fittings for Polyethylene Tubing
acceptable manufacturer is Dekoron, part
number 1219-4400W. Barbed Fittings
Barbed fittings are the most economical and efficient
Fittings for Copper Tubing means of connecting polyethylene tubing. Fittings
Fittings are used to connect two or more pieces shall meet the functional requirements of SAE J-512,
of tubing. To achieve the desired results when ASA and ASME. Use only brass fittings in sizes of
selecting the fittings for tubing connections, 1/4 inch and 3/8 inch. Most common fitting patterns
consider: are barb x barb tees, straight barb x barb couplings,
 The tubing type straight barb x barb reducing couplings, 90-degree
barb-to-barb couplings, 90-degree barb-to-barb
 The installation location reducing couplings, and straight barb to compression
 The function desired adapters.
The following sections describe the types of
fittings required by Johnson Controls for Tubing Clamps
different tubing installations. Use tubing clamps to ensure airtight connections
between tubing and plastic barb fittings or between
tubing and smooth fittings that have been supplied by
Compression Fittings
others. For example, tubing clamps should be used to
Compression fittings should only be used at connect to a variable volume box, factory-supplied
control device terminal points, such as pneumatic controller.
connections to instruments or operators. This
allows for easy removal or replacement of a
control device. Compression Fittings
Compression fittings may be used with polyethylene
Fittings shall meet the functional requirements
tubing only when specified by contract documents or
of SAE J-512, ASA and ASME. Use only brass
required by a written Johnson Controls directive.
fittings in the sizes of 1/4 inch, 3/8 inch and 1/2
inch. All copper tubing connections above 1/2 Compression fittings must meet the functional
inch should be soldered. requirements of SAE J-512, ASA and ASME. Use
only brass fittings in sizes of 1/4 inch and 3/8 inch.
Compression fittings can loosen and leak air.
When using compression fittings with polyethylene
Never install compression fittings in inaccessible
tubing discard the brass ferrule and substitute a
areas.
plastic ferrule in its place.
Compression fittings can loosen and leak air. Never
Soldered Fittings
install compression fittings in inaccessible areas.
Soldered fittings shall be used in copper tubing
installations at all connections except where the Tubing Holders
tubing is joined to a controller or controlled It shall be the subcontractor’s responsibility to ensure
device. Soldered fittings shall be made from that all tubing is supported and fastened in
copper mill products per ASTM B75. accordance with the contract documents and the
following guidelines.

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.4.H─5

SECTION 3.4.H: INSTALLATION
MATERIALS AND PROCEDURES

Straps at least two years. In addition, this manufacturer’s

Tubing straps are available for copper and products must have been installed and successfully
polyethylene tubes, in single and double tube used in similar installations for at least two years.
types. Use these straps only where one (1) or The subcontractor shall use the correct fastener for
two (2) lines are run on a hard surface, such as the material in which the holder is being secured. All
walls, ceilings, air ducts, etc. The straps shall be questions about installation methods shall be resolved
secured with screws, anchors or drive pins. in writing by the Johnson Controls lead system
specialist or project manager.
Plastic Snap-In Tube Racks For more information regarding anchors please
Snap-in tube racks hold nine (9) 1/4 inch and reference the Anchoring Devices section of this
one (1) 3/8 inch copper tubes per rack. Use document.
where more than two (2) lines are run. Racks
shall be secured with screws or anchors, CONDUITS AND RACEWAYS
depending on the surface on which they are For subcontracted installations, all conduits and
mounted. raceways required for a complete installation of the
control system wiring and cabling shall be furnished,
Beam Clamps delivered, and installed by the subcontractor.
Use where copper or polyethylene tubing is Conduits and raceways shall be used in accordance
attached to structural steel. Beam clamps should with the NFPA 70 National Electric Code, NFPA 101
be the setscrew clamp-on type. Life Safety Code, and shall be UL listed.
All conduits and raceways shall be new material,
Drop-In Hangers clean, free from rust, oil, or grime. Conduits shall be
Use drop-in hangers to install multiple copper or supplied in full lengths and cut to fit the application.
polyethylene tubes on any hard surface or Pieced work will not be accepted.
vertical plane. Hangers shall be secured with Conduits and raceways shall be installed in a
screws or anchors, depending on the surface on workmanlike manner and in accordance with the
which they are mounted. contract specifications, NFPA 70, National Electric
Code and all state and local codes.
Nylon Ties The subcontractor or electrical installer shall run all
Use nylon ties to tie groups of copper or raceways parallel with and perpendicular to building
polyethylene tubing in bundles. Nylon ties can lines. They should avoid installing systems that:
be used to support a tubing run from an existing
trapeze system but should not be used to tie • are improperly supported (e.g., sagging between
polyethylene tubing to threaded rod. Nylon ties supports or use of improper support methods)
with a mounting hole can be used to secure • Contain field-bends that are kinked, flattened, or
tubing groups to a flat surface. poorly measured.

Tubing Anchors • Have cabinets, cutout boxes, and enclosures that

Anchors shall be suitable for the application and are not plumb or not properly secured.
manufactured for the purpose intended. The use For more information, see ANSI/NECA 1-2000,
of plastic wall anchors in drywall partitions shall Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in
not be permitted. All anchors provided under Electrical Contracting, and other ANSI approved
this contract shall be of a commercial grade and installation standards.
shall be products supplied by a manufacturer
regularly engaged in supplying such products for It should be noted that not all projects require control
cabling to be installed in conduit or raceway. For

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.4.H─6

SECTION 3.4.H: INSTALLATION
MATERIALS AND PROCEDURES

subcontracted work, it shall be the Conduits shall be supported by hangers spaced in

subcontractor’s responsibility to clarify this accordance with the National Electrical Code.
requirement with Johnson Controls at the time of Hangers shall be selected and used for the intended
bid. However, as a minimum, conduit and purpose for which they are manufactured and shall be
raceway shall be required when control wiring is used in accordance with UL approved support
installed in the following locations, or when methods with UL listed products. When required,
required by code: support shall be seismically rated per local codes.
The use of tie-wire or conductors to support conduit
• Mechanical rooms
shall not be permitted.
 Electrical rooms and closets
Flexible Metal Conduit shall be used as vibration
 Telephone rooms and closets isolation and shall be limited to 3 feet in length when
terminating to HVAC equipment. Flexible Metal
 When exposed
Conduit shall be UL listed. When required by project
 When installed in non-accessible locations specifications or local code Liquid Tight Flexible
 Exterior applications Conduit (Seal-Tight) may be required for vibration
isolation.
Conduit and raceways shall be selected and
sized in accordance with the National Electrical All fittings and raceways, regardless of type, shall
Code, project requirements and all applicable meet specification requirements and local codes.
state and local codes. Specification minimum
raceway and wire sizes shall also be adhered to. Exterior Applications
See Appendix E and the Metasys System Cable As a minimum, conduits installed for exterior
and Wire Standards section of FAN-410, for applications shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC),
Conduit/Wire fill charts. Schedule 40 when installed underground. Exposed
exterior applications shall be installed in either RMC
Conduit and Fittings (Rigid Metal Conduit) or IMC (Intermediate Metal
Conduit, when required, shall be installed and be Conduit).
of material as specified herein. Conduit shall be
installed level, plumb, at right angles to the All PVC conduit and fittings shall be installed to
building lines, and shall follow contours of the provide a liquid-tight raceway. All fittings shall be
surface to which it is attached. The cut ends of manufactured for the intended purpose of being used
conduit shall be square and free of burrs and with PVC conduits. Couplings shall be the adhesive
sharp edges. Conduits shall be bent with proper type, applied per manufacturer’s recommendations.
tools and equipment, free from kinks and Elbows shall be PVC and factory manufactured.
disfigurements. Field bending of elbows shall not be permitted. When
cut, PVC conduit shall be square and free from burrs
When practical, conduit shall be concealed in and sharp edges.
walls, floors and ceilings, unless otherwise
indicated in the plans and specifications. Flexible liquid-tight conduit shall be used as
Conduits shall be ganged together whenever vibration isolation, and shall be limited to 3 feet in
possible and run parallel to one another. length when terminating to HVAC equipment.
Flexible liquid-tight conduit shall be UL listed.

Interior Applications Conduits shall be supported by hangers spaced in

accordance with the National Electrical Code.
At a minimum conduit used for interior
Hangers shall be selected and used for the intended
applications shall be Electrical Metallic Tubing
purpose for which they are manufactured and shall be
(EMT), zinc coated, and shall be in accordance
UL approved supporting methods and products. The
with ANSI Std. C80.3, and bear the UL label.

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.4.H─7

SECTION 3.4.H: INSTALLATION
MATERIALS AND PROCEDURES

use of tie-wire or conductors to support conduit are attached. PVC raceways shall be ganged together
shall not be permitted. whenever possible and run parallel to one another.
All PVC raceway covers will be fit in place at the
Sizing completion of the work, including covers in panels.
All conduits, regardless of type, shall be sized
by the subcontractor or electrical installer for the
PULL BOXES
Pull boxes shall be sized and located in accordance
number and size of the conductors to be installed
with the National Electrical Code. The location shall
in the conduit in accordance with the National
allow easy access to the pull box without interference
Electrical Code. Fill capacities shall be strictly
from the building structure or other utilities. Pull
enforced. See Appendix E and the Metasys
boxes shall be penetrated for conduits with tools and
System Cable and Wire Standards section of
equipment intended for such a purpose. The number
FAN-410 for more information.
of knockouts removed or punched shall be limited to
the number of conduits serviced. Unused knockouts
Raceway and Accessories
or holes shall not be permitted. The type of box shall
Raceway shall be installed where indicated in
be selected for its intended purpose.
the contract documents, in finished areas and by
surface mounting, only when conduit cannot be At a minimum pull boxes mounted in wet locations
concealed in walls, ceilings or floors. shall be a NEMA 3R type. The pull box shall be
penetrated in such a manner as to not destroy the
Metal Raceway NEMA 3R rating. Where allowed liquid-tight PVC
pull boxes may be used.
Metal raceway shall be Wiremold or equivalent.
All components shall be factory fabricated and Pull boxes in finished, exposed, and concealed areas
painted. All fittings, couplings, elbows, device shall be a NEMA 1 type with screw type covers.
boxes, and covers shall be provided by the same
manufacturer and be of the same size and model. DEVICE BOXES
Device boxes shall be sized to accommodate the
All metal raceway shall be installed level,
conduits and conductors they service and shall
plumb, at right angles to the building lines and
conform to the requirements of the National
shall follow the contours of the surface to which
Electrical Code. Provide device rings as required to
they are attached. Metal raceways shall be
incorporate the intended devices to be installed. The
ganged together whenever possible and run
number of knockouts removed or punched shall be
parallel to one another.
limited to the number of conduits serviced. Unused
Where surface mounted metal raceway knockouts or holes shall not be permitted. Device
(Wiremold) is required to be run exposed (in boxes shall match the conduit or raceway servicing
non-mechanical room spaces) pre-approval is the device box. When device boxes are set in mortar
required. or concrete, the box shall be steel, and the couplings
shall be concrete tight.
PVC Raceway
Flush Mounted
PVC raceway shall be Panduit or equivalent. All
Device boxes that are to be mounted flush with the
components shall be factory fabricated. All
finished wall shall be anchored securely behind the
fittings, couplings, elbows, device boxes, and
wall, at the heights indicated on the contract
covers shall be provided by the same
documents. The boxes shall be mounted in such a
manufacturer and be of the same size and model.
manner as to prevent movement. The outer edge of
All PVC raceway shall be installed level, plumb, the boxes shall not extend beyond the finished
at right angles to the building lines and shall surface of the wall. When device boxes are set in
follow the contours of the surface to which they

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.4.H─8

SECTION 3.4.H: INSTALLATION
MATERIALS AND PROCEDURES

mortar or concrete, the box shall be steel, and Plastic wall anchors in drywall partitions shall never
the couplings shall be concrete-tight. be permitted.
BAD
Surface Mounted Not enough
support behind
Surface mounted device boxes shall be securely the wall for
support
mounted to the finished wall surface at heights
indicated above the finished floor. The box shall
be anchored in at least two places, and shall be
free from movement. When mounting in
finished areas the device box shall match the
raceway serving the box. When mounting in
unfinished areas, the box shall be steel.

Boxes for TEC Series Thermostats

All boxes for TEC Thermostats shall be a Plastic Anchor
minimum of 4 inches by 4 inches by 2 1/8
Figure 1 Plastic Anchor (Unacceptable)
inches deep.
Standard “Zip-It” screw anchors are also not
Do to the unique design of the TEC space is
acceptable. The do not provide support behind the
needed for input and output wiring, power
wall and the drywall crumbles and breaks around the
wiring and communications. In addition an End
anchor if the device, after being mounted, is bumped
of Line device may be required. These
(as an example a thermostat would “normally” be
requirements dictate the necessary space
bumped in a hallway).
provided by deep boxes.

ANCHORING DEVICES
Appropriate anchors for the surface (wall,
ceiling, floor, etc.), application and support
requirements shall be used. Anchors, used in
drywall applications, must provide support to the
back side of the wall surface. Plastic, Screw-in
or any other anchor type that do not provide
such support shall not be used. BAD
Crumbled
Sheetrock

‘Zip It’ Screw in Anchor

Figure 2 'Zip It' Screw in Anchor (Unacceptable)

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.4.H─9

SECTION 3.4.H: INSTALLATION
MATERIALS AND PROCEDURES

There are several styles of “Zip It” anchors that GOOD

do provide support behind the wall. These Wing nut opens
behind the wall
anchors are very effective and provide ultimate
efficiency.
GOOD
Toggle flips out
to support
behind the wall

Toggle Bolt

Figure 5 Toggle Bolt (Acceptable)

‘Zip It’ Screw in Anchor

with Toggle
WIRING AND CABLING
Figure 3 Screw in Anchor w/Toggle (Acceptable)
General
Other “legacy” anchors such as “toggle bolts” or All wiring and cabling shall conform to the NFPA 70
“molly bolts” also work very effectively but are National Electric Code, and be in accordance with all
slightly more labor intensive to install. state and local codes plus project specifications for
GOOD the location in which it is installed. Wires and cables
Bolt
compresses to shall meet the applicable requirements of NFPA 70
support behind
the wall
and UL for the type of installation, jacket, and
conductor specified or required. Fire Alarm system
wiring shall meet UL 760. Wires and cables
manufactured more than 12 months prior to delivery
to the site shall not be used.
All wiring shall be installed in a workmanlike
manner, free from splices. For subcontractors, wires
or cables that are nicked, scraped or damaged shall be
replaced at no cost to Johnson Controls. Service
loops for all wiring and cabling shall be provided in
Molly Bolt
all control panels, or in the closest pull box to the
Figure 4 Molly Bolt (Acceptable) device being wired.
Make all connections to controllers utilizing copper
conductors.
All control wiring to all Johnson Controls’ panels,
equipment, and devices shall be provided and
installed by the subcontractor or electrical installer.
Locate equipment and route wiring so that signal
wiring is separated from line voltage power wiring.
Do not run communication bus (Ethernet, N1, N2,
Zone Bus, Field Controller Bus, Sensor & Actuator

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.4.H─10

SECTION 3.4.H: INSTALLATION
MATERIALS AND PROCEDURES

Bus, Input or Output wiring in the same conduit electrical noise, the subcontractor or electrical
or bundle as line voltage wiring at 30 VAC or installer shall use shielded cables to avoid
above, or wiring that switches highly inductive communication issues.
loads (contactor coils, relay coils, motors, or
As with all electrical practices, consistency is
generators).
expected. For example, proper continuity for bus
Bus wiring may be run in the same conduit or wiring from device to device and from terminal to
bundle with input or output wring, where terminal is essential. If you are an electrical installer
convenient. and have any questions about how to install or wire a
system, you must get direction from project
Low Voltage Cabling leadership before proceeding.
Route cables neatly to promote good ventilation,
Important: Due to the repetitive nature of system
visibility, testing, and ease of service.
installations, a best practice is to validate the first
Cables shall be installed parallel with and systems you install before proceeding with the rest
perpendicular to building lines of the installation. This practice eliminates rework
and associated costs.
Provide some slack in the wires and cables. If
using preconfigured cables, coil and secure any Much of the HVAC system cabling is considered
excess cable. Class 2 as defined by the National Electrical Code
(NEC). This classification means that the current it
Protect cables all along their route. Do not run
carries is less than 100 volt amperes. Subcontractors
cables near moving parts. Avoid sharp bends,
and Electrical Installers must therefore read and
abrasion, and the potential for severing or
understand Article 725 (of the NEC) in its entirety. In
crushing the cable.
addition, they are encouraged to meet local
Ensure proper grounding for bus cable that authorities having jurisdiction to understand specific
requires a shield. local amendments and interpretations.
Ensure proper EOL termination on As stated previously, Class 2 wiring cannot exceed
communication buses. 100VA by definition. The classification of wiring is
determined by the power supply. Transformers that
Use dedicated transformers for 24 VAC supply
feed most of the control wiring in Johnson Controls
power to network devices to isolate the network
installations is marked “Class 2.” Circuits that exceed
devices from inductive spikes, or provide surge
the 100VA limit are no longer Class 2 and must be
protection on the primary side of the 24 VAC
installed in a raceway.
supply power transformers.
Unless local codes have more stringent requirements,
When the binary outputs (BO) of a controller are
Class 2 wiring requires independent support every
used to source power for an inductive load (for
five feet and cannot be attached to conduit or other
example a contactor, starter, or other coil)
raceways unless the raceway contains power supply
consider using a separate transformer for the
conductors that connect to the same controlled device
inductive loads. This will avoid creating a
as the Class 2 wiring. The reason for this is the Class
current path for inductive spikes to be coupled
2 wiring could interfere with the dissipation of heat.
directly to the control circuitry of the controller.
If a separate transformer is not available, install As an example, attaching a motor start-stop status
surge protection, as follows, across the inductive cable to the conduit containing the motor leads is
loads to prevent mis-operation of the controller acceptable (see NEC, Article 725.58). No other
(Johnson Controls P/N AS-MOVKIT-0 or cables are allowed to be attached to the raceway.
Electrocube P/N RG1782-6 or RG2031-6).
Often authorities and inspectors choose to
In an installation where cabling is subjected to inappropriately apply Articles other than Article 725
transients because of its proximity to sources of of the NEC to Class 2 wiring. Article 725.3 (of the

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.4.H─11

SECTION 3.4.H: INSTALLATION
MATERIALS AND PROCEDURES

2008 NEC) makes it clear that other Articles of If required to run in conduit, fire alarm
the NEC shall not be applied to Class 2 circuits communication cables will be run in conduit systems
unless they are specifically referenced in Article containing only fire alarm system wiring.
725.
That said and understood does not seem to Cable Size
eliminate misguided authority during inspection All cable shall be sized and typed as specified by
and approval. As such, Johnson Controls Johnson Controls or project specifications. At no
requires the following guidelines for cable time shall the conductors be smaller than No. 24
support to avoid undesirable situations. While AWG.
some of the examples shown are per the NEC
other are merely generally accepted installation The subcontractor or electrical installer shall use
practices. Johnson Controls Point Schedules to determine the
typical cable or wire size to be used. It shall be the
subcontractor or electrical installer’s responsibility to
Building
increase the size of conductors based upon actual
Structure installation conditions or project requirements. The
Independent Bridle
J Hook
two most common conditions that may require
Support Ring
Approved and
conductor size adjustment are:
Tagged for
Purpose Low Voltage Cable • Length of run for Analog style inputs.
Inputs used for analog readings shall not
Ceiling Tile
exceed 3 ohms of resistance for the entire
circuit.
Figure 6 Generally Accepted Installation Practice
• Voltage drop on 24 Power Circuits. 24
volt power voltage drop shall not exceed
2 volts from source to farthest device
under maximum load conditions.
Building
Structure Note: See Appendix E or the Metasys System
Ceiling Cable and Wire Standards in FAN-410 for more
Support
Wire
EMT information.
Low Voltage
Cable

Ceiling Tile

Figure 7 Not Accepted Installation Practice

Never tie cable directly to all-thread rods
without providing a means of protection
between the cable and rod. Without the
protection, vibration will cause the cable to fail.
All wiring and cabling shall be identified and
tagged in accordance with Johnson Controls
project requirements, control drawings, scope of
work and/or point schedules. All wires and
cables shall be tagged at each end, and where
spliced or terminated, with a Johnson Controls
approved identification system.

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.4.H─12

SECTION 3.4.H: INSTALLATION
MATERIALS AND PROCEDURES

spreading of fire. Because this air is supplied to the

Cable Types environment, there is the danger of spreading toxic
For most situations cable types, unless products of combustion that can impair vision in a
superseded by local code or projects fire fighting or egress situation. For this reason,
specifications, shall be of the types listed in the plenum rated cables (type CL2P or higher) and tie
table below. This includes inputs, outputs, raps must be used when exposed in ducts, plenums,
24VAC power, and communication cables. or other space used for environmental air.
Wire Cable Type
Purpose
Ethernet Ethernet Cat. 5 or 6 Data Cable 24AWG
4 x 2PR
FC – 22/3 stranded twisted shielded
MS/TP sheathed.
SA 22/4(2pr) stranded twisted shielded
sheathed.
N2 22/3 stranded twisted unshielded
sheathed.
All inputs 22/3 or 22/2 conductor stranded twisted
or outputs unshielded sheathed. Figure 8 Plenum Ceiling Space
except BO
BO* <0.8A@24VAC 22/3 or 22/2conductor
stranded twisted unshielded sheathed
(20VA at less than 75’ one-way
distance).
LON FTT-10 22/2 conductor stranded twisted
unshielded sheathed.
LON TP-1250 22/2 conductor stranded
twisted unshielded.
24 VAC* 18/2 conductor stranded twisted
unshielded sheathed. Note: Resizing
may be required to limit voltage drop to
2 Volts.
Metastat 24/8 conductor solid unshielded Cat. 3 Figure 9 Non-Plenum Ceiling Space
data cable.
Network 24/6(3 pair) conductor solid unshielded
Sensor RJ Cat. 3 data cable In an installation where cabling is subjected to
Term (SA) transients because of its proximity to sources of
electrical noise, you should install FC-MS/TP, SA,
Network 22/4(2pr) stranded twisted shielded N2, Inputs or Outputs cable, or multiple cables with
Sensor sheathed.
Screw
22/3 or 22/2 conductor stranded twisted shielded
Term (SA) sheathed to avoid communication issues.
Note: See Appendix E or the Metasys System Cable
and Wire Standards in FAN-410 for more
See Appendix E or the Metasys System Cable information on cable recommendations including
and Wire Standards in FAN-410 for more Anixter part numbers.
information regarding wire gauge vs. voltage
drop or resistive limit distances. Cable Color Coding
Ducts, plenums, and other air-handling spaces Regarding color, for most projects, cables are to be
have a greater supply of oxygen for the selected to provide the lowest possible cost.

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.4.H─13

SECTION 3.4.H: INSTALLATION
MATERIALS AND PROCEDURES

For all projects, unless superseded by code or MS/TP, SA or LON Cable Guidelines in Appendix E,
specification, the Normal Color Coding Communication Technical Literature in Appendix F
Standard for Cables shall be: and FAN-410.
• Blue Jacket for N2 or FC-MS/TP Bus. Communication Bus, when shielded,
• Brown Jacket for the SA Bus (Screw • May be run in the came conduit or bundle as
terminating only). 24 VAC power wiring.
• Whatever color provides the lowest cost for • Must be handled and terminated properly.
all other cables. (According to the product engineering team,
improper handling of the shields can create
Bus cable must be purchased from Anxiter. Use
installations that are less stable than if no
CBL-22/3-FC-PLN for Plenum Installations and
shield was provided at all.)
CBL-22/3-FC-PVC for EMT / Raceway
Installations. • Only one hard ground connection of the
Shield exists per bus segment. This hard
Exterior Jacket is Blue and labeled as ‘Johnson
ground should be made at the NAE/NCM
Controls FC BUS Cable’
when it exists on a segment otherwise it
Premium Cable Standard for Cables: should be located at the repeater or other
The Premium Metasys wiring color standard device where the segment originated.
will be available for customers who require a • All other Shield connections MUST be
color-coded wiring systems. This standard is as isolated from ground unless communication
follows: problems persist. See Figure 10 Bus Shield
• N2 or FC-MS/TP Bus shall be Blue Termination using Terminal or Figure 11 Bus
Shielding Isolated for proper termination
• SA Bus shall be Brown methods.
• Analog Input Cable shall be Yellow • When communication problems persist on a
MS/TP or N2 bus add a soft ground to the
• Analog Output Cable shall be Tan
shields where appropriate. The soft ground”
• Binary Input Cable shall be Orange shall be installed within one inch of entering
the respective enclosure with a 560 pF
• Binary Output Cable shall be Violet
capacitor. This additional protection should
• N1 Bus. Ethernet - Cat 5 or Coax shall be not be needed for most situations.
Purple
• For LON FTT-10, when shielded cable is
• 24VAC Cable shall be Gray used, must have the shield grounded in one
location. This ground should be located
• Spare Cables shall be White within one inch of entering the enclosure. If
• Lon cable shall be Pink possible, this ground should be located at the
NAE. The shield is required to be continuous
Communication Network Cables: through the rest of the system and isolated
Ethernet, N1, N2, FC-MS/TP, SA, LON, from ground.
& SLC (Fire) • Refer to the Johnson Controls Literature
All communication (network) cabling to all relating to the specific communication bus
Johnson Controls panels, equipment, and for additional precautions and connection
devices shall be provided and installed by the details.
subcontractor or electrical installer in
accordance with the Ethernet, N1, N2, FC-

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.4.H─14

SECTION 3.5.H:
SETTING ADDRESSES, DIP SWITCHES & JUMPERS

See the example below for address 133.

SETTING ADDRESSES, DIP SWITCHES
ON
AND JUMPERS
In addition to running raceways, pulling cables
and terminating controllers it is important for
installers to understand how to set controller
addresses, jumpers and dip switches. To prevent a
second visit by a technician, it is practical for the
installer to set these items at the time the 128 + 4 + 1 = 133
controller is terminated.
As a best practice, it is beneficial to start with the
largest switch setting possible. For the first example
Setting Addresses above [Address Setting 10] you would start with
Systems of different protocols may have specific
switch 8 then switch 2. Total equals 10.
addressing requirements. In addition, devices can
have specific address setting requirements. It is For the second example above [Address Setting 133]
important for the installer to understand what the you would start with switch 128 then switch 4 then 1.
expectations are for the system being installed. Total equals 133.
It is absolutely critical that addresses be set Some devices, like the TEC Thermostat Controllers,
correctly. The importance of this activity cannot use their own configuration settings to specify the
be overstated. Duplicate Addresses and address. Refer to the instructions provided with each
Controllers set incorrectly or undocumented are device to set the device address.
extremely hard to troubleshoot and historically Also not all binary address switches have their
the number one reason for lost time during system corresponding binary values listed directly on the
commissioning. switch or controller. Normally under this condition
use the following Table to determine their valve and
Physical Address Switches resulting address:
Most devices for JCI N2 and BACnet® MS/TP Switch Number Binary Value
systems use an eight-segment two-position switch.
1 1
ON
2 2
3 4
4 8
5 16
Each switch segment can be set to on or off.
These are commonly referred to as “binary 6 32
switches.” The sum of all switches set to the ON
position equals the address for a controller. 7 64

See the example below for address 10. 8 128

ON

8 + 2 = 10

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.5.H─1

SECTION 3.5.H:
SETTING ADDRESSES, DIP SWITCHES & JUMPERS

pool. When a pool is full of waves, how long does it

LON System Addressing take the waves to completely go away? Hours? This
LON Systems handle addressing of system is the analogy of an un-terminated network. When a
controllers entirely different than N2 or signal hits the end of the wire, the signal is reflected
BACnet®. back onto the wire in a phase differing from the
original wave. This signal is superimposed back on
A LON device address is hard coded as a neuron top of the original signal. This continues until the
ID. It is a hardware address and therefore the ID signal on the network is much like the waves in a
changes if a piece of hardware is removed and pool. A collection of random amplitudes and signals
replaced. The important thing to understand is that all thrown in together to form mush.
the Neuron ID is unique for each and every device
(node) on the network. No EOL = No Signal Cushioning
(Bounce Back and Noise)
Most LON devices are provided with two No
removable stickers with the neuron ID printed on EOL
them. It is required for the installer remove one
sticker and place it on a Room Schedule or floor
plan identifying the system where the LON device As a rule, if you are terminating one bus cable then
is installed. This number can then be typed in you are at the EOL.
manually during software configuration, saving There are three methods for EOL termination. The
another trip to the device to press service pin to required method is dependent on the type of device
capture the neuron ID. terminating at the EOL.
All three of these methods are hardware
End-Of-Line Termination
characteristics and could be required regardless
An End-Of-Line (EOL) terminator typically sits at
of protocol (i.e. N2, BACnet, LON, etc.).
the physical ends of the network and acts as a
damper preventing unwanted reflections of signals • Self-Terminating (i.e. ASC Controllers).
at the end of the wire. The best analogy is to
associate electrical energy to waves in water. • Built in EOL Switch (i.e. NAE)
Envision a wave traveling along the ocean’s • No built in EOL Switch (i.e. TEC)
surface. This is analogous to electrical energy
traveling along a wire. Now that we understand the reason and methods for
EOL termination, let us review the requirements for
EOLs can be thought of like the beach at the equipment manufactured by JCI. JCI currently
ocean. When waves strike the beach, the energy of manufactures or supports three system controller bus
the wave is dissipated and the wave ceases to types:
exist. The water gently oozes back into the ocean,
but not as a wave. This is the role of the EOL • N2 Open
terminator. It dampens the wave when it reaches • BACnet® MS/TP
the end of the line.
• LON
EOL Provides Signal
Cushioning (No Bounce Back) Each of these three systems has different protocols
and as such has different cabling, baud rates and EOL
EOL termination requirements. However, the goal of EOL
termination is the same, to prevent unwanted
reflections of signals at the end of the wire.
Contrast this to your local swimming pool. The
The location of the first and last controllers on the
solid vertical sides of the swimming pool reflect
bus absolutely must be noted on the As-Built
the incoming wave nearly perfectly back into the

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.5.H─2

SECTION 3.5.H:
SETTING ADDRESSES, DIP SWITCHES & JUMPERS

documents for actual End-Of-Line termination that EOL termination be properly applied to each
locations. segment and device on the FC Bus.
Since the requirements for each system are Most of the new Metasys BACnet MS/TP products
different we need to review each one have a built-in EOL termination switch that allows
independently. you to enable a Metasys MS/TP device as an EOL
termination device when you install the device on the
N2 Open network.
The N2 Bus communicates on the Field Controller
(FC) Bus and is very installation fault tolerant.
Items like shorted wires, loose terminations,
improper shielding, and lack of End-of-Line
terminations are often overcome by this high
tolerant design, controller communication
“retries” and a much lower baud rate requirement
(9600-baud max).
In addition, many N2 devices are designed to be
self-terminating devices (but can still be installed
anywhere on the N2 segment). It is best, if
possible, to end a bus segment at a device with
self-termination. These devices include the UNT, On the Johnson Controls NAEs, and MS/TP capable
VAV, VMA, DX and AHU controllers. Other N2 FECs, IOMs, and VMAs, the EOL switches enable or
devices do not have this self-termination and disable EOL termination and a biasing network
should have EOL termination added when they circuit designed for Metasys network applications.
are at the end of a bus segment. In these
applications, where a bus segment must be When planning FC Bus segments for MS/TP
terminated with a non self-terminating device, use applications, try to ensure that the network devices
a Johnson Controls MS-BACEOL-0 RS485 End- connected at the end of the bus segments have an
of-Line Terminator to terminate the N2 bus integral EOL termination switch (in the ON position).
segment. Some Johnson Controls sensors (TEC2600 Series
In the past, when this situation occurred, you may network sensors) and third-party MS/TP devices do
have used a 220 ohm resistor across the + and – of not have integral EOL termination and network
the N2 Bus wiring. While this resistor may biasing, and in some MS/TP applications, a device
function, for optimum performance, we strongly without integral EOL termination must be located at
recommend the use of the MS-BACEOL-0 RS485 the end of a bus segment. In these applications, where
End-of-Line Terminator. a bus segment must be terminated with a non-EOL
device, use a Johnson Controls MS-BACEOL-0
RS485 End-of-Line Terminator to terminate the bus
BACnet MS/TP segment. Refer to the MS-BACEOL-0 RS485 End-
BACnet MS/TP stands for BACnet® Master- of-Line Terminator Module Installation Instructions
Slave/Token-Passing. The MS/TP products (Part No. 24-10264-4) for more information.
communicate over the FC Bus and operate at
much higher baud rates than the N2 products.
Higher baud rates make the MS/TP trunk
applications less fault-tolerant than N2 trunk.
These higher baud rates on MS/TP trunks require

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.5.H─3

SECTION 3.5.H:
SETTING ADDRESSES, DIP SWITCHES & JUMPERS

LON
There are two terminators used on LONWORKS
network applications. These are attached across
the two conductors at the physical ends of the
network segment, or where appropriate.
• FTT-10 - 105-ohm resistor, 1% tolerance,
¼ watt. Part number NXM-TERM-FTT.
• TP-1250 - R-C network. Part number
NXM-TERM-1250. Or refer to
LONWORKS Twisted Pair User’s Guide.

Input and Output Dip Switch and Jumper

Settings
Various JCI Controllers have different switch
setting requirements for inputs and outputs based
on the type of input or output and the field device
it is connected to.
For example, an input may be 0-10 VDC, 4-20
mA or RTD, etc. An output may be 0-10 VDC, 4-
20 mA, 24 VAC, etc. Outputs can also be
internally or externally sourced (powered). In
addition, field devices may require switching high
(the hot) or switching low (the common).
The engineered Termination Details show all
input and output switch and jumper settings.
It is absolutely critical that switches be set
correctly. The importance of this activity cannot
be overstated. Switches set incorrectly are
extremely hard to troubleshoot and historically
another reason for lost time during system
commissioning.

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.5.H─4

SECTION 3.6.H:
CHECKING YOUR HVAC WORK

Installation Verification, on the other hand, means to

INTRODUCTION provide evidence of setting in position and
Johnson Controls suggests that prior to scheduling connection for use. Providing reports that a system
a technician to the site, to start the systems; they has been validated IS NOT normally required but can
should be validated by the subcontractor or help the subcontractor or electrical installer simply
electrical installer. This should not preclude first document the state of a system at the time of
system validation by Johnson Controls as installation completion.
mentioned in previous sections. First System
validation tests are critical to ensure installation It is also important to note that Commissioning, by
quality, cost control and are effective in definition, does not include Installation Validation or
identifying cost savings ideas. Installation Verification tasks.

To properly validate an installation there are four Some of the typical Installation & Installation
basic system tests that should be performed as Validation Tasks include:
applicable: • Properly mounting and installing raceways,
• Checking the System Controller Bus devices and panels

• Checking the Ethernet System Bus • Pulling, tagging and tracing cabling and
wiring
• Checking System Input and Outputs
• Applying and validating line and low voltage
• Checking Power and Hardwire Interlocks power wiring
To ensure it is understood what installation • Validating polarity, distance limitations and
validation vs. commissioning means, it is performing termination of the system
important to review some of the basic terms and
normal activates associated with each • Setting Addresses, Dip Switches and
responsibility. Jumpers

• Commissioning means to put into active • Installing or locating resistors or circuit

service. terminators

• Installation means to set in position and • Crimping. testing or terminating cables or

connect for use. wires

• Validation means to establish the Some of the typical Commissioning Tasks include:
soundness of something. • Combining individual systems and
• Verification means to prove the truth of components into one overall complete and
by presentation of evidence. APPROVED system

Now that it is clear what each term means, • Performing System startup
Installation Validation merely means to establish • Sequence of Operation Validation (always)
the soundness of setting in position and and Verification (as required)
connection for use. It has nothing to do with
documentation and is a cornerstone for any • Software diagnosis and modification
contractor or employee wanting to ensure quality • Tuning and Calibration of Loops or Sensors
work. As a subcontractor or electrical installer you
would not dream of installing a light switch and • Validating Network Communication
not making sure it worked. This same logic is true
• Performing System Demonstrations
for system control wiring.
• Addressing final occupant issues

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.6.H─1

SECTION 3.6.H:
CHECKING YOUR HVAC WORK

BASIC EXPECTATIONS CHECKING THE SYSTEM CONTROLLER BUS

Please note that Validation (checking your work)
Checking the system controller bus requirements
IS expected and is simply a best business practice.
differ depending on the type system being checked
It is done to ensure the readiness level of the
and project requirements. Before performing final
system for commissioning. Generally, unless the
terminations, for all systems, at a minimum, you must
contract documents require it, Verification
use a Multi-Meter to perform the following tests:
(documentation) is voluntary.
• Stray Voltages Test:
At a minimum the system should be validated to
ensure: o Check for stray voltages each circuit
conductor to ground and across each
• All conduit and wire installation is
circuit pair.
complete and conforms to the job
specifications, submittals and applicable • Ground Faults Test:
codes.
o Verify there are no ground faults on any
• All wiring has been field tested for: circuit conductors except required
Ground faults (none), circuit continuity grounding conductors.
and resistance, short circuits, and stray o Verify shields (if used) are insulated
voltages. from ground at all points along the circuit
• All conductors, cables, devices and panels except as recommended by the
are properly labeled. manufacturer. Shields are typically
terminated only at the point of origin.
• All system devices have been installed in
accordance with the approved submittal • Circuit Continuity & Resistance Test:
drawings and equipment installation o Verify the correct value of end of line
instructions. resistor is installed on circuits that
• The required primary and back-up power require them.
(if required) sources are present at the o Verify no end of line resistor or
panel(s) and connected. termination circuit is installed on circuits
• All communication cabling has been that do not require them.
validated and documented to meet system o Verify shields (where required) are
requirements. continuous.
• As-built drawings are completed and on o Verify there are no open circuits.
site ready for pick up.
o Verify there are no wire-to-wire short
IMPORTANT: Ensure that all cables are circuits.
disconnected from power sources and network
communication buses before cutting or Detailed prodcedures for testing shields and bus
crimping. Cutting or crimping cables before conductors is documented in Section 3.4.H
completely disconnecting it can result in While typically NOT REQUIRED there is a sample
damage to the connected devices and void any “GENERAL SYSTEM WIRING VERIFICATION”
warranties. sheet at the back of this section that can be used to
document and then verify the installation of Bus
wiring.
Regardless of the system being installed, it is
important to recognize when other system controllers

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.6.H─2

SECTION 3.6.H:
CHECKING YOUR HVAC WORK

are already operating on the bus. Sometimes

construction projects are executed in phases or the
Testing Bus Conductor Procedure
bus is part of a retrofit project. Accidental shut
You are required to test each bus segment conductor
down of systems can have severe repercussions.
for BACnet, N2 and LON bus communication cables
As such, extra care must taken into account ensure
end to end with the following procedure:
we do not effect the operation of existing systems.
The test is obviously best performed with two
Testing Shielded Bus Cable Procedure installers and radios
1. Remove power or unplug connectors from all
Regardless of use, if shielded cable is used you bus controllers on the segment
are required to test the shield for grounds at every
segment with the following procedure: 2. Before grounding any of the bus conductors
use a Volt-Ohm-Meter (VOM) to validate no
The test is obviously best performed with two
grounds or voltages exist on the segment.
installers and radios
Correct as necessary.
1. Isolate the ground at every point as the
3. Performing the test one bus conductor at a
controllers are terminated and ensure a
time; temporarily ground the each wire at the
continuous drain
far end of the bus segment (last controller on
2. Before grounding at the point of origin a segment)
(i.e. NAE or Repeater) use a Volt-Ohm-
4. Using the VOM - measure between new
Meter (VOM) to validate no grounds exist
temporary ground and each wire at the point
on the segment. Correct as necessary.
of origin
3. Temporarily ground the drain wire at the
5. If you see an open, the conductor is not
far end of the bus segment (last controller
continuous, situation must be corrected
on a segment)
6. If you see a short to ground your trunk is
4. Using a VOM - measure between new
continuous. Good to continue
temporary ground and the drain wire at
the point of origin 7. Remove the temporary ground at the far end
and re-plug connectors at controllers if
a. If you see an open, the drain wire
removed
is not continuous, situation must
be corrected
N2 BUS and BACnet® MS/TP
b. If you see a short to ground your Voltage readings, for these Bus Systems, MUST fall
trunk is continuous. Good to within the following voltage ranges:
continue.
Measurement Lower Limit Upper Limit
5. Remove the temporary ground at the far
end + to REF 2.45 VDC 2.98 VDC

6. Ground the bus at the point of origin. – to REF 2.06 VDC 2.54 VDC

Note: This procedure is best performed with + to – +0.38 VDC +0.92 VDC
validation of point to point wiring for +, - and
Com at the same time.(see Testing Bus
Conductors below) From a hardware point of view the BACnet® MS/TP
bus, like the N2 Bus, is a RS-485 bus. Obviously it
communicates with a different protocol. In light of
this and until more information can be studied and

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.6.H─3

SECTION 3.6.H:
CHECKING YOUR HVAC WORK

published please use the voltages above to Pass/Fail, counts all devices on the bus and identifies
validate BACnet MS/TP wiring. each controller by type for display.
Note: Because of the robust nature of the N2 bus, The same connector the N2 Bus uses to connect to an
a bus with voltages outside of these ranges may NAE or NCM will plug directly into the top of the
still communicate, but it is operating in an tester. This means that normally no terminations are
impaired state. Increased bus traffic or additions required to use the instrument.
to the bus can result in communications problems.
If your readings are not within the ranges listed
above, that particular wire is most likely
grounded, shorted, or crossed with another wire.
The electrical installer must correct any
voltage readings that are outside of the ranges
listed. It is best to go half way down the bus, split
it into two segments and measure each. Continue
this process until the problem is isolated,
identified and then finally corrected.
When voltages outside of this range are found
please check the following:
• End of Line termination is set correctly.
• Low values usually indicates:
o A short circuit exists between +, –
and/or the REF at some point on the
bus
Once power is supplied to the N2 controllers,
o + or – is reversed on one or more of addresses are set and bus terminations are made, it is
the system controllers a very simple to use tool that requires pressing “one
For more information on EOLs please review the button” and no training. It takes approximately one
“End-Of-Line Termination” section of the minute to test an entire bus segment. Using the
“Setting Addresses, DIP Switches and Jumpers” ComBus Quick Tester, assuming a bus is properly
document in this manual. installed, will cost on average 75 cents to perform for
each bus segment.
The Metasys N2 Bus Systems has other tools
available to make installation validation quicker On the other hand, if the bus is improperly installed,
and easier for the Electrical Installers (rather than the most capable individual to troubleshoot an
use Multi-Meters). Two such tools are the: installation problem is the very person that ran the
cable and addressed the controllers. This work
• ComBus Quick Tester process ensures that “lessons are learned” and
• Metasys Checkout Tool promotes an environment of almost no rework. Less
rework supports our goal of satisfying customers and
making a profit.
ComBus Quick Tester
ComBus Quick Tester Features include:
The ComBus Quick Tester will quickly test an
entire N2 bus segment. It checks all three bus • Pluggable 4-Position N2 Bus Connector
voltage readings, to the values listed, indicating
• 2 Line by 8 Character Backlight Display

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.6.H─4

SECTION 3.6.H:
CHECKING YOUR HVAC WORK

• Scroll-up and Scroll-down buttons

• End of Line Slide Switch to allow use
anywhere on the Bus
• Start button Starts or Stops Testing
Metasys
• Automatic power after 5 Minute inactivity Checkout
Tool
• Self protected from accidental connection
to 24VAC Power Sources
• Rugged drop resistant case
• Uses two standard AA alkaline batteries
• Checks for Master connected and polling
• Checks bus DC voltage levels and
polarity – Displays levels and Pass/Fail
• Scans device addresses 001 to 255 to
The Metasys Checkout Tool provides a semi-
Identify and count each device
automated method to check the wiring of controllers
• Displays device count and checksum for on the N2 or Zone Bus.
engineering blueprint crosscheck. Once power is supplied to the N2 or Zone Bus
• Scrollable Device Address and 2 or 3 controllers, the Metasys Checkout Tool allows you to
Character Device Code Identifier validate the communication wiring. In addition it can
validate input/output wiring and provide
The user manual is included in Appendix F for sensor/actuator setup. The tool does not allow the
your use. downloading of controllers.
For more information, please contact B&B For system Bus testing the tool is used after
Electronics regarding the Johnson Controls installation to validate:
ComBus Quick Tester. Part number MS-CQT485-
0. • wiring of N2 or Zone Bus controllers
B&B Electronics • addresses of all the controllers
707 Dayton Road
The checkout is typically done before the mechanical
PO Box 1040
system is operational. The data collected by the Palm
Ottawa, IL 61350
compatible handheld device is stored in a database
PHONE 815-433-5100
and can be given to a Johnson Controls representative
FAX 815-433-5109
or used to create a verification report (if required).
www.bb-elec.com
The user manual is included in Appendix F for your
use.
Metasys Checkout Tool
The Metasys Checkout Tool helps the user For more information, please contact your local
perform basic installation and wiring checkout Johnson Controls representative.
through a Palm™ compatible handheld device or TECHNICAL LITERATURE
laptop computer (via a Palm™ Emulator).
Note: Due to the wide variety and ever changing For more information on the BACnet
serial port on Palm™ Handheld devices only Communication Bus, please reference the Appendix
some Palm™ devices models are supported. F.

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.6.H─5

SECTION 3.6.H:
CHECKING YOUR HVAC WORK

For more information on the N2, BACnet or LON

Communications Buses, the ComBus Quick
Tester or Metasys Checkout Tool please reference
the CD in Appendix C. .

CHECKING THE ETHERNET BUS

JCI’s Supervisory Controllers or Engines will
often reside on an Ethernet Bus for user
interaction with the system. This Ethernet Bus can
be either dedicated or customer supplied. Often
the customer supplied Networks will have other
systems (besides JCI’s) operating simultaneously
with the system.
Even dedicated systems can have other
Controllers, Engines or Workstations operating
that are not part of a current project being
installed. Accidental shut down of these systems For validating terminations only, there are many
can have severe repercussions. As such, extra care inexpensive RJ45 cable testers available on the
must be taken in account to ensure we do not market. These are also generally available electronic
effect their operation. and hardware stores. An example tester is shown in
Appendix E.
When systems are installed on a customer’s
network, close coordination with their Network IT
department is very important.
Typically standard Ethernet installation rules
apply. The most common errors seen are:
• Improper Terminations
• Maximum Length is exceeded.
Note: The maximum distance for any CAT5
segment is 328 ft (100m). If this distance must be
exceeded please contact JCI for direction.
There are several industry standard tools available
that test both these errors. Fluke LAN 620 Anixter (JCI preferred supplier) sells Registered
Cablemeter or Fluke Microscanner Pro are Jacks (RJ) style terminators and RJ crimping tools.
excellent choices for checking CAT5 cable The recommended crimping tool facilitates proper
(Distance & Wiremapping). Another less pin-out positioning of the cable conductors in the
expensive alternative is the Test-UM TP600 connectors by allowing the wire to pass entirely
LANRomerPro™. through the connector. They are available for both
RJ-12 and RJ-45 connectors.

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.6.H─6

SECTION 3.6.H:
CHECKING YOUR HVAC WORK

Note: Any field installed RJ Jacks shall be tested installations, to purchase preconfigured cables. These
by the subcontractor or electrical installer and cables are available in different lengths and are
documented by machine printed wire labels available from Anixter.
installed on each end of the cable (within 6 inches
See Appendix E for Anixter contact information and
of each jack) with the date and time the test was
part numbers to purchase preconfigured cables, the
performed and the name or initials of the installer
RJ-style connectors and RJ crimping tool.
performing the test.
Note: Any field installed RJ Jacks shall be tested by
See Appendix E for Anixter contact information
the subcontractor or electrical installer and
and part numbers to purchase the RJ-style
documented by machine printed wire labels installed
connectors and RJ crimping tool.
on each end of the cable (within 6 inches of each
While typically NOT REQUIRED there is a jack) with the date and time the test was performed
sample “NETWORK COMMUNICATION and the name or initials of the installer performing
WIRING - ELECTRICAL INSTALLER the test.
VERIFICATION SHEET” at the back of this
An example tester is shown in Appendix E. Note this
section that can be used to document and then
same tester can be used for testing terminations for
verify the installation of Ethernet Bus wiring.
the Ethernet system cables.
See FAN-410 for more information on Ethernet
While typically NOT REQUIRED there are sample
bus installation requirements.
Controller Checkout Sheets at the back of this
section. These sheets can be created for your use by
CHECKING INPUT AND OUTPUTS JCI. They are produced from the Point Schedule and
Without a computer and appropriate software are available upon request.
complete validation of Inputs and Outputs is often
impossible by the electrical installer. Again NOT REQUIRED for N2 Systems the Metasys
Checkout Tool helps the installer perform basic
At the very least the electrical installer is expected installation and wiring checkout through a Palm™
use a Multi-Meter to ensure there are no: compatible handheld device or laptop computer (via a
• Ground faults, short circuits or stray Palm™ Emulator).
voltages present on the cable before it is It performs installation validation and verification of
connected to the controller. Inputs/Outputs and makes sensor/actuator setup
• The measured circuit continuity, voltages quicker and easier.
or resistance are with the range expected. Notes:
Cable used for analog style inputs should
not exceed 3 ohms of cable resistance for • It is still important for the Installer to ensure
the entire circuit. no ground faults, short circuits or stray
voltages present before connecting this tool.
Sometimes Air Handling Unit controls, and
usually for Zone controls, there are typical or • Due to the wide variety and ever changing
repeated system types throughout a project. It is serial port on Palm™ Handheld devices only
highly advisable to validate one such system some Palm™ devices models are supported.
before repeating the system installation multiple The user manual is included in Appendix F section
times. This helps reduce rework and ensures the for your use.
lowest cost for JCI is achieved.
For more information please contact your local
Many of JCI’s thermostats use RJ style Johnson Controls representative.
terminators. Some use an eight conductor (four
pair) RJ-45 while others use six conductor (three
pair) RJ-12. It is recommended, for ALL plenum

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.6.H─7

SECTION 3.6.H:
CHECKING YOUR HVAC WORK

CHECKING POWER AND HARDWIRE

INTERLOCKS
Most systems contain some wiring that not
associated directly with communication, inputs or
outputs from controllers. Some common examples
are:
• Power Wiring
o 120V Circuits
o Dedicated 24 VAC Circuits
o Shared 24 VAC Circuits
• Safety Wiring (low and line voltage)
o Low Limits
o High Limits
• Interlocks (low and line voltage)
o Exhaust Fans
o Pumps
o Lighting
Power and hardware interlocks are extremely
important.
As an electrical installer, you would not dream of
installing a light switch and not making sure it
worked. This same logic is true for interlocks and
power wiring. You are expected to always
validate these types of circuits.

Johnson Controls, Inc. 3.6.H─8

DX-9100 CONTROLLER - SUBCONTRACTOR CHECKOUT FILE NAME: Site Director ID
JOB NAME: FAN 55.510 Electrical Installer Guide NCU#: 1 REF DWG
CONTRACT NO: 1234-5678 N2 TRUNK: 1 No.
LOCATION: N2-CHWS N2 ADDR: 30
CHECKOUT INFORMATION:
HDW SYS/OBJ INTERM. DEVICE FIELD DEVICE REMARKS
POINT NAME TYPE CHK TYPE CHK Power: LPP6 Circuit 22
DO-3 CHW-N2/CH1-EN IDEC Relay Control Panel (NO) (Sw Hi)
DO-4 CHW-N2/CHWP1-C Veris Command Relay Starter (NO) (Sw Hi)
DO-5 CHW-N2/CHWP2-C Veris Command Relay Starter (NO) (Sw Hi)
DO-6
DO-7
DO-8
DI-1 CHW-N2/CHWP1-S Veris Relay (Internal CR) Motor Status
DI-2 CHW-N2/CHWP2-S Veris Relay (Internal CR) Motor Status
DI-3
DI-4
DI-5
DI-6
DI-7
DI-8
AI-1 CHW-N2/OA-T TE
AI-2 CHW-N2/CHWS-T TE
AI-3 CHW-N2/CHWR-T TE
AI-4
AI-5
AI-6
AI-7
AI-8
AO-1
AO-2
AO-9
AO-10
AO-11
AO-12
AO-13
AO-14

NOTES:
6/19 All wiring and devices are properly tagged.
6/19 Checked all wiring for stray voltages, etc. None Present.
6/19 Validated all wiring for safeties.

SIGNATURES: Sparkey Voltage DATE: Jun-19

6/16/2006
This page is intentionally blank.
GENERAL SYSTEM WIRING VERIFICATION
JOB NAME:
CONTRACT NO:
SYSTEM NAME:

SYSTEM WIRING & CHECKOUT GUIDELINES

(1) Installation Validationis not to commission or calibrate devices but rather to provide a means for the installing contractor to certify the installation is complete.
(2) Verification is required to provide a 100% certification of installed work. At a minimum a complete end-to-end check of all wiring installed. Termination Start point through all Termination Junction Points to the Final Termination Point.
(3) Follow all NEC and local code restrictions
(4) Follow JCI Cable Standards and Project contract specifications for allowed cable installation requirements
(5) For more information regarding proper installation review specific details for the system being installed provided by System Manufacturer.
(6) Electricial Installer should be on site for each system during initial commissioning mobilization.
(7) Verify all Tagging is complete
(8) Verify all Addresses and Jumpers are set

Ground Fault Test: Circuit Continuity & Resistance Test: Stray Voltage Test:
(1) Verify there are no ground faults on any circuit conductors except required grounding (1) Verify the correct value of end of line resistor is installed on circuits that require them. Check for stray voltages each circuit conductor to ground
conductors. (2) Verify no end of line resistor is installed on circuits that do not require them. and across each circuit pair.
(2) Verify shields are insulated from ground at all points along the circuit except as (3) Verify shields are continuous.
recommended by the manufacturer. Shields are typically terminated only at the point of origin. (4) Verify there are no open circuits.
(5) Verify there are no wire-to-wire short circuits.

WIRING - CHECKOUT INFORMATION

Circuit Termination and Address /
Ground Fault Continuity & Stray Voltage Tagging Jumper Set
System, Wiring Label and/or Circuit Identifier Starting Point of Segment Ending Point of Segment Test Resistance Test Confirmed (if applicable) Additional Remarks

Example: DA-T Example: AHU-1 Controp Panel Example: AHU-1 DA-T Sensor Passed Passed Passed Yes Yes

NOTES:

SIGNATURES OF INSTALLERS:

DATE OF VALIDATION:

Johnson Controls, Inc. Confidential

NETWORK COMMUNICATION WIRING - ELECTRICAL INSTALLER VERIFICATION SHEET
JOB NAME:
CONTRACT NO:
BUILDING NAME:

NETWORK COMMUNICATION WIRING - GUIDELINES

(1) Follow all NEC and local code restrictions
(2) Follow standard cable installation quidelines
(3) Follow project contract specifications for allowed cable installation requirement
(4) For additional information regarding proper JCI communication bus installation please review: FAN 410 Field Installation Handbook or for Fire & Security Projects the 'Code of Practice'.
(5) The maximum distance for any CAT5 segment is 328 ft (100m). If this distance must be exceeded please contact the JCI project manager

NETWORK COMMUNICATION WIRING - RECOMMENDED TOOLS

(1) Fluke LAN 620 Cablemeter or Fluke Microscanner Pro used for checking CAT5 cable ( Distance & Wiremapping )
(2) Anixter RJ45 Crimping Tool for putting the ends on CAT5 cables
(3) Anixter BNC Crimping Tool for making Coax Cable Connections

NETWORK COMMUNICATION WIRING - CHECKOUT INFORMATION

Wire Jacket
Starting Point of Segment Ending Point of Segment Length (ft) Terminated Labeled Additional Remarks

Example entry: NAE-01 in basement mechanical room Port 12 of the Cisco switch in 2nd floor EC 216 yes yes

NOTES:

SIGNATURES OF INSTALLERS:

DATE OF VALIDATION:

Johnson Controls, Inc. Confidential

TAB PAGE

Directions to printer:

Remove this page and create a Tab titled, “Section 4: Contracting

Tier & Branch Org.”
SECTION 4:
CONTRACTING TIERS & SYSTEMS BRANCH
ORGANIZATION

Contracting tiers are typically organized by Division.

INTRODUCTION The Specification defines work and requirements for
Understanding Contracting and Organizational each Division.
structure is essential to specification
interpretation, communication and While all Divisions may effect our scope of work, the
interdependencies between trades. major focus for controls is generally portions of
Division 15 and 16. Most often, for HVAC
Contracting Tier (Where do we fit?) Conventional, Controls will be Section 15900.
The example below summarizes a typical HVAC The Contract Specifications Institute (CSI) publishes
conventional contracting structure. Some project a standard format for building construction
structures may vary. specifications and related site work. The CSI format
breaks down the various parts of a building
Owner
construction project into divisions. The traditional
CSI divisions are:
General Consultant /
Architect Division 1 – General Requirements
Contractor Engineer
Division 2 – Existing Conditions
Prime Electrical Fire Alarm Division 3 – Concrete
(Div 16) Contractor
Division 4 – Masonry
Prime Mech Johnson
(Div 15) Controls Division 5 – Metals: Structural & Miscellaneous
Division 6 –Wood, Plastics, and Composites
Controls
Construction Mgr Chiller Manuf
Electrical Division 7 – Thermal and Moisture Protection

Commissioning
Division 8 – Openings
Boiler Manuf
Agent
Division 9 – Finishes

AHU Manuf
Division 10 – Specialties
Other Trades
Division 11 – Equipment
Example: Division 12 – Furnishings
- Iron Work VSD Manuf
- Dry Wall
- Tile Work Division 13 – Special Construction
- Painting
Other Manuf
- Masonry Division 14 – Conveying Systems
- etc.
Division 15 – Mechanical
Test & Balance
Division 16 – Electrical
Subsequently, another division was added:
Contracting Tier Diagram Division 17 – Telecommunications, Cabling, Other
Technologies
Connecting lines represent a contractual
relationship. For example Johnson Controls has a Looking at the Contracting Tier Diagram and
contract with the Prime Mechanical (Div 15) understanding the work we have to perform, the
Contractor, but does not have a contract with the necessity of effective communication with all trades
General Contractor. is essential. Understanding your division
requirements is NEVER enough to get the job done.

Johnson Controls, Inc. 4─1

SECTION 4:
CONTRACTING TIERS & SYSTEMS BRANCH
ORGANIZATION

Your interpretation of the specification and other

contract documents MAY differ from the
interpretation others have of your work. As such,
you have a responsibility to effectively
communicate your position regarding contract
documents.

JCI Branch Systems Organization

Systems Branches vary in size. The
organizational chart shown below may vary.

Branch
Manager

Lead Systems Systems Team

Sales Admin
Specialists Leader

Subcontractors Systems Engineering Electrical

Systems Techs
Designers Aids Installers

Lead Systems Specialists report directly to the

Branch Manager.
In most branches, the Systems Technicians,
Systems Designers, Electrical Installers and
Engineering Aids report to the Branch Manager.
In the larger branches, a Branch Installation
Manager may exist and a Systems Team Leader
supervises the Systems Technicians, Systems
Designers, Electrical Installers and Engineering
Aids.
For larger projects a Project Manager may be
assigned. Project Managers report to the Regional
Installation Manager.
Electrical Subcontractors, for Systems
Installations work, most often report directly to
the Lead Systems Specialist or for larger projects
a Project Manager.

Johnson Controls, Inc. 4─2

TAB PAGE

Directions to printer:

Remove this page and create a Tab titled, “Appendix A: Safety”

 CONTRACTOR SAFETY PRE-QUALIFICATION CRITERIA

One of goals at Johnson Controls (JC) is to continuously exceed our customer’s expectations.
We achieve this goal whenever we provide our customers with the best possible products and
services while using the safest work practices and procedures.
Please review the attached JC Contractor Safety Specifications. If, you believe you can meet
JC’s expectations relative to safety and would like to be considered for contract work, complete
the attached Contractor Safety Pre-Bid questionnaire and return to the address indicated below.

Only those contractors that have demonstrated leadership in safety and have implemented

e
programs resulting in excellent safety performance will be utilized by JC. To qualify for work
with JC, contractors must have:

1. A workers’ compensation Experience Modification Rate of 1.0 or better (eg. 0.90).

2. A Lost Workday Incident Rate equal to or less than 3.0.
3. A Recordable Incident Rate equal to or less than 7.8.
4.
5.
the contractor’s work.

pl
No more than three serious OSHA violations in the last three year period.
A documented safety program that meets JC and government requirements applicable to

6. Supporting safety information verifying the contractor’s ability to comply with applicable JC
safety requirements and performance criteria (eg. training records, job hazard analyses,
etc.).

Contractors with safety records exceeding one or more of the first four criteria may be
m
considered an unnecessary risk and disqualified. These contractors are required to submit a
complete copy of their safety program as well as any other related documentation requested by
JC for further evaluation.

Forward completed Safety Pre-bid forms and related safety program information (if necessary,
based on safety pre-qualification criteria) along with proposal to:

Johnson Controls, Inc./Ltd.

Sa

ATTN: Project Manager

Street Address
City, ST Zip Code

NOTES:
Incident Rates = Number of injuries + illnesses x 200,000
Total hours worked by all employees
The Lost Workday Incident Rate is based on the total number of cases in columns 3 and 10 of
the OSHA 300 log.
The Recordable Incident Rate is based on the total number of cases in columns 2, 6, 9 and 13
of the OSHA 300 log.
This page is intentionally blank.
 Safety Pre-Bid Information Form

Company
Name:

Contact: Title: Telephone #:

Safety Contact: Title: Telephone #:

(past three years)

e
Experience Modification 20__ 20__ 20__
Rate (EMR)

(For United States, please submit an EMR Verification letter with this form.)

Accident Information
Number of Hours Worked:

Number of Fatalities:
pl 20__
(past three years)

20__ 20__
m
Recordable Incident Rate:
(# injuries + # illnesses) (200,000)
# hours worked

Lost Workday Case Incident

Rate:
(# lost workday cases) (200,000)
# hours worked
Sa

(Please submit your OSHA logs or WCB year-end statements for the past three years with this form.)

Has the company received a serious/willful OSHA YES † NO †

or provincial health and safety citation in the past three years?

If yes, please explain:

 Safety Pre-Bid Information Form

Does the company have a written Health & Safety Program? YES NO If “yes,” does it include the following
safety programs? (N/A = not applicable to the work being performed at the site).
Program YES NO N/A Program YES NO N/A
Accident Investigation Heat Stress
Asbestos Control Heavy Equipment
Back Safety Hot Work
Blasting Housekeeping
Bloodborne Pathogens Impalement Policy
Confined Space Ladder Safety
Cranes/Hoisting/Rigging Lead Awareness
Demolition Leading Edge

e
Electrical Safety Lockout/Tagout
Excavation/Trenching/Shoring Material Handling
Fall Protection Personal Protective Equipment
Fire Prevention/Protection Respiratory Protection
Hazard Communication Scaffolding Erection/Assembly
Hearing Conservation Other:

pl
How frequently is safety training conducted for employees?

How frequently is safety training conducted for supervisors?

Weekly

Weekly

Does the company conduct Job Hazard Analysis with employees before the start of the job?
please explain.
Monthly

Monthly

YES
Annually

Annually

NO If no,
m
Upon request, will the company provide a copy of the written safety program? YES NO If no, please explain.
Sa

Upon request, will the company submit employee safety training records? YES NO If yes, please explain.

Name of person who completed the above information:

Print Name Date Telephone Number

Signature
 SUBCONTRACTOR SAFETY SPECIFICATIONS

TOPIC PAGE

I. GENERAL........................................................................................................................................................2
II. STOP WORK POLICY.....................................................................................................................................2
III. SAFETY TRAINING.........................................................................................................................................2

e
IV. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT/SAFETY EQUIPMENT ..................................................................3
V. SAFETY AUDITS.............................................................................................................................................3
VI. SUBSTANCE ABUSE......................................................................................................................................3
VII. SMOKING AND TOBACCO PRODUCTS........................................................................................................3

pl
VIII. ACCIDENT/INJURY REPORTING ..................................................................................................................3
IX. CRISIS MANAGEMENT PLAN........................................................................................................................4
X. EMERGENCY RESPONSE/FIRST AID...........................................................................................................4
XI. RETURN TO WORK........................................................................................................................................4
XII. DISCIPLINARY PROCEDURE ........................................................................................................................4
XIII. JOB HAZARD ANALYSIS (JHA) .....................................................................................................................4
m
XIV. PERMITS.........................................................................................................................................................5
XV. COMPETENT PERSON ..................................................................................................................................5
XVI. WORKING AT HEIGHTS.................................................................................................................................5
XVII. EXCAVATION/TRENCHING/SHORING..........................................................................................................6
XVIII. CRANES..........................................................................................................................................................6
XIX. HELICOPTER “EXTERNAL LIFT” ...................................................................................................................6
XX. HOUSEKEEPING ............................................................................................................................................6
Sa

XXI. IMPALEMENT HAZARDS ...............................................................................................................................6

XXII. HAZARD COMMUNICATION ..........................................................................................................................6
XXIII. JOB SITE ACCESS .........................................................................................................................................7
XXIV. ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE .................................................................................................................7
XXV. ENVIRONMENTAL WASTE MANAGEMENT..................................................................................................7
XXVI. SPILL AND RELEASE REPORTING AND RESPONSE .................................................................................7
XXVII. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS/CONSIDERATIONS ....................................................................................7

Rev. 2/04 master subcontractor specifications Page 1 of 8

I. GENERAL
A. All Subcontractors (including all subcontractors working through subcontractor; hereinafter
“Subcontractor”) shall comply with all federal, state/provincial and local safety laws, rules and
regulations.
B. All Subcontractors will prepare a written safety program that applies to the specific work they are
performing at the site.
C. All Subcontractors shall follow all posted safety rules and those rules described in the Johnson Controls
(JC) Project Safety Manual.
D. All Subcontractors who hire lower-tier subcontractors to perform work at the site shall ensure that all
lower tier subcontractors follow JC Subcontractor Safety Specifications.
E. Any Subcontractor who creates a hazard shall eliminate the hazard before any further work may
proceed.

e
F. Hazards observed, but not created by the Subcontractor, shall be reported to JC immediately. All
Subcontractors shall avoid the hazard until it has been eliminated.
G. Subcontractors shall participate in a pre-job safety meeting with the JC project manager/engineer
before they are allowed to execute their job tasks.

II. STOP WORK POLICY

•
•
• pl
Whenever an imminent danger is present to any person, including, but not limited to, JC employees,
Subcontractor employees and third parties, the authorized JC employees and Subcontractor’s employees
have the right to stop work so that all hazards are abated, or safe work practices are incorporated. For the
purposes of this policy, an imminent danger includes, but is not limited to:
• A situation for which the individual is not properly trained or experienced.
A situation for which the individual is not equipped (i.e. safety or personal protective equipment).
A hazard that is not typical to the individual’s work activities or job.
A worker unfit for work due to the influence of alcohol or illegal or mind-altering substances.
m
• A danger that would normally stop work in the affected area.
Subcontractor’s employees are required to report all “stop work” actions immediately to their supervisor for
investigation. During the investigation, the employee refusing to work will not leave the site or return to the
work activity without authorization.
If the “stop work” action is used for legitimate safety reasons, the individual initiating the action (employee or
subcontractor) is protected from discipline, retribution or discrimination by JC.

III. SAFETY TRAINING

Sa

A. Safety Orientation Training

1. All Subcontractors shall attend the JC Safety Orientation training before they are allowed to
perform any type of work on the job site.
2. Subcontractors shall be identified by a JC hard hat sticker indicating that they have successfully
completed the JC Safety Orientation training.
3. Subcontractor shall at their own expense require its subcontractors, agents and/or employees to
comply with all applicable safety requirements. Prior to commencement of any work under this
Agreement, Subcontractor’s subcontractors, agents, and/or employee will complete a basic OSHA
construction training safety course, or its equivalent, that is related to the work that the
Subcontractor will perform under this Agreement. Subcontractor will provide JC with certification
that such training has been completed.
B. Weekly Toolbox Talks
Subcontractors shall conduct weekly safety toolbox talks every Monday morning and submit a copy of
their Safety Training Verification Form to JC no later than noon the following Tuesday.

Rev. 2/04 master subcontractor specifications Page 2 of 8

 C. Job Hazard Analysis
Subcontractors shall review and train their affected employees on the job hazard analysis that pertains
to the job tasks the employees will perform.

IV. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT/SAFETY EQUIPMENT

A. Personal Protective Equipment
1. Subcontractors shall supply their employees with the appropriate personal protective equipment
that meets the safety requirements outlined by federal, state/provincial and local safety laws, rules
and regulations.
2. The following personal protective equipment are mandatory on all JC construction sites without
exception:
a. Hard hats

e
b. Eye protection with side shields
c. Hard-soled work boots with leather uppers
3. Shorts, tennis shoes and tank tops are prohibited on all JC construction sites.
B. Safety Equipment

V.

VI. pl
Subcontractors shall supply their employees with the appropriate safety equipment that will meet the
safety requirements outlined by federal, state/provincial and local safety laws, rules and regulations.

SAFETY AUDITS
Subcontractors shall perform weekly safety audits of specific job tasks for which Subcontractor is
responsible for at the site. These audits shall be conducted every Thursday and submitted to JC no later
than noon the following Friday.

SUBSTANCE ABUSE
m
Possessing, using or being under the influence of alcohol or an illegal or mind-altering substance while on
the site shall be grounds for immediate and permanent removal from the site.
If onsite JC personnel smell alcohol or notice impaired behavior, the individual in question will be asked to
submit to a Breathalyzer test at an occupational clinic. Any employee with a blood alcohol level of 0.04 or
greater will be immediately and permanently removed from the site. Refusal to submit to a Breathalyzer test
will result in the immediate and permanent removal of the employee from the site.
JC reserves the right to conduct lawful searches.
Sa

VII. SMOKING AND TOBACCO PRODUCTS

The use of smoking and smokeless tobacco products will be allowed in designated areas of the site.

VIII. ACCIDENT/INJURY REPORTING

A. Subcontractors shall report all workplace accidents, injuries or illnesses, regardless of severity, to the
JC project manager/engineer.
1. Subcontractors shall complete the Employee/Subcontractor Injury/Accident Statement and the JC
Incident Investigation Report within eight hours from the time the incident occurred.
2. Subcontractors shall report all property damage using the Incident Investigation Report within eight
hours from the time the incident occurred.
B. The JC Corporate Crisis Management Plan will be implemented when there is an accident involving a
fatality or a single accident in which three or more workers are hospitalized.

IX. CRISIS MANAGEMENT PLAN

No one at the site shall discuss, talk or communicate with the media regarding any issues concerning the
site. The JC Crisis Management Team will be contacted immediately and they will appoint a spokesperson
for JC to communicate with the media.

Rev. 2/04 master subcontractor specifications Page 3 of 8

X. EMERGENCY RESPONSE/FIRST AID
A. Subcontractor shall follow the JC Site Emergency Action Plan.
B. In an emergency, immediately notify emergency personnel (911) and JC. Stay with the victim until help
arrives.
C. Each Subcontractor is required to have a first aid kit on site in the event of minor injuries.
D. Subcontractors are required to transport all non-emergency cases to the site's designated medical
facility. Injured employees are not allowed to drive themselves to the health care provider.
E. JC will monitor and track all injuries and illnesses on the site. This does not relieve Subcontractors of
their record keeping requirements.
F. Subcontractors shall complete the Employee/Subcontractor Injury/Accident Report and the Incident
Investigation Report when required.

e
XI. RETURN TO WORK
In the event of an injury with work restrictions, the Subcontractor will provide light duty work in accordance
with the doctor’s recommendations.

XII. DISCIPLINARY PROCEDURE

A.

1.
2.
3.
Written Reminder

pl
Safety rules have been established to protect all persons who have contact with the site. Failure to
abide by the safety rules will place fellow workers and others at risk. JC strictly enforces the disciplinary
action(s) below with subcontractors who work in an unsafe manner.
JC will use a three-step disciplinary program.

Two day suspension from site

Immediate and permanent dismissal from site
m
B. Zero Tolerance
Consideration will be given to work practices that may cause immediate danger to the life and health
(IDLH) of both the employee and anyone else who may be involved. The disregard of safety in these
situations will immediately result in step three. The following are a few examples of IDLH situations:
• Working without fall protection.
• Not being fit for work due to the influence of alcohol or illegal or mind-altering substances.
• Entering/working in trenches that do not have appropriate sloping, benching, or shoring.
Sa

• Working inside a permit-required confined space without a permit.

XIII. JOB HAZARD ANALYSIS (JHA)

Subcontractors shall submit a completed JHA Form to JC prior to starting any type of work at the site.
Before their work onsite begins, Subcontractors shall review their completed JHA’s with JC’s project
manager/engineer.
When required by the JC project manager/engineer Subcontractors shall complete a JC Job Hazard
Analysis Audit.

XIV. PERMITS
A. Fire Permit
Subcontractors shall use a JC hot work permit when conducting any welding, torch cutting and burning.
B. Confined Space Permit
Subcontractors shall use their own confined space permit. At a minimum, the permit will meet the
applicable federal, state/provincial and local safety laws, rules and regulations.

Rev. 2/04 master subcontractor specifications Page 4 of 8

XV. COMPETENT PERSON
A competent person shall mean a person who is capable of identifying existing and foreseeable hazards in
the surrounding work area or working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous or dangerous to
employees and others, and who has authorization to take prompt, corrective measures to eliminate the
conditions. A competent person is also a person who has extensive knowledge and experience in a
particular activity or job function, as well as knowledge of procedural and regulatory requirements.
Subcontractors shall designate a competent safety person for the following tasks:
• Scaffolding
• Excavation/Trenching/Shoring
• Fall Protection
• Steel Erection/Assembly

e
• Concrete & Masonry Construction
• Crane/Hoisting/Rigging
• Blasting

XVI. WORKING AT HEIGHTS

A.

B.
Fall Protection

Ladders
1.
2. pl
It is a JC policy that when fall protection devices like guardrails, nets, etc., cannot be provided and the
Subcontractor is exposed to a fall greater than six feet, they will use a personal fall arrest system. A
personal fall arrest system consists of full body harness and shock absorbing lanyard.

All ladders shall comply with all federal, state/provincial and local laws, rules and regulations.
All extension ladders shall be tied off at the top or a second person will hold and secure the ladder
m
at the bottom.
3. Subcontractors shall use a personal fall arrest system when they are exposed to a fall below the
level of the ladder.
4. Subcontractors shall comply with all manufacturer’s recommended maintenance and safety
requirements.
C. Scaffolding
1. It is JC’s policy that all scaffolding used on site that has a working surface higher than six feet have
guardrails. Each guardrail will consist of a top rail (height between 36 and 42 inches), midrail and
Sa

toe board (3.5 inches minimum height).

2. Subcontractors shall use a personal fall arrest system when they are working on scaffolding that
has a working surface higher than six feet but does not have a proper guardrail or complete deck.
3. Subcontractors shall comply with all manufacturers’ recommended maintenance and safety
requirements.
D. Aerial Lifts/Scissors Lifts
1. Subcontractors shall comply with all manufacturers’ recommended maintenance and safety
requirements.
2. Subcontractors shall use a fall arrest system at all times during their work in an aerial lift and
scissors lift.

XVII. EXCAVATION/TRENCHING/SHORING
A. Sloping
Subcontractors shall slope or bench all excavations that are less than 20 feet deep.
B. Shoring

Rev. 2/04 master subcontractor specifications Page 5 of 8

 1. Shoring is only allowed when the location or depth of the cut makes sloping back to the maximum
allowable slope impractical. Asphalt is not exempt from this requirement.
2. JC requires the use of either hydraulic or pneumatic shoring. Trench boxes can also be used either
alone or in combination with sloping.
3. Temporary spoil will not be placed closer than two feet from the surface edge of the excavation.
4. Access ladders will be within 25 feet from worker, be secured and extend at a minimum 36 inches
above the landing.

XVIII. CRANES
A. Crane operators must submit a copy of their valid training records and certification to JC before they
perform any type of lift on site.
B. Daily inspections are required on all cranes before and during use. Daily inspections will be submitted

e
to JC no later than 5:00 p.m. for each day the equipment is being used.
C. Annual crane inspections, along with daily inspections, will be performed onsite and in the crane.
D. Tag lines will be used for all loads. Tag lines will help control the load in windy conditions that may
cause the load to swing, rotate, or become unbalanced.
E. Subcontractors using cranes will post a copy of the crane hand signals that will be used.

XIX.
F.

HELICOPTER “EXTERNAL LIFT”

A.

B. pl
Subcontractors shall comply with all of the manufacturer’s recommended maintenance and safety
requirements.

Helicopter cranes shall comply with 14 CFR, Part 133 -- Rotorcraft External-Load Operations and all
other federal, state, and local laws, rules and regulations that may apply to a rotorcraft external lift.
Subcontractors shall comply with all of the manufacturer’s recommended maintenance and safety
m
requirements.

XX. HOUSEKEEPING
Housekeeping must be conducted on a daily basis. JC will issue a stop work order anytime housekeeping
on the site is disregarded. The stop work order will be lifted when the site is cleaned!

XXI. IMPALEMENT HAZARDS

A. All impalement hazards (rebar, electrical conduit, stakes, etc.) shall be guarded by using either steel
caps, steel reinforced plastic mushroom caps or wooden troughs. Plastic mushroom caps that are not
Sa

steel reinforced are not allowed on JC sites.

B. When impalement hazards cannot be properly guarded, the area will be taped off with red “DO NOT
ENTER” tape (restricted access).

XXII. HAZARD COMMUNICATION

A. All Subcontractors shall share information with one another regarding the hazardous materials that they
are working with on site.
B. Each Subcontractor is responsible for maintaining accessible material safety data sheets for products it
brings on site and for training its employees on the proper handling, storage and disposal requirements
of hazardous materials. Subcontractors shall submit to JC a chemical inventory list before they start
working onsite.

XXIII. JOB SITE ACCESS

A. Subcontractors and their visitors shall follow the JC Access and Security Requirements when entering
and exiting the job site.
B. Subcontractors and their visitors shall follow the JC Vehicle Access Requirements while at the job site.

Rev. 2/04 master subcontractor specifications Page 6 of 8

XXIV. ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE

A. All Subcontractors agree to abide by all applicable federal, state/provincial and local environmental laws
as part of their contractual relationship with JC.

B. All Subcontractors performing services related to environmental compliance, planning or remediation

shall provide written assurance that they have, and will maintain in effect, insurance that provides
coverage for risks resulting from the release of hazardous substances or contaminants to the
environment.

XXV. ENVIRONMENTAL WASTE MANAGEMENT

A. All Subcontractors shall be responsible for the removal of all hazardous wastes or substances
generated during the course of their onsite work.

e
B. All Subcontractors agree to indemnify JC against any claim by any entity, private or governmental in
nature, arising out of environmental contamination caused or exacerbated by the Subcontractor during
the course of its work for JC.

XXVI. SPILL AND RELEASE REPORTING AND RESPONSE

All Subcontractors shall respond to spills and to releases of hazardous substances, dispose of contaminated

XXVII.

pl
clean-up materials, dispose of contaminated soils and report immediately each spill or release event to the
onsite JC project manager/engineer.

ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS/CONSIDERATIONS

A. In addition to the safety requirements otherwise required by this Agreement, Subcontractor shall comply
with all safety requirements for the Project including but not limited to any and all higher tier and
Subcontractor safety programs, procedures and rules. Subcontractor shall also comply with all laws,
m
rules and regulations of any governmental body that has jurisdiction over the project. To the extent that
there is more than one safety rule, regulation or law that applies to a given activity of the Subcontractor,
the more stringent rule shall apply. Subcontractor shall advise all higher tier subcontractors and
subcontractors of all safety issues not otherwise covered by any of the requirements of this Agreement.
To the extent that the Subcontractor seeks to vary, change or otherwise alter any safety practice,
application or procedure, then the Subcontractor will submit a job hazard analysis to Contractor for
approval. If Subcontractor fails to seek approval and varies, changes or otherwise alters any safety
practice, application or procedure, then Subcontractor assumes complete and exclusive responsibility
for such change.
Sa

B. Subcontractor, by signing this Agreement, represents that it shall take all necessary precautions while
performing its work to ensure the safety of its employees, the employees of other subcontractors and
third parties.

C. Subcontractor represents that it has studied and is familiar with all of the applicable requirements
promulgated by any government authority, including, without limitations, the applicable requirements for
the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA); all applicable regulations published in 29 CFR parts
1910 and 1926; all applicable state occupational safety and health acts and any applicable regulations
promulgated thereunder; and any other lawful orders of any public authorities bearing on the safety
personas or property or their protection from damage, injury, or loss; as well as any safety or health
programs published by any higher tier contractor, JC and Owner. Subcontractor shall provide JC and
all higher tier contractors with a written safety program that complies with these governmental
requirements and safety and health programs.

D. Subcontractor agrees that it shall be liable for any violation thereof by any of its subcontractors, agents
and/or employees.

Rev. 2/04 master subcontractor specifications Page 7 of 8

 E. Subcontractor agrees that, in the event that an action is undertaken against JC for violations of any
governmental safety requirements by the Subcontractor and/or its subcontractor(s), agents or
employees, Subcontractor shall indemnify and hold harmless JC for all costs, damages and penalties
assessed against JC or related to this action including attorney’s fees incurred in the defense or appeal
of such action.

e
pl
m
Sa

Rev. 2/04 master subcontractor specifications Page 8 of 8

 BOS Process

Uncontrolled copy of an online document.

Title: Electrical Installer Safety Rules Number: 12 – 01.242.CG
Sponsor: Director of Safety and Health Effective Date: 01-September-2006
Owner: Mr. Chris Ksobiech, Safety Manager Revision: 01

SCOPE

Asia Europe Japan Americas Specific Applicability/Exceptions

GSS

e
FMS
Also includes Canada
SP
SS X

ELECTRICAL INSTALLER SAFETY RULES

I.

II.
PURPOSE

pl
It is the expectation of JCI employees and subcontractors that safety be integrated into all aspects of work
being performed. In addition to JCI’s general safety rules, hazard-specific rules also apply based on job
classification or work activities. The rules below apply specifically to those employees and subcontractors
working as electrical installers. Failure to follow these rules, as well as the general safety rules detailed in
JCI’s Subcontractor Safety Specifications, will be considered a breach of contract that may result in the
removal of a particular installer or the entire subcontractor from the site.

LOCKOUT/TAGOUT POLICY
m
Johnson Controls requires that all equipment and systems be de-energized prior to performing any type of
work on the equipment. The only two exceptions to this policy are when continuity of service is required such
as when troubleshooting and diagnostic testing, and when de-energizing would create additional hazards.

III. ELECTRICAL SAFETY RULES

A. Always de-energize equipment and systems before performing any type of work on the equipment.
Troubleshooting and performing diagnostic testing on equipment are the only times JC
employees/subcontractors can perform work on energized equipment.
Sa

B. Always inspect the equipment before you start to perform the job task. Look for any tears/cuts in the
insulation, loose wires, etc. Always verify that the equipment is in good working condition!
C. When things do not look right, or you question the integrity of the electrical system that you are working
on, STOP and contact someone that will be able to help you. NEVER continue to work if you are unsure
of the equipment.
D. Expect the unexpected and be alert at all times. A wire pops out of the panel when you open the door,
someone before you left a tool in the panel, wires are old and the insulation starts to crack and fall apart.
NEVER be complacent when working on electrical equipment.
E. Always wear the required protective clothing and PPE when performing work on live electrical equipment
(>50 V) and position yourself within the Flash Protection Boundry.
F. Never work on or near live electrical equipment when impaired due to illness, fatigue or other reasons.
G. Be alert at all times when working near live parts greater than 50 V.
H. Never reach blindly into areas that might contain exposed live parts where an electrical hazard may exist.
I. Do not enter spaces containing live parts unless illumination is provided that enables you to perform work
safely.

This document contains trade secrets and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. Disclosure of this Page 1 of 3
publication is absolutely prohibited without the express written permission of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2006
Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.
BOS Process Electric Installer Safety Rules

III. ELECTRICAL SAFETY RULES (cont’d)

J. Never work on live electrical equipment where there is a lack of illumination and/or obstructions preclude
observation of the work to be performed.
K. All conductive tools and materials (tools, pipes, metal scaffold parts, etc.) must never come within the
Flash Protection Boundary.
L. Never enter a Flash Protection Boundary without the required protective clothing and PPE.
M. Evaluate and control the work environment.
N. Plastic rimmed safety glasses with side shields and rubber soled work boots are required when working
on electrical equipment.
O. Wear rubber-insulated gloves with leather protectors when there is a possibility that your hands may come
in contact with an energized conductor.

e
P. Where possible, only place one hand in the panel at a time. Make sure that the free hand is not touching
a grounded surface, because any current path that includes the heart (current running from hand to hand)
is more likely to result in heart fibrillation than one that doesn’t.
Q. Never assume that a piece of equipment is de-energized. Always verify with a voltmeter.
R. Even after you verify that a piece of equipment is de-energized with a voltmeter, never grab a de-

pl
energized part. Always touch the de-energized part with the back of the hand first. This will eliminate
your exposure to hold-on current.
S. Never wear jewelry of any kind while working on electrical equipment. This includes large metal belt
buckles and tool belts.
T. Use approved insulated tools when working on an energized conductor.
U. Inspect the probes and rubber/plastic stops for cracks and tears before using them.
V. Verify that the meter and probes are rated for the voltage you are measuring.
W. Verify that the probes have good continuity before you take electrical readings.
m
X. Test the voltmeter on a known source (wall outlet) before taking electrical readings.
Y. Wrap electrical tape around electrical switch contact screws before you place them back into an electrical
box. This will help prevent grounding the switch to the metal box.
Z. When turning off a disconnect, stand to the side, face away from the disconnect, and pull the disconnect
to the off position.
AA. Never open a disconnect under load unless it is an emergency.
BB. Use ground fault circuit interrupters (GFCI’s) when working with temporary wiring.
Sa

CC. When you are not working inside an electrical panel, always keep electrical panel/cabinet doors closed.
DD. Never store electrical tools, meters, parts, etc. inside an electrical panel.
EE. When digging a trench or hole, you must always call the local Diggers Hotline and identify the utilities
before you start to excavate.
FF. Before drilling or cutting into a wall, identify where the electrical lines, cables, phone lines, etc. are located.
GG. Never stand in a puddle or on a wet surface while working on electrical equipment.
HH. Never perform work within the minimum approach distance around live overhead lines. The following
table lists the minimal approach distances to exposed energized electrical conductors and circuit parts for
overhead lines.

This document contains trade secrets and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. Disclosure of this Page 2 of 3
publication is absolutely prohibited without the express written permission of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2006
Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.
BOS Process Electric Installer Safety Rules

Voltage range (phase to phase) Minimum approach

distance

300 V and less Avoid contact.

Over 300 V, not over 750 V 1 ft. 0 in. (30.5 cm)

Over 750 V, not over 2 kV 1 ft. 6 in. (46 cm)

Over 2 kV, not over 15 kV 2 ft. 0 in. (61 cm)

e
Over 15 kV, not over 37 kV 3 ft. 0 in. (91 cm)

Over 37 kV, not over 87.5 kV 3 ft. 6 in. (107 cm)

Over 87.5 kV, not over 121 kV 4 ft. 0 in. (122 cm)

pl
Over 121 kV, not over 140 kV 4 ft. 6 in. (137 cm)
m
Sa

This document contains trade secrets and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. Disclosure of this Page 3 of 3
publication is absolutely prohibited without the express written permission of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2006
Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.
BOS Process Electric Installer Safety Rules

This page is intentionally blank.

es
ul
R
y
et
af
rS
lle
ta
ns
lI
ca
tri
ec
El
e:
pl
m
Sa

This document contains trade secrets and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. Disclosure of this Page 4 of 4
publication is absolutely prohibited without the express written permission of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2006
Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.
 JOB HAZARD ANALYSIS

Job Site: Date:

Prepared by: Date:

Reviewed by: Date:

(Johnson Controls Manager/Supervisor)

JHA review meeting between contractor and JC was held on (date):

is
ys
Description of “scope of work”:

al
An
d
ar
az
Emergency Primary: Phone: Pager/Cell:
Contact
H

Information
Secondary: Phone: Pager/Cell:
ob

Potential Hazards

All of the following hazards require a competent person. Please use the Competent Person Identification List to maintain a current list of
J

competent individuals for each hazardous task.

Yes No Yes No Yes No
e:

Aerial lifts required Excavation, trenching, and Leading edge work

shoring required required
pl

Asbestos hazard Energy source hazard Lead work required

(electrical, steam, etc.)
m

Blasting required Fall hazard Scaffolding required

Sa

Concrete and masonry Heavy equipment used Steel erection and

construction required assembly required

Confined space entry High voltage work >600V Other:

(attach permit)

Cranes, hoisting and Hot Work required (Permit) Other:

rigging required

Demolition required Impalement hazards Other:

 s
si
Hazard Analysis
A detailed discussion of the unique hazards to the work activities/location, including those noted above as “YES,” will be provided on subsequent pages. The

ly
discussion must include identification of work activity, the specific hazards present, and the safety measures/personal protective equipment (PPE) to be utilized to
alleviate the hazard.

a
Activity Hazards Training Requirements Inspection Requirements

An
d
ar
az
H
ob
Equipment Safe Work Requirements
e :J
pl
m
Sa
 s
si
Specific Hazard Analysis and Safe Work Requirements
A detailed discussion of the unique hazards to the work activities/location, including those noted above as “YES,” will be provided on subsequent pages. The

ly
discussion must include identification of work activity, the specific hazards present, and the safety measures/personal protective equipment (PPE) to be utilized to
alleviate the hazard.

a
Activity Hazards Training Requirements Inspection Requirements

An
d
ar
az
H
ob
Equipment Safe Work Requirements
e :J
pl
m
Sa
 s
si
Specific Hazard Analysis and Safe Work Requirements
A detailed discussion of the unique hazards to the work activities/location, including those noted above as “YES,” will be provided on subsequent pages. The

ly
discussion must include identification of work activity, the specific hazards present, and the safety measures/personal protective equipment (PPE) to be utilized to
alleviate the hazard.

a
Activity Hazards Training Requirements Inspection Requirements

An
d
ar
az
H
ob
Equipment Safe Work Requirements
e :J
pl
m
Sa
 Competent Person Identification List

JC requires all subcontractors who perform the following job tasks to have a competent person who is capable of identifying
existing and foreseeable hazards in the surrounding work area or working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous or
dangerous to employees and others, and who has authorization to take prompt, corrective measures to eliminate the conditions. A
competent person is also a person who has extensive knowledge and experience in a particular activity or job function, as well as
knowledge of procedural and regulatory requirements.
• Blasting • Excavation/Trenching/Shoring • Ladder
• Concrete & Masonry Construction • Fall Protection • Lockout/Tagout
• Confined Space • Hearing Protection • Steel Erection/Assembly
• Crane/Hoisting/Rigging • Helicopter lift • Scaffolding

st
Program Subcontractor Subcontractor Supervisor Competent Person Name

Li
Name: __________________ Name: __________________ Name: __________________

n
Phone #: ________________ Phone #: ________________ Phone #: ________________

a tio
Cell #: __________________ Cell #: __________________

ic
tif
Name: __________________ Name: __________________ Name: __________________

en
Phone #: ________________ Phone #: ________________ Phone #: ________________

Id
Cell #: __________________ Cell #: __________________
n
so

Name: __________________ Name: __________________ Name: __________________

er

Phone #: ________________ Phone #: ________________ Phone #: ________________

P

Cell #: __________________ Cell #: __________________

nt
te

Name: __________________ Name: __________________ Name: __________________

pe

Phone #: ________________ Phone #: ________________ Phone #: ________________

om

Cell #: __________________ Cell #: __________________

C
e:

Name: __________________ Name: __________________ Name: __________________

pl

Phone #: ________________ Phone #: ________________ Phone #: ________________

m
Sa

Cell #: __________________ Cell #: __________________

Name: __________________ Name: __________________ Name: __________________

Phone #: ________________ Phone #: ________________ Phone #: ________________

Cell #: __________________ Cell #: __________________

Sa
m
pl
e:
C
om
pe
te
nt
Per
so
n
Id
en
tif
ic
atio
n
Li
st
 BOS Policy
Uncontrolled copy of an online document.

Title: CG Hazardous Materials Policy - Number: 12-01.100.CG

Asbestos
Effective Date: 1 August 2006
Sponsor: Director of Safety & Industrial Hygiene Revision: 06

POLICY STATEMENT
The purpose of this Policy is to state the position of Johnson Controls, Inc. Controls Group on asbestos-
containing materials (ACMs).

e
CG locations will not enter into any contracts and will not perform work of any nature involving asbestos-
containing materials (ACMs). This includes any requirement that JC employees identify, remove,
encapsulate, abate, cleanup, or dispose of ACMs, or work in areas in which they will be exposed to the
material.
The nature of our business requires us to work around ACMs regularly. While both legislative

pl
requirements and JC contract language put the burden of determining the presence, location and quantity
of asbestos-containing materials at a work site on the building owner, some of them have not conducted
the surveys or assessments necessary to make that determination. Under these circumstances, it is
critical that JC take the following steps before work begins to protect our employees, subcontractors and
building occupants from inadvertent disturbances of asbestos:
1. For buildings built before 1982, request all legally required asbestos assessments or surveys for the
building area(s) affected by the contract. The surveys and assessments must provide information on
m
the presence, location and quantity of asbestos-containing materials throughout the work area or
buildings.
2. For buildings built before 1982, if the customer reports the area(s) of our work is/are free of asbestos-
containing materials and claims that a survey or assessment is not required, they must provide written
certification in this regard. Suggested language for the certification is included in Attachment A. For
buildings built after January 1, 1982, certification is not necessary. However, you should be aware that
stockpiled building materials manufactured at an earlier date may have been used in buildings after
January 1, 1982. For any building built in the several years after that date, it would be prudent to
Sa

carefully inspect the work area to determine if any suspicious materials are present.
3. If the building survey or assessment information is unavailable, we must notify the customer that we
cannot start work until it is provided. It is not necessary that the customer provide the entire building
assessment—only the portion(s) related to the scope of work that is/are needed.
4. It is not acceptable for JC to start work on the basis of a customer’s verbal statement that the
work area does not contain ACMs. The content must be verified through a building survey or
assessment prepared or signed by an individual identified as having asbestos assessment
credentials, or if an asbestos survey or assessment is not legally required, written certification
as suggested in Attachment A.
5. The lead JC employee at any work site where there is any probability that ACMs may be present in the
work area must have completed all internal training related to asbestos. The person assigning the lead
JC employee has the duty of assuring that the training has been completed.
6. If at all possible, conduct a job walk to physically identify the locations of the asbestos relative to the
work of JC employees and our subcontractors with attention to:

This document contains trade secrets and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. Disclosure of this publication is absolutely
Page 1 of 10
prohibited without the express written permission of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2006 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.
BOS Policy CG Hazardous Materials Policy — Asbestos
• ACMs that need to be removed in order for the scope of work to be completed (i.e. removal of
fireproofing to run conduit, removal of pipe insulation to replace valve, etc.)
• ACMs in poor condition: Request the customer address the particular area/material(s) so our
employees/subcontractors do not disturb it further during their work.
• Any suspect material that may interfere with our work that was not identified in the survey or
assessment: In this case, we must either presume it is asbestos-containing or request that the
customer provide documentation that it has been tested and is non-asbestos material.
7. Provide notification to subcontractors on the ACMs identified in the assessment related to their work, along
with the JC Asbestos policy. This notification must take place prior to the start of their work in one or both
of the following forms:

e
• Include the assessment information as an attachment to the subcontract.
• Include it under separate cover (Attachment B). In this case, each subcontractor must verify his or her
employees assigned to the job have been briefed on the building/area-specific asbestos assessment
information, and on the JC Asbestos policy.

•
•

pl
8. For large jobs, pre-construction meetings should be used as a means to review both the asbestos
assessment information and the JC Asbestos policy with subcontractors working on the site. Additionally,
the following important points need to be reinforced during the pre-construction meeting:
The JC contact name for use in the case of an inadvertent disturbance of asbestos on the job.
The consequences a subcontractor faces if they disturb known ACMs during their work.
In the event of an inadvertent disturbance by a JC employee or subcontractor, work must be discontinued
m
immediately and the customer notified by a JC manager. The JC manager must also contact CG Safety at Ext.
4487 or CG Environmental at Ext. 4757 to determine if notification must be made to regulatory authorities.
In certain circumstances, we may find it necessary to take part in arranging and subcontracting asbestos
removal work for a customer. We will do this as a defensive sale only. We do not intend to aggressively
pursue asbestos remediation work. Any work we undertake will only be performed by qualified contractors,
which have been approved by CG Safety at Ext. 4487.
There are obviously numerous questions and considerations associated with this policy. A list of frequently
asked questions on this policy is attached (Attachment C) that expand upon and provide explanation as it
Sa

relates to asbestos. Questions regarding health or safety concerns, or our legal obligation under existing or
pending contracts, should be addressed to Controls Group Safety or the Legal departments as appropriate.

Scope

Asia Europe Japan Americas Specific Applicability / Exceptions

GSS
FMS X
SP X
SS X

SUMMARY OF CHANGES
ƒ Second release of CBOS document. Previously published as revision #5 dated 13 May 04, under the
same title
• Reviewed by Owner- no content changes; Format and template updates 1 August 2006

This document contains trade secrets and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. Disclosure of this publication is absolutely
Page 2 of 10
prohibited without the express written permission of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2006 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.
 Attachment A

CERTIFICATION OF NO ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS

(Building for which construction commenced prior to January 1, 1982)

The Customer hereby certifies, represents and warrants that to the best of the Customer’s knowledge,
information and belief, there are no asbestos-containing materials in the Customer’s building that will in any
way affect JCI’s work or be affected by JCI’s work. The Customer’s certification is based on the following
information (please check one):

Attached hereto is a complete copy of a current comprehensive asbestos survey or assessment

conducted on the Customer’s building by a qualified asbestos inspector demonstrating that
there are no asbestos-containing materials in or around the area where JCI or its subcontractors
will be conducting its work.

e
Based on reasonable inquiry by Customer, construction of Customer’s building began at a time
where the introduction of asbestos-containing materials would have been unlikely and no
asbestos-containing materials were introduced into the building at the time of construction or
afterward in or around the area where JCI or its subcontractors will be conducting its work.

pl
If JCI becomes aware of or suspects the presence of asbestos or asbestos-containing materials, JCI shall
have the right to stop work in the affected area immediately and notify the Customer. The Customer will be
responsible for doing whatever is necessary to evaluate and, if needed, to correct the condition in accordance
with all applicable statutes and regulations. The Customer agrees to assume responsibility for, and defend
and indemnify JCI from, any and all claims arising out of or relating to the presence of asbestos or asbestos-
containing materials in the Customer’s building.
m
Name:

Title:

Date:
Sa
 Johnson Controls, Inc.
Controls Group

Subcontractor Name
Address

August 12, 2008

e
RE: Subcontract Number:
Building/Location:

Dear Subcontractor;

noted above.

pl
Please review the attached copy of the building survey detailing the location and quantity of asbestos-
containing or presumed asbestos-containing material in the building(s) included under the subcontract

These materials are to be avoided during the course of your work in this building(s) unless otherwise
specified by the subcontract. In the event of an unforeseen disturbance of asbestos-containing or
m
presumed asbestos-containing materials during your work, please stop work immediately and contact the
lead JC employee for the job ______________ at _______________.

It is our expectation that this information be communicated to your employees working on the
___________ jobsite, along with the attached information on JC’s Asbestos Policy. Each subcontractor
must be prepared to provide verification that his/her employees assigned to the job have been briefed on
the asbestos building survey information, and on JC’s Asbestos Policy.
Sa

Please reach me at __________________ if you have questions regarding this information. Your
cooperation is appreciated.

Sincerely;
JOHNSON CONTROLS, INC.
CONTROLS GROUP

Project Manager

Enclosure

JOHNSON CONTROL’S ASBESTOS POLICY APPROXIMATE TIME REQUIRED 10 MINUTES

I. INTRODUCTION
 During the course of your work in buildings whether it be school, commercial or public buildings, you will
most likely come across asbestos or materials you think might contain asbestos. This may raise some
questions in your mind--Is the presence of asbestos in the area where I’m working dangerous to me?
What should I do if I encounter asbestos that will interfere with my work? I think I’ve been exposed to
asbestos before, could my health be at risk?

The following information will provide you answers to your questions on asbestos and your work as a
subcontractor for Johnson Controls (JC). But before we go further, you need to know about JC’s Asbestos
Policy--it says our employees or subcontractors will not perform work of any nature involving asbestos
containing materials (ACM's). This includes identification of suspect material, removal, disposal or any
related work. JC considers asbestos to be the building owner's responsibility.
As a subcontractor on the front line, you have a very important role in carrying out Johnson Controls’
asbestos policy. Let’s take some time to review more information on asbestos, how it affects the work we
do, and what steps you need to take if you come across it in the course of your work.

e
II. MOST COMMONLY ASKED QUESTIONS ABOUT ASBESTOS
Q. What is asbestos?
A. Asbestos is the common name for a group of minerals. When the fibrous material is separated from

pl
the rock during the mining process, the fibers are incorporated into manufactured items. The asbestos
is mixed with binding materials such as epoxy, magnesium or cement, and shaped to meet a certain
need.
Q. How is asbestos used?
A. Asbestos has been used in approximately 3,000 different products. The amount of asbestos contained
in these products varies from less than one percent to 100 percent, depending on the product's use.
Approximately two-thirds of the mined asbestos was used by the construction industry in building
m
materials, insulation and miscellaneous forms.
Q. Why does JC have an Asbestos Policy?
A. Our concerns can be summarized in two words: Safety and liability. Given the risks associated with
asbestos, we do not want our employees or subcontractor’s employees to be exposed to unnecessary
risks. Additionally, the federal and state/provincial regulations covering asbestos removal are very
complex and comprehensive. We are not experts in the area and don't want to face the risks
associated with performing any of this work in an improper or illegal manner.
Sa

Q. Where will we encounter ACM's during the course of our work activities?
A. Any building built before 1982 is likely to contain some form of asbestos. The products frequently
encountered by our employees and subcontractors fit into three general categories:
1. Mechanical Insulation: Exists in forms which include pressure vessels (boilers, chillers, water
tanks), pipes, valves, fittings, roof drain pipes, and duct work. Use of asbestos insulation and
lagging materials was prohibited in the U.S. by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) in 1975.
2. Surfacing Materials: Includes sprayed-on or troweled-on fireproofing, acoustical, thermal or
decorative materials applied onto ceiling, walls or structural members. In 1973, the EPA restricted
the spraying of ACM in the U.S., and in 1978 the use of troweled-on or wet-applied ACM's was
prohibited.
3. Other Building Materials: Includes many forms of ACM such as ceiling/wall tile, floor tile, sheet
rock and transite board.
Q. What do these ACM's look like?
A. 1. Mechanical Insulation: Asbestos-containing insulation materials can appear as follows:
• A white, gray or brown chalky appearance.
 • Pre-formed into batts, blocks and pipe covering.
• A cement or mud-type material, gray in color.
2. Surfacing Materials: Sprayed-on, molded, wet-applied or thermal insulation appearing as follows:
• Soft and fluffy, varying from white to dark gray in color.
• Sprayed on structural steel members, undersides of decks, ceilings and walls as fireproofing or
acoustical treatment.
• Material may be exposed, concealed by a suspended ceiling, or painted.
• Firm, open pore, plaster-like material with a textured surface.
3. Other Building Materials: It is nearly impossible to determine visually if materials in this category
such as ceiling tile, wall tile, floor tile, transite board and sheet rock, contain asbestos.

e
Q. If it is difficult to tell if a material contains asbestos, how can the content be determined?
A. The only way to make a determination is to collect a bulk sample of the material and submit it to a
laboratory for analysis. Because Johnson Controls’ asbestos policy prohibits our employees or
subcontractors from taking bulk samples of suspected ACM, the collection and analysis of these
samples is the responsibility of the building owner. Johnson Controls and our subcontractor’s

pl
employees will only make visual determinations based on the appearance, and notify the building
owner if further determination is needed.
Q. If we run into material that contains asbestos, is it always a health hazard?
A. Unless the material is disturbed or dislocated to the extent that asbestos fibers are released, there is
little danger to our employees, subcontractors or the area occupants.
Q. Why is disturbed ACM hazardous to my health?
m
A. Once asbestos fibers are disturbed, they can float in the air for hours, even days. Fibers, so small they
are not visible to the human eye, can bypass our nose hairs and mucous membranes which typically
trap inhaled particles, and be inhaled into the lungs or swallowed. Once in the lungs, asbestos fibers
may lodge and remain there.
Q. Why is it so important to prevent exposure to asbestos?
A. Exposure to asbestos may cause cancer or lung disease. Individual reactions to asbestos exposure
vary greatly. Most people will not develop disease from minor exposure. Exposures however, have
cumulative effects. It can take 15-40 years after exposure for an asbestos-related disease to surface--if
Sa

at all. While asbestos is so prevalent in our society that all of us may have been exposed to some
extent in the past, (as school children, fibers released from automobile brake linings, etc.), we would
rather be safe than sorry when it comes to exposing our employees our subcontractors to additional
risks. Eliminating work place exposure to asbestos is the safest approach.
Q. How do I know if I’ve been exposed to asbestos?
A. It is important to note that nearly all of us are exposed to low levels of asbestos on a daily basis in both
indoor and outdoor air. This is because of the widespread use of asbestos in everything from brakes to
building materials.
Asbestos exposure does not have an immediate effect on the body--like making you itch or cough.
Based on the body's reaction to asbestos fibers, asbestos-related diseases develop 15-40 years after
exposure.
Q. If I am already at risk once exposure to asbestos occurs, why should further exposure be
prevented?
A. The more exposure a person has to asbestos, the more likely the person will develop an asbestos-
related disease. If future exposure is reduced, the chances of developing an asbestos-related disease
are also reduced.
 If a person exposed to asbestos smokes cigarettes, the chances of getting lung cancer can increase
substantially--50 to 90%. If you’ve been exposed to asbestos, the first step you should take to reduce
the risk of getting lung cancer is to stop smoking.
Q. What can be done about my past exposure to asbestos?
A. The exposure to asbestos that may have occurred in the past cannot be changed or reversed in any
way. The most important thing you can do is avoid future asbestos exposure.
Q. Are some ACM's more dangerous than others?
A. Yes. The types of materials asbestos is manufactured into may increase or decrease the hazard
potential of the material.
Asbestos products that are very friable--the material crumbles with the slightest pressure, usually have
a high hazard potential. These products are dangerous because the fibers get into the air very easily if
the material is disturbed in any way. Once airborne, these fibers can be inhaled into the body.

e
Examples include fireproofing blown on a structural beam, or damaged or deteriorated pipe insulation.
Q. What kind of ACM's have a low hazard potential?
A. Products containing asbestos that is bonded or embedded in another material, such as epoxy or
cement, are generally nonfriable or not easily crushed, and have a low hazard potential. The asbestos

pl
fibers in these materials are not readily released into the air unless the products are demolished or
grinded. Examples of asbestos with a low hazard potential include transite used for decorative or
acoustical purposes, and ceiling tile.
Q. How do we know if the building we are working in for JC contains ACM’s?
A. To meet regulatory requirements, each building owner must conduct a building survey to identify the
locations and condition of ACMs in their building(s). As part of JC’s contracting process, the customer is
required to provide the portion of the survey that pertains to the scope of work performed by JC or its
m
subcontractors. Before the work begins, the survey documentation is reviewed by JC to determine if the
ACM identified could interfere or be disturbed by our work or that of our subcontractors. During the
subcontracting process, the survey information is provided to subcontractors for communication to their
employees. JC requires each subcontractor to verify their employees have been notified of the specific
locations of ACMs before their work begins, by forwarding a log containing their employee’s signatures.
Subcontractor employees who do not appear on the log will not be permitted on the site until they complete
a review of the asbestos survey and JC Asbestos Policy information.

Q. What should we do if suspected ACM is encountered during our work?

Sa

A. In situations where unidentified material suspected of containing asbestos is discovered by a

subcontractor that could interfere with the work being done, the JC manager in charge of the project needs
to be notified immediately. Unless the subject material can be completely avoided, JC manager will stop
work in the particular area and contact the building owner who will identify the material and remove it if
necessary. Once the asbestos interfering with the job has been removed, you will be contacted by JC to
return to your work. It is important than any suspect material not identified in the survey not be disturbed
unless verification is received from JC that the material does not contain asbestos.
 Attachment C

Asbestos Policy
Frequently Asked Questions

Q: What is JC’s policy regarding employees working with asbestos?

A: JC’s policy states that our employees will not perform work of any nature involving asbestos containing
materials (ACMs) such as identification, removal, disposal, or related work. JC basically considers
asbestos to be the building owner’s responsibility.

Q: Why have we adopted this policy?

e
A: Our concerns can be summarized in two words: Safety and liability. Given the health risks associated
with asbestos, we do not want our employees exposed to any unnecessary risks. Additionally, the
federal and state/provincial regulations covering contractors working with asbestos are very complex
and comprehensive. While JC has expertise in many areas, the abatement/management of ACMs is
not one of those. We do not want to face the risks associated with performing work with ACMs in an
improper or illegal manner.

Q: Why is employee safety a concern?

pl
A: Exposure to asbestos may cause cancer or lung disease. Individual reactions to asbestos exposure
vary greatly. Most people will not develop disease from minor exposure. Exposures however, have
cumulative effects. It can take 15-40 years after exposure for an asbestos-related disease to surface—
if at all. While asbestos is so prevalent in our society that all of us may have been exposed to some
m
extent, we would rather be safe than sorry when it comes to exposing our employees to additional risks.
Eliminating work place exposure to asbestos is the safest approach.

Q: Where are we most likely to encounter ACMs?

A: Any building built before 1982 is likely to contain some form of asbestos. Many building owners
continued to use ACMs after that time to deplete their existing inventories of those materials. The
products we are most likely to encounter containing asbestos fall into three categories:
Sa

• Mechanical Insulation: Insulation on boilers or other pressure vessels, pipes, valves, fittings, duct
work, etc. The use of asbestos in these materials was prohibited in 1975.

• Surfacing Materials: Sprayed-on or troweled-on fireproofing, acoustical, thermal or decorative

materials applied onto ceilings, walls or structural members. The use of sprayed-on ACMs was
banned in 1973, and troweled-on in 1978.

• Other Building Materials: Ceiling/wall tile, plaster, floor tile, sheet rock and transite board.

Q: How do we know if a building contains asbestos?

A: To meet regulatory requirements, each building owner must conduct a building survey or assessment
to identify the locations and condition of ACMs in their building(s). As part of JC’s contracting process,
the customer is required to provide the portion of the assessment that pertains to the scope of our work
under the contract. Before the work begins, the assessment documentation is reviewed by JC
operations to determine if the ACM identified could interfere or be disturbed by our work or that of our
subcontractors. In some cases a walk-through may be conducted to determine what ACMs (if any) the
customer may need to remove before our work begins.
Q: What if a customer states their building is free of ACMs?

A: Before work can begin, the customer must certify in writing that the building or area covered by the
contract scope of work is asbestos-free. JC will provide the customer with suggested language for this
certification. A verbal assurance is not enough.

Q: What if a suspected ACM is encountered during our work that was not initially identified by the
customer?

A: Before work begins, employees and subcontractors must be made aware of the specific locations of
ACMs in their work area. In situations where unidentified material suspected of containing asbestos is
discovered that could interfere with our work, the JC manager responsible for the job needs to bring it
to the attention of the building owner immediately. Until the materials/conditions have been properly
evaluated, work in the particular area must be stopped. If ACMs are found to be present, work can

e
restart once the hazards have been controlled or eliminated.

Q: What if we fail to request the asbestos building survey or assessment prior to our work and JC
employees or subcontractors disturb ACMs?

A: JC becomes responsible for the hazardous conditions created by the disturbance of ACMs including an

pl
evaluation of the building contamination, the clean up, and the medical assessment of those individuals
exposed to the disturbance. Costs associated with the disturbance of ACMs can be significant, and
because JC’s insurance coverage expressly excludes asbestos, the business would need to assume
these costs. In addition, JC could also face fines and criminal penalties for violation of federal and
state/provincial safety/environmental legislation.

Q: Does the policy apply to the removal of small amounts of ACMs?

m
A: Yes. JC’s policy applies to removal of small amounts of asbestos just as it does to the removal of large
amounts. Although the work practices may vary based on the size of the ACM removal, the federal and
state/provincial legislation governing personal protective equipment, air monitoring, medical monitoring,
and disposal practices must be followed for any asbestos removal, regardless of size. The regulations
are too complex and the health risks associated with doing the work are too great to get involved. The
way JC sees it, there is no reason to put our employees or the company in that position.

Q: Does JC lose business by having this policy?

Sa

A: We do not think so. In any abatement or removal project the building owner is ultimately responsible
for the performance of the work. Our policy is intended to protect the owner by ensuring that he or she
gets qualified people who are properly trained and certified to perform the work.

Q: Can we engage a subcontractor to remove ACMs for our customer?

A: The services of an asbestos-removal contractor can be utilized if the following criteria are met:

• Customer considerations require it (JC has not pursued the asbestos-removal work alone, we have
discussed alternatives with the customer, etc.);

• A third party contractor qualified to oversee the asbestos removal project from start to finish is
engaged by JC (review project plan, submit governmental notifications, periodic inspections of
work, air monitoring during and after removal, release of area post removal, etc.); and

• The contractor selected meets all the terms and conditions in JC’s Asbestos Removal Scope of
Work attachment and is approved by the CG Safety department. We will use or recommend only
 those contractors who have met our requirements for experience, compliance, insurance,
performance, and responsiveness to our requirements.

Q: Apart from subcontracting asbestos removal for our customer, is there a way we can help the
customer but not put JC at risk?

A: Yes. JC can provide the funding for the cost of the asbestos removal associated with the contract’s
scope of work just as the company funds other facility improvements under a performance contract.
While JC provides the funding, the customer selects, contracts and manages the asbestos removal
contractor, and JC is taken out of the contracting loop. Contract language covering the specific
responsibilities of the customer under these circumstances is available from the Legal department.

Q: Is there additional information available regarding the Asbestos policy?

e
A: Training and resource packages are available from the CG Safety department, Ext. 4487, on the C-
BOS system, and on Advisor.

pl
m
Sa
 Subcontractor Safety Orientation

Account/Region: DHL Site/project name:

Conducted by: Date:

Subcontractor name:

Subcontractors representative’s name and title:

1. JOHNSON CONTROLS POLICIES

e
A. Johnson Controls Safety Policy – Subcontractor’s initials: __________
As stated in Johnson Controls' corporate vision, "Our products, services and workplaces reflect our belief that what is good for
the safety and health of all people is good for Johnson Controls." In support of this vision, the management of the Controls
Group of Johnson Controls, Inc. is committed to providing a workplace for our employees in which recognized hazards are
controlled or eliminated whenever possible.
The philosophy and objectives behind this commitment are:
•
•
•
•
•

pl
The safety and health of all Controls Group employees is a top priority.
The only acceptable level of safety performance is one that prevents employee injury and accidents.
Safety is an integral part of the business and cannot be separated or by-passed.
Safety is a responsibility that must be shared equally and without exception by everyone within the organization.
Supervision and management will be held accountable for the safety and health of the employees for whom they are
responsible.
As a condition of employment, each individual within the organization will be expected to conduct their daily activities in a
manner that is consistent with the philosophy and objectives in this policy.
m
B. Stop Work Policy - Subcontractor’s initials: __________
Whenever an imminent danger is present to any person, including, but not limited to, Johnson Controls employees,
subcontractor employees and third parties, the authorized Johnson Controls employees and subcontractor’s employees have
the right to stop work so that all hazards are abated, or safe work practices are incorporated. For the purposes of this policy,
an imminent danger includes, but is not limited to:
• A situation for which the individual is not properly trained or experienced.
• A situation for which the individual is not equipped (i.e. safety or personal protective equipment).
• A hazard that is not typical to the individual’s work activities or job.
• A worker unfit for work due to the influence of alcohol or illegal or mind-altering substances.
•
Sa

A danger that would normally stop work in the affected area.

Subcontractor’s employees are required to report all “stop work” actions immediately to their supervisor for investigation.
During the investigation, the employee refusing to work will not leave the site or return to the work activity without
authorization.
If the “stop work” action is used for legitimate safety reasons, the individual initiating the action (employee or subcontractor) is
protected from discipline, retribution or discrimination by Johnson Controls.
C. Asbestos Policy - Subcontractor’s initials: __________
Johnson Controls will not enter into any contracts and will not perform work of any nature involving asbestos-containing
materials (ACMs). This includes any requirement that Johnson Controls employees identify, remove, encapsulate, abate,
cleanup, or dispose of ACMs, or work in areas in which they will be exposed to the material.

2. GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS - Subcontractor’s initials: __________

A. All subcontractors shall comply with all federal, state/provincial and local safety laws, rules and regulations.
B. All subcontractors will have a written safety program that applies to the specific work they are performing at the site.
C. All subcontractors shall follow all posted safety rules and those rules described in the Johnson Controls Project Safety
Manual.
D. All subcontractors who hire lower-tier subcontractors to perform work at the site shall ensure that all lower tier subcontractors
follow Johnson Controls Subcontractor Safety Specifications.
E. Any subcontractor who creates a hazard shall eliminate the hazard before any further work may proceed.
Rev. 1/08 dhl master subcontractor orientation Page 1 of 4
 F. Hazards observed, but not created by the subcontractor, shall be reported to Johnson Controls immediately. All
subcontractors shall avoid the hazard until it has been eliminated.

3. SAFETY TRAINING - Subcontractor’s initials: __________

A. Safety Orientation Training
1. All subcontractors shall have a safety representative present during the Johnson Controls safety orientation training.
2. All subcontractors shall train all of their employees on site specific safety requirements before they are allowed to perform
work on the site.
B. Basic safety training requirements
JC requires that all subcontractors have the required safety training established by local, state/provincial, and federal
regulatory agencies before they perform work at the job site. This training may cover the following programs:
† Accident Investigation † Disciplinary Action † Impalement Policy
† Asbestos Control † Excavation/Trenching/Shoring † Ladder Safety
† Back Safety † Fall Protection † Lead Awareness
† Blasting † Fire Prevention/Protection † Leading Edge
† Bloodborne Pathogens † Hazard Communication † Lockout/Tagout

e
† Concrete/Masonry † Hearing Conservation † Material Handling
† Confined Space † Heat Stress † Personal Protective Equip
† Cranes/Hoisting/Rigging † Heavy Equipment † Respiratory Protection
† Demolitions † Hot Work † Scaffolding
† Electrical Safety † Housekeeping † Steel Erection/Assembly
JC requires that all operators using heavy equipment, cranes, lifts, etc., have all valid training, certification, licenses, etc., that
are required by local, state/provincial, and federal regulatory agencies before they operate the equipment on the job site.
1.

2.

3.
Monthly toolbox safety training

pl
Subcontractor will conduct monthly toolbox safety training. This training will cover a variety of topics and should be
customized to meet the specific tasks that are being performed on site.
Non-routine hazardous task training
Subcontractors who perform non-routine hazardous tasks will receive training that identifies the specific hazards/risks that
are associated with the tasks, required safety equipment and PPE and their use and limitations.
Job Hazard Analysis
m
Subcontractors are required to review and train their affected employees on the job hazard analysis that pertains to the
job tasks the employees will perform before they are allowed to perform work.
4. JC reserves the right to request from the subcontractors training verifications, certifications, licenses, etc., for onsite
workers.
4. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT/SAFETY EQUIPMENT - Subcontractor’s initials: __________
A. Personal Protective Equipment
Subcontractors shall supply their employees with the appropriate personal protective equipment that meets the safety
requirements outlined by federal, state/provincial and local safety laws, rules and regulations.
Sa

B. Safety Equipment
Subcontractors shall supply their employees with the appropriate safety equipment that will meet the safety requirements
outlined by federal, state/provincial and local safety laws, rules and regulations.

5. SMOKING AND TOBACCO PRODUCTS - Subcontractor’s initials: __________

The use of smoking and smokeless tobacco products will be allowed in designated areas of the site.

6. ACCIDENT/INJURY REPORTING - Subcontractor’s initials: __________

A. Subcontractors shall report all workplace accidents, injuries or illnesses, regardless of severity, to Johnson Controls.
1. Subcontractors shall complete the Employee/Subcontractor Injury/Accident Statement and the Johnson Controls Incident
Investigation Report within eight hours from the time the incident occurred.
2. Subcontractors shall report all property damage using the Incident Investigation Report within eight hours from the time
the incident occurred.
B. The Johnson Controls Corporate Crisis Management Plan will be implemented when there is an accident involving a fatality or
a single accident in which three or more workers are hospitalized.

7. EMERGENCY RESPONSE/FIRST AID - Subcontractor’s initials: __________

Subcontractors shall make themselves knowledgeable on all local emergency procedures at the facility. This will include
emergency response procedures for medical, fire and security.
Rev. 1/08 dhl master subcontractor orientation Page 2 of 4
8. RETURN TO WORK - Subcontractor’s initials: __________
In the event of an injury with work restrictions, the subcontractor will provide light duty work in accordance with the doctor’s
recommendations.
9. DISCIPLINARY PROCEDURE - Subcontractor’s initials: __________
A. Safety rules have been established to protect all persons who have contact with the site. Failure to abide by the safety rules
will place fellow workers and others at risk. Johnson Controls strictly enforces the disciplinary action(s) below with
subcontractors who work in an unsafe manner.
Johnson Controls will use a three-step disciplinary program:
1. Written Reminder
2. Two day suspension from site
3. Immediate and permanent dismissal from site
B. Zero Tolerance
Consideration will be given to work practices that may cause immediate danger to the life and health (IDLH) of both the
employee and anyone else who may be involved. The disregard of safety in these situations will immediately result in step
three. The following are a few examples of IDLH situations:

e
• Working without fall protection.
• Not being fit for work due to the influence of alcohol or illegal or mind-altering substances.
• Entering/working in trenches that do not have appropriate sloping, benching, or shoring.
• Working inside a permit-required confined space without a permit.

10. HAZARD ASSESSMENT/JOB HAZARD ANALYSIS (JHA) - Subcontractor’s initials: __________

pl
Subcontractors shall submit an initial Hazard Assessment form that identifies whether or not they are going to perform immediate
danger to life and health (IDLH) tasks. Subcontractors who are going to perform IDLH tasks must submit a completed JHA for
each IDLH task to Johnson Controls.
Before their work onsite begins, subcontractors shall review their completed JHA’s with Johnson Controls site manager. When
required by Johnson Controls, subcontractors shall complete a JHA audit.

11. COMPETENT PERSON - Subcontractor’s initials: __________

A competent person shall mean a person who is capable of identifying existing and foreseeable hazards in the surrounding work
m
area or working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous or dangerous to employees and others, and who has authorization to
take prompt, corrective measures to eliminate the conditions. A competent person is also a person who has extensive knowledge
and experience in a particular activity or job function, as well as knowledge of procedural and regulatory requirements.
Subcontractors shall designate a competent safety person for the following tasks:

• Blasting • Excavation/Trenching/Shoring • Ladder

• Concrete & Masonry Construction • Fall Protection • Lockout/Tagout
• Confined Space • Hearing Protection • Steel Erection/Assembly
• Crane/Hoisting/Rigging • Helicopter lift • Scaffolding
Sa

12. WORKING AT HEIGHTS - Subcontractor’s initials: __________

A. Fall Protection
It is a Johnson Controls policy that when fall protection devices like guardrails, nets, etc., cannot be provided and the
subcontractor is exposed to a fall greater than six feet, they will use a personal fall arrest system. A personal fall arrest system
consists of full body harness and shock absorbing lanyard.
B. Ladders
1. All ladders shall comply with all federal, state/provincial and local laws, rules and regulations.
2. All extension ladders shall be tied off at the top or a second person will hold and secure the ladder at the bottom.
3. Subcontractors shall use a personal fall arrest system when they are exposed to a fall below the level of the ladder.
4. Subcontractors shall comply with all manufacturers’ recommended maintenance and safety requirements.
C. Scaffolding
1. It is Johnson Controls policy that all scaffolding used on site that has a working surface higher than six feet have
guardrails. Each guardrail will consist of a top rail (height between 36 and 42 inches), midrail and toe board (3.5 inches
minimum height).
2. Subcontractors shall use a personal fall arrest system when they are working on scaffolding that has a working surface
higher than six feet but does not have a proper guardrail or complete deck.
3. Subcontractors shall comply with all manufacturers’ recommended maintenance and safety requirements.
D. Aerial Lifts/Scissors Lifts
1. Subcontractors shall comply with all manufacturers’ recommended maintenance and safety requirements.
2. Subcontractors shall use a fall arrest system at all times during their work in an aerial lift and scissors lift.
Rev. 1/08 dhl master subcontractor orientation Page 3 of 4
13. EXCAVATION/TRENCHING/SHORING - Subcontractor’s initials: __________ or N/A: __________
A. Excavation/Trenching/Shoring permit will be submitted to Johnson Controls at least five working days before the work is
performed.
B. Subcontractors shall slope or bench all excavations that are less than 20 feet deep.
C. Shoring
1. Shoring is only allowed when the location or depth of the cut makes sloping back to the maximum allowable slope
impractical. Asphalt is not exempt from this requirement.
2. Johnson Controls requires the use of either hydraulic or pneumatic shoring. Trench boxes can also be used either alone
or in combination with sloping.
3. Temporary spoil will not be placed closer than two feet from the surface edge of the excavation.
4. Access ladders will be within 25 feet from worker, be secured and extend at a minimum 36 inches above the landing.

14. CRANES - Subcontractor’s initials: __________ or N/A: __________

A. Lift plan will be submitted to Johnson Controls at least five working days before the lift is performed.
B. Crane operators must submit a copy of their valid training records and certification to Johnson Controls before they perform
any type of lift on site.

e
C. Daily inspections are required on all cranes before and during use. Daily inspections will be submitted to Johnson Controls no
later than 5:00 p.m. for each day the equipment is being used.
D. Annual crane inspections, along with daily inspections, will be maintained onsite and in the crane.
E. Tag lines will be used for all loads. Tag lines will help control the load in windy conditions that may cause the load to swing,
rotate, or become unbalanced.
F.
G.

pl
Subcontractors using cranes will post a copy of the crane hand signals that will be used.
Subcontractors shall comply with all of the manufacturers’ recommended maintenance and safety requirements.

15. HELICOPTER “EXTERNAL LIFT” - Subcontractor’s initials: __________ or N/A: __________

A.

B.
Helicopter cranes shall comply with 14 CFR, Part 133 -- Rotorcraft External-Load Operations and all other federal, state, and
local laws, rules and regulations that may apply to a rotorcraft external lift.
Subcontractors shall comply with all of the manufacturers’ recommended maintenance and safety requirements.
m
16. HOUSEKEEPING - Subcontractor’s initials: __________
Housekeeping must be conducted on a daily basis. Johnson Controls will issue a stop work order anytime housekeeping on the
site is disregarded. The stop work order will be lifted when the site is cleaned!

17. IMPALEMENT HAZARDS - Subcontractor’s initials: __________

A. All impalement hazards (rebar, electrical conduit, stakes, etc.) shall be guarded by using either steel caps, steel reinforced
plastic mushroom caps or wooden troughs. Plastic mushroom caps that are not steel reinforced are not allowed on Johnson
Controls sites.
Sa

B. When impalement hazards cannot be properly guarded, the area will be taped off with red “DO NOT ENTER” tape (restricted
access).

18. HAZARD COMMUNICATION - Subcontractor’s initials: __________

A. All subcontractors shall share information with one another regarding the hazardous materials that they are working with on
site.
B. Each subcontractor is responsible for maintaining accessible material safety data sheets for products it brings on site and for
training its employees on the proper handling, storage and disposal requirements of hazardous materials. Subcontractors
shall submit to Johnson Controls a chemical inventory list before they start working onsite.

Name of person who completed the above information:

Print Name Date Telephone Number

Signature

Rev. 1/08 dhl master subcontractor orientation Page 4 of 4

TAB PAGE

Directions to printer:

Remove this page and create a Tab titled, “Appendix B:

Abbreviations and Glossary”
 APPENDIX B:   
ABBREVIATIONS AND GLOSSARIES 
 
The HVAC controls industry, like the electrical
contracting industry, has a multitude of
terminologies and abbreviations. This Appendix
section provides an introduction to some of these
items and is intended to help employees, new to
the industry, better and quickly find reference to
their meaning and/or use.
These lists are not all-inclusive. They are
intended to show the most common abbreviations
and terms seen or heard regarding HVAC system
controls.
Appendix A Topics:
1. Abbreviations
2. Glossary of JCI and HVAC Terminology

Johnson Controls, Inc. Appendix B─1

 APPENDIX B:   
ABBREVIATIONS AND GLOSSARIES 
 
CH1-EN Chiller Enable
Abbreviations
CHW Chilled Water
24v Pwr 24 Volt AC Power CHWP1-C Chilled Water Pump Command
AC Air Conditioning Unit CHWP1-S Chilled Water Pump Status
AFMS-1 Air Flow Monitoring Station CHWR-T Chilled Water Return Temp
AHU Air Handling Unit CHWS-T Chilled Water Supply Temp
AHU AHU Controller CLG Cooling
AI Analog Input CLG1-C Cooling Stage Command
AIR-Q CO2 Sensor CLG-O Cooling Output
AO Analog Output CO Configurable Output
ASC Application Specific Controller CP Control Panel
ATC Automatic Temperature Control CP-C Coil Pump Command
B1GAS-V Boiler Gas Valve CP-S Coil Pump Status
BACnet BACnet Protocol CT Cooling Tower
BFPU Binary Field Processing Unit CT Current Transducer
BI Binary Input CT1-C Cooling Tower Fan Command
BLR1-A Boiler Alarm CT1-HI Cooling Tower Fan High Speed
BLR1-C Boiler Command CT1-LO Cooling Tower Fan Low Speed
BLR1-O Boiler Output CT1-O Cooling Tower Fan Speed Ctrl
BLR1-S Boiler Status CT1-S Cooling Tower Fan Status
BO Binary Output CTBYP-O Cooling Tower Bypass Valve
BTU British Thermal Unit CU Condensing Unit
C1CHW-S Chilled Water Isolation Valve CU-O Condensing Unit Output
Status CW Condenser Water
C1CW-S Condenser Water Isolation Valve CWP1-C Condenser Water Pump Cmd
Status
CWP1-S Condenser Water Pump Status
CCT Controller Configuration Tool
CWR-T Condenser Water Return Temp
CD-C Combustion Damper Command
CWS-T Condenser Water Supply Temp
CD-P Cold Deck Pressure
D-1 Damper
CD-S Combustion Damper Status
DA Damper Actuator
CD-T Cold Deck Temperature
DA-P Discharge Air Pressure
CFM Cubic Feet per Minute
DA-T Discharge Air Temperature
CH1-AMP Chiller Amperage

Johnson Controls, Inc. Appendix B─2

 APPENDIX B:   
ABBREVIATIONS AND GLOSSARIES 
 
DA-VP Discharge Air Velocity Pressure HD-P Hot Deck Pressure
DDC Direct Digital Controllers HD-T Hot Deck Temperature
DI Dig/Prop Interface HP-A High Pressure Alarm
DSC DSC-8500 HR-O Heat Recovery Output
DSC Distributed Control System HRP-C Heat Recovery Pump Command
DX DX-9100 Controller HRP-S Heat Recovery Pump Status
DX Direct Expansion HR-T Heat Recovery Temperature
EAD-C Exhaust Air Damper Command HTG Heating
EA-H Exhaust Air Humidity HTG1-C Heating Stage Command
EA-VP Exhaust Air Velocity Pressure HTG-O Heating Output
EC Electrical Contractor (Prime) HUM-EN Humidity Enable
ECH Electric Cabinet Heater HUM-HL Humidity High Limit
EF Exhaust Fan HUM-O Humidity Output
EF1-C Exhaust Fan Command HUM-V Humidity Valve
EF1-S Exhaust Fan Status HV Heating & Ventilating Unit
EF-C Exhaust Fan Command HVAC Heating, Ventilating & Air
Conditioning
EF-O Exhaust Fan Output
HW Hot Water
EF-S Exhaust Fan Status
HW-DP Hot Water System Differential
EHC Electric Heating Coil
Pressure
ENC Enclosure
HWP1-C Hot Water Pump Command
EP Electric to Pressure Device
HWP1-O Hot Water Pump Speed Output
ES Damper End Switch
HWP1-S Hot Water Pump Status
FCU Fan Coil Unit
HWR-T Hot Water Return Temperature
FEC Field Equipment Controller
HWS-T Hot Water Supply Temperature
FM Flow Meter
HWV-O Hot Water Valve Output
FPU Field Processing Unit
HXV-O1 Heat Exchanger Valve Output
FS Flow Switch
IOM Input Output Module
GC General Contractor
JCI Johnson Controls, Inc.
GLS-T Glycol Temperature
kW Electric Meter
GLY-O Glycol Output
kWH Kilo-Watt Hours
GLYR-T Glycol Return Temperature
LAN Local Area Network
GLYS-T Glycol Supply Temperature
LCP Lab & Central Plant Controller

Johnson Controls, Inc. Appendix B─3

 APPENDIX B:   
ABBREVIATIONS AND GLOSSARIES 
 
LON LON Protocol RF-C Return Fan Command
LP-A Low Pressure Alarm RF-O Return Fan Output
LT-A Low Temperature Alarm RF-S Return Fan Status
MA Mixed Air RH-O Reheat Output
MAD-O Mixed Air Damper Output RJ Registered Jack
MA-T Mixed Air Temperature RO Relay Output
MCC Motor Control Center RTD Resistive Temperature Device
MS Motor Starter S Switch
MUU Make Up Air Handling Unit SA Supply Air
N1 N1 Protocol SD Smoke Damper
N2 N2 Protocol SDR-1 Shut Down Relay
NAE Network Automation Engine SF Supply Fan
NCM Network Control Module SF-C Supply Fan Command
NCU Network Control Unit SF-O Supply Fan Output
NIE Network Integration Engine SF-S Supply Fan Status
OA Outside Air SQ Htg or Clg Sequencer
OAD-C Outside Air Damper Command SR Status Relay
OAD-ES Outside Air Damper End Switch STM-P Steam Pressure
OA-T Outside Air Temperature Tank-LL Tank Low Limit
PE Pressure to Electric Device TCP Temperature Control Panel
PFFBD-O Preheat Face & Bypass Damper TE Temperature Element
PH-O Preheat Output TEC TEC Controller
PHP-C Preheat Pump Command TS Thermostat
PHP-S Preheat Pump Status TX Transformer/Power Supplies
PH-T Preheat Temperature UH Unit Heater
PT Pressure Transmitter UNT Unitary Controller
R-1 Relay UI Universal Input
RA Return Air UO Universal Output
RA-H Return Air Humidity VAV Variable Air Volume
RA-T Return Air Temperature VMA VAV Modular Assembly
RA-VP Return Air Velocity Pressure ZN-H Zone Humidity
RF Return Fan ZN-T Zone Temperature

Johnson Controls, Inc. Appendix B─4

 APPENDIX B:   
ABBREVIATIONS AND GLOSSARIES 
 
Glossary of JCI and HVAC Terminology Air Conditioner: Assembly of equipment for the
simultaneous control of air temperature, relative
humidity, purity, and motion.
Absorption Cycle: Absorption chillers differ
from mechanical vapor compression chillers in Air cooled chillers / Air to water chillers: Chillers
that they utilize a thermal or chemical process to that consist of condensers and compressors which are
produce the refrigeration effect necessary to usually located externally and are air cooled. Chilled
provide chilled water. There is no mechanical water is provided from these chillers. (See water to
compression of the refrigerant taking place within water chillers)
the machine as occurs within more traditional Air Cooled: Uses a fan to discharge heat from the
vapor compression type chillers. Most commercial condenser coil to the outdoors.
absorption chillers utilize lithium bromide (a salt)
and water as the fluid pair. Air Curtain: A stream of high velocity, temperature
controlled air that is directed downward across an
Accuracy: The term accuracy describes the total opening. It is designed to exclude exterior draughts,
of all deviations between a measured value and and pollutants blown in from outside. It also prevents
the actual value. Accuracy is usually expressed as the transfer of heat across the boundary, and permits
the sum of non-linearity, repeatability and the air-conditioning of a space with an open entrance.
hysteresis. Accuracy may be expressed as the
percent of a full-scale range or output, or in Air Diffuser: Air distribution outlet or grille
engineering units. designed to direct airflow into desired patterns.
Actuator: A device that converts a pneumatic or Air Flow: The distribution or movement of air.
electric signal to force which produces movement. Air Handler: The portion of the central air
Address: A number or code that defines the conditioning or heat pump system that moves heated
position of the information in the memory of a or cooled air throughout a home's ductwork. In some
computer. It is also used to control the destination systems, a furnace handles this function.
of data sent on a bus. An address is a unique Air-Cooled System: A type of air conditioning
numeric or alphanumeric data (point) identifier. system that uses Freon as a refrigerant and air as a
AFUE: Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency, a condensing medium. Typically, the air-cooled
rating that reflects the efficiency of a gas furnace condenser is located outside and refrigerant lines are
in converting fuel to energy. A rating of 80 means piped to it from the indoor unit.
that approximately 80 percent of the fuel is Ambient Temperature: The temperature of the
utilized to provide warmth to your home, while surrounding environment.
the remaining 10 percent escapes as exhaust.
Analog: A continuous range of values such as
AHU: An acronym for air handling unit; a temperature, pressure, etc. (contrast with binary).
component of an HVAC system that includes the
fan(s), filters, and coils to condition the air. Analog Points: An analog input point typically
Controls air flows, pressure, temperature and implies an external point and represents a value that
humidity. varies over time. Typical analog inputs for HVAC
applications are temperature, pressure, relative
AHU Controller: An Application Specific humidity, carbon dioxide and airflow measurements.
Controller used for AHU operation. The AHU Typical analog outputs include control signals for
may be used as a standalone unit, or connected to modulating valve positions, damper positions and
the N2 Bus as an element in a Metasys Network. variable frequency drive speed.
Air Change: The amount of air required to Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency (AFUE): A
completely replace the air in a room or building; rating that denotes the efficiency of gas heating
not to be confused with re-circulated air.

Johnson Controls, Inc. Appendix B─5

 APPENDIX B:   
ABBREVIATIONS AND GLOSSARIES 
 
equipment. It is the amount of heating your Bulb (temperature): Short element, sometimes on
equipment delivers for every dollar spent on fuel. the end of a capillary, used in controls to sense
A higher rating indicates equipment that is more temperature, often immersed in a well.
efficient. This rating is calculated in accordance
BTU (British Thermal Unit): The standard of
with the Department of Energy test procedures.
measurement used for measuring the amount of heat
Application Specific Controller (ASC): A required to raise the temperature of one pound of
family of standalone controllers with hardware water by one degree (Fahrenheit). BTUH The
and software preconfigured to meet the needs of a number of BTUs in an hour.
specific application.
BTU/hr: The abbreviation for British thermal units
Auto Changeover: A control package that per hour. The amount of heat required to raise one
provides for automatic switching from a primary pound of water one degree Fahrenheit per hour, a
air conditioning system to a backup in the event of common measure of heat transfer rate.
a failure of the primary system.
BTU: British Thermal Unit. In scientific terms, it
Automatic control system: A system that reacts represents the amount of energy required to raise one
to a change in the variable it controls by adjusting pound of water one degree Fahrenheit. One BTU is
other variables to restore the system to the desired the equivalent of the heat given off by a single
balance. wooden kitchen match. For your home, it represents
the measure of heat given off when fuel is burned for
Averaging (temperature): Procedure to sense the
heating or the measure of heat extracted from your
average air temperature across the face of a coil or
home for cooling.
in a mixed air chamber.
Capacity: The ability of a heating or cooling system
Balance Point: An outdoor temperature, usually
to heat or cool a given amount of space. For heating,
between 30° F and 45° F, at which a heat pump's
this is usually expressed in BTU's. For cooling, it is
output exactly equals the heating needs of the
usually given in tons.
home. Below the balance point, supplementary
electric resistance heat is needed to maintain Capillary: Long, metal tube which runs between the
indoor comfort. sensing element or bulb and an instrument such as a
low limit cutout control or a duct averaging sensor.
Binary: Having on two states, conditions or
values; no intermediate units, e.g. on/off, Carbon Monoxide: Carbon Monoxide (CO) is a
open/close, etc. (contrast with Analog). colorless, odorless gas produced by burning any fuel.
CO is poisonous and symptoms of CO poisoning are
Binary Points: Typical binary inputs for HVAC
similar to those of the flu: headaches, fatigue, and
applications represent the status (example:
shortness of breath, nausea and dizziness. The
whether or not the motor is running) of fans,
Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC)
pumps, motors, lighting contactors, etc. A
recommends a yearly, professional inspection.
temperature high limit is considered a binary input
because, although it is monitoring an analog value Central Air Conditioner System: System in which
(temperature), the information that is transmitted air or water is treated at a central location and carried
to the controller is a binary condition (whether or to and from the zones by one or more fans and/or
not the temperature has exceeded a defined value). pumps and a system of ducts and/or pipes.
Binary outputs are typically motors or other
Centrifugal Compressor: A type of compressor
devices that are commanded “on” or “off.”
used in vapor compression refrigeration cycles where
Binary outputs include fans, pumps, two-position
a rotating impeller is the device that compresses the
(solenoid) valves, lighting contactors, etc.
refrigerant vapor. The vapor is drawn into the
Blower: An air handling device for moving air in impeller axially, and is discharged radically after
a distribution system. energy is added to the vapor within the impeller.

Johnson Controls, Inc. Appendix B─6

 APPENDIX B:   
ABBREVIATIONS AND GLOSSARIES 
 
CFM (Cubic Feet per Minute): The The outdoor portion of a split system air conditioner
abbreviation for cubic feet per minute commonly contains the compressor and outdoor coil ignoring the
used to measure the rate of air flow in an air reverse cycle operation, also the outdoor in a heat
conditioning system. A typical system produces pump system.
400 CFM per ton of air conditioning.
Configurable Output (CO): A versatile output type
Charge: Amount of refrigerant in a system. that can be Analog or Binary. It supports the
following types of outputs:
Chilled Water System: A type of air
conditioning system that has no refrigerant in the • Analog Output, Voltage Mode, 0 - 10 VDC
Air Unit itself. The refrigerant is contained in a
chiller, which is located remotely. The chiller • Binary Output Mode, 24 VAC Triac
cools water, which is piped to the air conditioner Controller (HVAC): An instrument that measures a
to cool the space. variable and responds by producing an output signal
Closed Loop System (HVAC): The arrangement or signals to maintain a set point. The controller
of components to allow system feedback. e.g., a processes data that is input from the sensor, applies
heating unit, valve and thermostat arranged so that the logic of control and causes an output action to be
each component affects the other and can react to generated. This signal may be sent directly to the
it. controlled device or to other logical control functions
and ultimately to the controlled device. The
Coaxial Cable: Cable that consists of a tubular controller’s function is to compare its input (from the
conductor surrounding a central conductor held in sensor) with a set of instructions such as setpoint,
place by insulating material. Used for transmitting throttling range and action, and then produce an
high frequency signals. appropriate output signal. This is the logic of control.
Combination Starter: Branch circuit protection, It usually consists of a control response along with
circuit breaker or fused disconnect, plus magnetic other logical decisions that are unique to the specific
starter all in one package. control application. How the controller functions is
referred to as the control response.
Compressor: The pump that moves the
refrigerant from the indoor evaporator to the Control Response: Are typically one the following:
outdoor condenser and back to the evaporator • Two-Position
again. The compressor is often called ""the heart
of the system"" because it circulates the • Floating
refrigerant through the loop." • Proportional (P only)
Condenser: A device that transfers unwanted • Proportional plus Integral (PI)
heat out of a refrigeration system to a medium
(either air, water, or a combination of air and • Proportional plus Integral plus Derivative
water) that absorbs the heat and transfers it to a (PID)
disposal point. There are three types of Controlled Device or Output: A controlled device
condensers: air-cooled condensers, water-cooled is a device that responds to the signal from the
condensers, and evaporative condensers. The controller, or the control logic, and changes the
evaporative condenser uses a combination of air condition of the controlled medium or the state of the
and water as its condensing medium. Most end device. These devices include valve operators,
residential systems have an air-cooled condenser. damper operators, electric relays, fans, pumps,
Condensing Unit: Part of a refrigerating compressors and variable speed drives for fan and
mechanism that pumps vaporized refrigerant from pump applications.
the evaporator, compresses it, liquefies it in the
condenser and returns it to the refrigerant control.

Johnson Controls, Inc. Appendix B─7

 APPENDIX B:   
ABBREVIATIONS AND GLOSSARIES 
 
Controller Configuration Tool (CCT): A The benefits are reduced demand charges to the
powerful component of the Metasys system tool customer and alleviated peak demand for utilities.
set used to configure and simulate control logic,
Department of Energy (DOE): A federal agency
download an application into the FEC family of
that sets industry efficiency standards and monitors
controllers, and commission the control logic
the use of various energy sources.
running in an FEC.
Depressurization: A measurement technique used
Cooling Capacity: A measure of the ability of a
to evaluate the air tightness of a building or
unit to remove heat from an enclosed space.
component. The air inside the room or building is
Cooling Load: Heat that flows into a space from extracted by the use of a fan, creating a lower
outdoors and/or indoors. pressure inside, than outside the room or building.
(See blower door; DC pressurization; pressurization)
Damper: Found in ductwork, this movable plate
opens and closes to control airflow. Dampers are Device (Control) Layout: Identification of physical
used effectively in zoning to regulate airflow to location, cable size/count and id tag requirements on
certain rooms or to control outside, return and a unit or system.
exhaust air.
Dip Switch: Switches used to set addresses for
Damper, Preloading: Damper adjustment controllers and mode of operation for Inputs and
procedure that ensures dampers remain tightly Outputs (i.e. RTD, 0-10V, and 4-20ma).
closed to prevent undesired air infiltration
Direct Expansion Systems (DX): One of two types
(normally done to the outside air damper of an
of basic cooling media (the other is chilled water).
AHU).
Direct expansion systems utilize Freon for cooling
Degree day(s): The concept of degree days or and dehumidification. The three most common
accumulated temperature difference allows the methods of heat rejection are air cooled, water cooled
requirement for heating in a building to be and glycol cooled.
assessed.
Direct Vent: Pulls outside air for combustion and
Dehumidification: The reduction of water vapor vents combustion gases directly outside.
in air by cooling the air below the dew point;
Downflow Furnace: A furnace that pulls in return
removal of water vapor from air by chemical
air from the top and expels warm air at the bottom.
means, refrigeration, etc.
Downflow: Refers to a type of precision air
Dedicated: Set apart or committed to a definite
conditioning system that discharges air downward,
use (cable, wire, raceway, etc.).
directly beneath a raised floor, commonly found in
Demand control (also 'Demand Limiting', computer rooms and modern office spaces.
'Load Limiting', and ‘Load Control'): An
Download: To download is to receive a file from
energy management technique used to monitor a
one computer to another computer on the system.
facility’s energy use in order to limit the peak
demand by automatically shutting down selected Duct / Ductwork: A pipe or channels made of sheet
equipment, on a priority basis, for short periods of metal, fiberglass board, or other suitable material
time. Demand limits are pre-programmed into the used for conducting air to and from an air handling
demand control software for this purpose. unit.
Demand control is most often applied to electrical DX 9100 (Controller): The N2 DX-9100 Extended
usage, and sometimes steam plant. Unlike most Digital Controller is the ideal digital control solution
other BAS techniques, monetary benefits are not a for multiple chiller or boiler plant applications,
direct result of energy savings since electricity complex custom air handling units, or distributed
usage is often merely postponed, not eliminated. lighting control. As a standalone controller, the DX-

Johnson Controls, Inc. Appendix B─8

 APPENDIX B:   
ABBREVIATIONS AND GLOSSARIES 
 
9100 provides a real-time clock, extendable I/O, Evaporator Coil: A series or network of tubes filled
and graphic software programming to target a with refrigerant located inside the structure that takes
variety of applications. Individual point heat and moisture out of indoor air as liquid
monitoring and control is available through the refrigerant evaporates.
front panel LED display.
Evaporator: Absorbs heat from the surrounding air
Economizer control: An energy management or liquid and moves it outside the refrigerated area by
function that aims to minimize energy means of a refrigerant. It is also known as a cooling
consumption by the use of 'free-cooling'. Internal coil, blower coil, chilling unit or indoor coil.
heat generation in a building may require the
Face and Bypass: Duct and damper system which
HVAC to provide cooling, even though the air
directs air thru (face) or around (bypass) heating or
temperatures are lower than the thermostat set
cooling coils.
point. Under this condition, it is possible to
introduce outdoor air into the building to provide Fahrenheit (Represented as degrees "F"): The
all or part of the cooling normally accomplished scale of temperature measurement most commonly
by refrigeration equipment. To use this ‘free- used in the United States of America."
cooling', the economizer measures the dry-bulb Field Equipment Controller (FEC): A BACnet®
temperature of the return air and the outdoor air, Master-Slave/Token-Passing (MS/TP) line is a
and selects an appropriate amount of the cooler air complete product family of BACnet field controllers
for the building conditioning by adjusting and accessories designed with the flexibility to meet
outdoors, return, and exhaust dampers. a wide range of HVAC controls applications.
Emergency Heat (Supplemental or Auxiliary Filter: A device used to remove dust and other
Heat): The back-up heat built into a heat pump particles from air for the purposes of reducing the
system. load on the respiratory system and to protect the
End-Of-Line Circuit or Resistor (EOL): HVAC equipment. Filters vary greatly in particle
Usually a circuit (but could be as simple as a arrestance; the higher the MERV rating, the better the
resistor) used on some communication buses filter.
(often on RS-485 bus circuits) to eliminate Free Cooling System: Typically a water cooled or
network interference caused by signal reflection glycol cooled system with an additional coil that
that occurs when data transmissions reach the provides chilled water cooling when the outdoor
ends of a bus segment and bounce back on the ambient is cold thereby reducing or eliminating
segment. Note: N2 trunks are more tolerant to compressor operation. Provides efficient system
misapplication of EOL termination best practices. operation in less humid Northern climates.
In addition, many N2 devices are designed to be
self-terminating devices (but can still be installed Freon: A general term used to identify, any of a
anywhere on the N2 segment). group of partially or completely halogenated simple
hydrocarbons containing fluorine, chlorine or
Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER): Means the ratio bromine, which are used as refrigerants.
of the cooling capacity of the air conditioner in
British Thermal Units per hour, to the total FSC Controller (LON): The FSC (Flexible System
electrical input in watts under ARI-specified test Controller) is part of a family of LONWORKS based
conditions. programmable controllers manufactured by Johnson
Controls.
Enthalpy: Heat content or total heat, including
both sensible and latent heat. The amount of heat Furnace: That part of an environmental system that
contained in a refrigerant at any given temperature converts gas, oil, electricity or other fuel into heat for
with reference to -40°F. distribution within a structure.

Johnson Controls, Inc. Appendix B─9

 APPENDIX B:   
ABBREVIATIONS AND GLOSSARIES 
 
Glycol-Cooled System: A type of air Humidification: The process of adding moisture to
conditioning system that uses Freon as a the air within a space.
refrigerant and a water/glycol solution as a
Humidifier: A device that injects water vapor into
condensing medium. Typically, the glycol-cooled
heated air as the air is expelled from the furnace.
condenser is located inside the air conditioner
with the rest of the refrigeration components. Humidistat: A device designed to regulate humidity
Water/glycol is piped to the unit from a dry cooler input by reacting to changes in the moisture content
or other suitable source. The glycol keeps the of the air.
solution from freezing during winter operation. Humidity: The amount of moisture in the air. Air
Ground Water-Source: Water from an conditioners remove moisture for added comfort.
underground well is being used as the heat source HVAC: Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning.
or heat sink for a heat pump.
HVAC Pro: A N2 standard Metasys programming
Heat Exchanger: A device for the transfer of tool used for creating control strategies for
heat energy from the source to the conveying Application Specific Controllers.
medium.
Indoor Coil: Refrigerant containing portion of a fan
Heat Gain: The amount of heat gained, coil unit similar to a car radiator typically made of
measured in BTU's, from a space to be several rows of copper tubing with aluminum fins.
conditioned, at the local summer outdoor design
temperature and a specified indoor design Indoor Unit: This is usually located inside the house
condition. and contains the indoor coil, fan, motor, and filtering
device, sometimes called the air handler.
Heat Loss: The amount of heat lost, measured in
BTU's from a space to be conditioned, at the local Infiltration: Air flow into a space usually through
winter outdoor design temperature and a specified walls and leaks around doors and windows.
indoor design condition. Input Signal: A variable signal received by an
Heat Pump: An air conditioner that contains a instrument that directs that instrument to change its
valve that allows it to alternate between heating output signal. If an instrument has more than one
and cooling. input signal, they interact to provide an output
change.
Heat Transfer: The movement of heat from one
place to another, between two substances, or Input/Output Modules (IOMs): IOMs serve two
within a substance. functions in the Metasys system: expansion modules
for FECs and point multiplexers for supervisory
Heating Capacity: The rate at which a specific engines.
device can add substantial heat to a substance,
expressed in BTUh (British Thermal Units per Insulation: Any material that slows down the
hour). transfer of heat.
Hysteresis: The maximum difference in Integrally Controlled Motor (ICM): A variable-
measured value or output when a set value is speed motor that operates at low RPM when possible
approached from above, and then below the value. for efficiency and quiet operation. ICM motors are
more than 90% efficient versus 60% efficiency for
Horizontal Flow: A type of furnace, installed on conventional motors.
its side, which draws air from one side, heats the
air and then sends it out the other side. Isolation Valves (Refrigerant): Valves used for the
transfer and isolation of refrigerant charge in the
Horizontal Furnace: A furnace that lies on its cooler or condenser, allowing refrigerant to be stored
side, pulling in return air from one side and inside a chiller during servicing.
expelling warm air from the other.

Johnson Controls, Inc. Appendix B─10

 APPENDIX B:   
ABBREVIATIONS AND GLOSSARIES 
 
Isolation Valves (Chiller/Condenser System): Metasys: An evolutionary Building Automation
Valves used for the transfer or isolation of water System designed by Johnson Controls, Inc.
in the evaporator or condenser, allowing flow to
Microprocessor Controls: A control system that
transfer or isolate a chiller.
uses computer logic to operate and monitor an air
K Factor: The insulating value of any material. conditioning system. Microprocessor controls are
Also known as conductivity. commonly used on modern precision air conditioning
systems to maintain precise control of temperature
Kilowatt (kW): Equal to 1,000 watts. Kilowatt-
and humidity and to monitor the units operation.
hour (kWh) a common unit of electrical
consumption measured by the total energy created Molex Connectors: Pull apart control terminating
by one kilowatt in one hour. blocks to provide easy means of disconnecting
control circuits or signals.
Latent Cooling Capacity: An A/C system's
capability to remove moisture from the air. Natural-Draft Furnace: A furnace in which the
natural flow of air from around the furnace provides
Latent Heat: The heat energy needed to change
the air to support combustion. It also depends on the
the state of a substance (i.e.: from a liquid to a
pressure created by the heat in the flue gases to force
gas) but not it's temperature.
them out through the vent system.
LCD: An abbreviation for a screen type Liquid
NCM: The Network Control Module (NCM) is the
Crystal Display.
main processor in the NCU. Fully user
LN Series Application Specific Controllers: A programmable, it is responsible for supervisory
complete family of controllers is designed for use control activities for the points and control loops
with any LONWORKS network open and connected to the NCU and all controllers with which
interoperable system. LN Series application it communicates on its local buses.
specific controller family includes the Fan Coil
Network Automation Engine (NAE): The NAE is
Unit (FCUL), Rooftop Unit (RTUL), Heat Pump
an automation engine that manages facilities using
Unit (HPUL), and Unit Ventilator (UVL)
information and Internet technology. The NAE uses
controllers and multiple Free Programmable
the communication technologies of the building
Controllers.
automation industry, including BACnet® protocol,
Load: The demand on the operating resources of LONWORKS® network, and the N2 Bus to monitor
a system. and supervise Heating, Ventilating, and Air
Log: A chronological record of a series of events. Conditioning (HVAC) equipment, lighting, security,
Each event is identified by time, day, value, and fire, and access control.
physical reference. Network Sensors (NS-7000 Series): Electronic zone
Low Limit (Low Limit Temperature Cutout temperature and/or humidity sensors. Features
Control): Control device that protects water-filled available include temperature sensing, humidity
coils from freezing. Use to sense low sensing, temperature set-point, fan control, degrees
temperatures to avoid overcooling or icing of coils F/C button, and occupancy override function. A
or liquid handling pipes. May include additional Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) is also a feature that
safety or limit controls or systems (alarm, allows occupants to view the space temperature, and
supervisory) to protect against or warn of failure. view or adjust the space set-point.

Metastat: A family of space temperature sensing NFPA: National Fire Protection Association.
products for use with N2 Application Specific Network Integration Engine (NIE): Connects
Controllers. existing Metasys N1 based building automation
systems into the new generation of technology that

Johnson Controls, Inc. Appendix B─11

 APPENDIX B:   
ABBREVIATIONS AND GLOSSARIES 
 
includes the Internet, Information Technology standard protocol system uses a protocol available to
(IT) and enterprise level global communication. anyone. It is created by a standards organization.
Most JCI BAS systems use one of three protocols:
Node: A node is any device that connects to a
N2 (open), BACnet (standard) or LON (open).
network or bus.
Protocol (BACnet): BACnet is a standard protocol
Normally Closed: Applies to a controlled device
published by a standards organization (American
that closes when the signal applied to it is
Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-
removed.
conditioning Engineers or ASHRAE). It is a
Normally Open: Applies to a controlled device specification for a protocol. Vendors create a
that opens when the signal applied to it is communication protocol that complies with this
removed. specification. BACnet is a relatively complex
Open Loop System: The arrangement of standard. The standard defines protocol
components that will not allow system feedback. implementation conformance statements (PICS) that
define different levels of compliance. A given vendor
Outdoor Coil/Condensing Unit: The portion of may or may not support the level required for a given
a heat pump or central air conditioning system application. In other words, a vendor could meet a
that is located outside the home and functions as a very low level of compliance and be BACnet
heat transfer point for collecting heat from and compatible.
dispelling heat to the outside air.
Protocol (N2): Johnson Controls has created an open
Output Signal: A Signal produced in response to protocol that links controllers and point interfaces to
a given input. the building supervisor controllers/engines. The N2 is
Package System: A piece of air conditioning and based on Opto-22 Optomux protocol, which was
heating equipment where all components are designed for industrial applications, and is a proven
located in one cabinet. The package unit is communication network. The N2 Bus follows the
installed either beside or on top of the building. electrical characteristics of Electronics Industry
Alliance (EIA) Standard RS-485.
Point: A generic term used to describe a single
item of information in a control system. Points Protocol (LON): The Echelon Corporation has
may be further described as input, output, created an open protocol that uses a standard
configurable, digital, binary, discrete, analog, processor and a set of standard transceivers, which
modulating, internal, external, relay, universal, allows components from different manufacturers to
virtual or global. Each unique point used by co-exist on the same LAN. The protocol is available
digital controllers, or in digital control systems, is to anyone and is called LONTALK. A unique chip is
typically identified by a number. required for any device that uses LON. Standard
network variable formats have been established to
Point Schedule: Tabular document used to allow the transfer of data from one device to another
identify components and wiring connections of a regardless of origin.
control system. This document is the “master list”
of information regarding every point that requires Refrigerant: A chemical that produces a
installation for a given system. refrigerating effect while expanding and vaporizing.

Protocol: In the BAS world, there are the three Register: Combination grille and damper assembly
classifications of protocols: closed protocol, open covering an air opening or end of an air duct.
protocol and standard protocol. A closed protocol Relative Humidity: The ratio of the amount of
is a proprietary protocol used by a specific vapor contained in the air to the greatest amount the
equipment manufacturer. An open protocol air could hold at that temperature. Normally
system uses a protocol available to anyone, but expressed as a percentage.
not published by a standards organization. A

Johnson Controls, Inc. Appendix B─12

 APPENDIX B:   
ABBREVIATIONS AND GLOSSARIES 
 
Return Air: Air that is drawn or forced from a condition. Additional input information (sensed data)
space or forced back to a central location such as that influences the control logic may include the
an air handling unit. status of other parameters (airflow, water flow,
current) or safety (fire, smoke, high/low temperature
Reverse Acting: The output signal changing in
limit or any number of other physical parameters).
the opposite direction the controlled or measured
Sensors are an extremely important part of the
variable changes. Example: an increase in the
control system and can be the first, as well as a
controlled or measured variable results in a
major, weak link in the chain of control.
decreased output signal.
Set point: The temperature to which a thermostat is
Reversing Valve: A device in a heat pump that
set for desired comfort level.
reverses the flow of refrigerant as the system is
switched from cooling to heating. Split System: A central air conditioner consisting of
two or more major components. The system usually
RJ (Registered Jack): Termination method
consists of a compressor-containing unit and
commonly used in used in the tele-commutations
condenser, installed outside the building and a non-
industry. RJ11 – 2, 4, or 6 conductor; RJ12 – 6
compressor containing air handling unit installed
conductors (3 pair); RJ45 – 8 conductors (4 pair)
within the building. This is the most common type of
SEER (Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio): A system installed in a home.
rating that denotes the efficiency of air
Spring Range: The range through which the signal
conditioning equipment. It is the amount of
applied must change to produce total movement of
cooling your equipment delivers for every dollar
the controlled device from one extreme position to
spent on electricity. It is the ratio of cooling
the other.
delivered by a system, measured in BTUs, to the
dollar cost of the electricity to run the system, as 1. Nominal Spring Range: The change in applied
measured in watt-hours. This ratio is determined signal that causes total movement when there is no
using specified federal test procedures. The higher external force opposing the actuator.
the SEER, the more efficient the unit. The more
2. Actual Spring Range: The charge in applied
efficient the unit, the lower the operating cost.
signal that operates the controlled device under
Sensible Cooling Capacity: An A/C system's actual conditions when it must overcome forces
capability to remove heat from the air. (Lower the due to fluid flow, friction, etc., in addition to the
temperature). nominal spring force.
Sensible Heat: Heat energy that causes a rise or Static Pressure: The force, per unit of area, exerted
fall in the temperature of a gas, liquid or solid across a surface, in particular the inner or outer
when added or removed from that material. surfaces of a duct in an air handling unit. Units
Sensible heat changes the temperature by measured in “inches of water column” (w.c.) or
changing the speed at which the molecules move. “inches of water gauge” (w.g.).
Sensing Element: The sensing portion of a Super cooled Liquid: Liquid refrigerant cooled
control. below its saturation point.
Sensor: The sensor measures the controlled Superheated Vapor: Refrigerant vapor heated
medium or other control input in an accurate and beyond its saturation point.
repeatable manner. Common HVAC sensors are
Superheating: Creating a rise in temperature by
used to measure temperature, pressure, relative
adding heat energy to a refrigeration vapor.
humidity, airflow state and carbon dioxide. Other
variables may also be measured that influence the Supervisory Controller or Engine: A Controller
controller logic. Examples include other that supervises System Level Controllers. Typically,
temperatures, time-of-day or the current demand these controllers have one or more buses (N2,

Johnson Controls, Inc. Appendix B─13

 APPENDIX B:   
ABBREVIATIONS AND GLOSSARIES 
 
BACnet or LON) that the System Level a 24 hour period. One ton of cooling is equal to
Controllers use to communicate. 12,000 Btu/hr.
Supplementary Heat: The auxiliary or Transducer: A device that converts the quantity
emergency heat, usually electrical resistance heat, being measured into an optical, pneumatic,
provided at temperatures below a heat pump's mechanical, hydraulic, electrical, or electronic signal.
balance point. Transduction is the energy conversion process that
takes place, i.e., from one form of energy to another,
Switchover Valve: A device in a heat pump that
e.g., pneumatic to electronic.
reverses the flow of refrigerant as the system is
switched from cooling to heating. Also called a Transmitter: A transducer that is paired with a
reversing valve or four-way valve. sensor to produce a higher-level signal (typically)
than is available directly from the sensor. These
Switchover: A device in a heat pump that
sensors may be integral or remote and may include
reverses the flow of refrigerant as the system is
digital or analog signal processing. (Examples:
switched from cooling to heating.
temperature transmitter employing a temperature
System Controller: N2, MS/TP, SA or LON sensor. The temperature sensor varies the resistance
Controller(s) used for digital control of central with temperature change and the transmitter outputs a
plants, air handling units, unit ventilators, fan related 4-20 mA current output for use by a
coils, heat pumps, variable air volume and other controller.)
terminal units. Normally a single controller.
Upflow Furnace: A furnace that pulls return air in
TEC Thermostat: Thermostats specifically from the bottom and expels warm air from the top.
designed for control of equipment such as rooftop
Upflow: A type of air conditioning system that
units (with and without economizers), heat pumps,
discharges air into the conditioned space via a top-
and single and multi-stage heating/cooling
mounted discharge plenum or through an overhead
equipment in a single unit. One way to describe
duct system.
these units would be to call it a “home thermostat”
with a protocol being added (on select models). Universal Input (UI): A versatile input type that
The TEC thermostats feature Metasys system N2 can be Analog or Binary. Not capable of high speed
Bus, LON and BACnet communication capability pulse monitoring. It supports the following types of
models. inputs:
Temperature: The measure of the intensity of • Analog Input, Voltage Mode, 0 - 10 VDC
heat that a substance possesses.
• Analog Input, Current Mode, 4 - 20 mA,
Thermostat: A temperature control device,
typically found on a wall inside that consists of a • Analog Input, Resistive Mode, 0 - 2k ohm,
series of sensors and relays that monitors and RTD (1k NI, 1k PT, NTC
controls the functions of a heating and cooling • Binary Input, Dry Contact
system.
• Maintained Mode
Ton: A unit of measurement used for
determining cooling capacity. One ton is the Universal Output (UO): A versatile output type
equivalent of 12,000 BTUs per hour. that can be Analog or Binary. It supports the
following types of outputs:
Tonnage: The unit of measure used in air
conditioning to describe the cooling capacity of a • Analog Output, Voltage Mode, 0 - 10 VDC
system. One ton of cooling is based on the amount • Binary Output Mode, 24 VAC/DC FET
of heat needed to melt one ton (2000 lbs.) of ice in
• Analog Output, Current Mode, 4 - 20 mA

Johnson Controls, Inc. Appendix B─14

 APPENDIX B:   
ABBREVIATIONS AND GLOSSARIES 
 
UNT Controller: An N2 Application Specific Water Cooled System: A type of air conditioning
Controller used for digital control of package air system that uses Freon as a refrigerant and water as a
handling units, unit ventilators, fan coils, heat condensing medium. Typically, the water-cooled
pumps, and other terminal units serving a single condenser is located inside the air conditioner with
room or zone. the rest of the refrigeration components. Water is
piped to the unit from a cooling tower or other
Vacuum Pump: A pump used to remove air and
suitable source.
moisture from a refrigeration system at a pressure
below atmospheric pressure. Water Source: Water is being used as the heat
source or heat sink for a heat pump. Sources of
Valve positioner: A control valve accessory that
underground water are wells and sources of surface
transmits a loading pressure to an actuator to
water are lakes, large ponds, and rivers.
position the valve exactly as required by the
controller. It helps overcome hysteresis and lags Water to water chillers: (See Air cooled chillers or
due to friction. air to water chillers) The same as except water is
used to reject heat instead of air; the circuit rejecting
VAV Controller: A N2 Application Specific
the water is known as condenser water and is usually
Controller used for digital control of single duct,
provided from a cooling tower.
dual duct, fan powered and supply/exhaust VAV
box applications. Watt: A unit of power that equals one joule per
second. Named after James Watt.
VAV-02 Controller; A LON controller
consisting of a Variable Air Volume (VAV) Well (temperature): Wells are used in conjunction
controller integrated with a pressure sensor and with temperature controls where element or bulb
damper modulator. It provides pressure insertion into a vessel or container to sense
dependent/independent cooling control for fan temperature is required.
powered VAV terminal boxes with or without
Wireless: Metasys capabilities are offered at
reheat capacity. The VAV-02 features direct
multiple levels within the building automation
digital control electronics, over-the-shaft
system. The availability of wireless solutions at the
mounting, damper position indication and an easy
room temperature sensing, field bus, and user
to set mechanical travel limit.
interface levels extend the wireless Metasys system
Ventilation: The process of supplying or beyond the previously available in-building wireless
removing air, by natural or mechanical means, to distributed infrastructure and wireless NAE solution.
or from any space. Such air may or may not have This multitude of wireless options provides higher
been conditioned. performance, enhanced flexibility, and simplified
installations.
Vibration Isolation: Use of flexible conduit or
tubing to isolate controls or raceway from Wireless Field Bus: Allows N2 devices to function
vibration. as wireless devices over a Wireless Local Area
Network (WLAN) infrastructure. A wireless field bus
VMA Controller: The Variable Air Volume
provides cost effective intra-building connectivity
Modular Assembly (VMA) is a family of
between remote N2 devices and the Metasys network
configurable digital controllers with (depending
(supported NAEs).
on models) a combined controller, pressure sensor
and/or actuator housed in one pre-assembled unit. Zoning: The practice of providing independent
The VMA1400 series communicates on the N2 heating and/or cooling to different areas in a
Bus, VMA1200 series communicates on LON and structure. Zoning typically utilizes a system
the VMA 1600 series communicates on the controller, zoning dampers controlled by a thermostat
BACnet MS/TP Bus. in each zone, and/or a bypass damper, inlet vanes or a
VFD to regulate static pressure in the supply duct.

Johnson Controls, Inc. Appendix B─15

 APPENDIX B:   
ABBREVIATIONS AND GLOSSARIES 
 
Zone Temperature Device: Instrument used to
measure the temperature in a space and provide an
input signal to equipment. Examples: NetSensor,
thermostat, Metastat.

Johnson Controls, Inc. Appendix B─16

TAB PAGE

Directions to printer:

Remove this page and create a Tab titled, “Appendix C: Sample

Shop Drawings”
This page is intentionally blank.
 Creating a better climate for business.
Environmental Control System
Facility Management System
Page Description Air and Water System Balancing
1.1 Riser Diagram Example
Fire Management System
Security System
2.1 BACNET System Example AHU Flow Layout Lighting Services
2.2 BACNET System Example AHU Wiring Details Instrumentation System Installation
3.1 BACNET System Example VAV Flow Layout Building Operations Management
4.1 BACNET System Example CHW Flow Layout
4.2 BACnet System Example CHW Wiring Details
Energy Conservation Control
5.1 BACnet System Example HWS Flow Layout Training Programs
5.2 BACnet System Example HWS Wiring Details Performance Contracting
Planned Service Agreements
6.1 Room Schedule Example
Air Conditioning
Heating
Diagnostic Services
Coil Cleaning
Refrigeration
Automatic Temperature Controls
Facility Management Systems
Fire Management
Security Management
Building Operations and Management
Water Treatment
Electrical Equipment
Emergency Generator / Lighting Equipment
Industrial Controls / Recording / Indication Equipment

PROJECT TITLE

FAN 55.510 Electrical Installer Guide

ARCHITECT ENGINEER

Architect Name Example Engineer Name Example

1234 Architect Street 1234 Engineer Street
Architect City, USA Engineer City, USA
Phone: 123-456-7890 Phone: 123-456-7890
LEGEND MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR

Mech Contractor Name Example

H Strap-on Bulb Type
S Main Air Supply Tube Pneumatic Tube Opposed Blade Paddle Type Flow Duct Detector 1234 Mechanical Street
7 NO Heating or Cooling Coil Device Temperature Sensing
20 at 20 PSIG indicating Tube Number Damper C Switch (Smoke, CO, CO2) Mechanical City, USA
Element
Phone: 123-456-7890
Wire Symbol indicating: Parallel Blade
NO
D-N Dual Air Supply Tube at number of wires and Damper
2/18 Ductwork or Piping with
15-20 15/20 PSIG size (E.G. 2 #18 wires) Bulb Type Temperature Combination Bulb Type
Flow Direction Shown
Day=15, Night=20 Filter Vapor Tension
Wire Symbol indicating: Sensing Element Temperature Sensing 2-Way Valve with
Temperature Sensing
S High Pressure Air Cable Destination (DA-T), Located under Shield in Element and Humidity Actuator
Element (Hi Limit)
Supply Tube at 80 PSIG 3 2/18 Cable number (3), Gage Outside air Sensor (Duct Mount)
80 Air Flow Measuring
Number of wires and size Station
NC
Air line or Electrical (E.G. 2 #18 wires) REFERENCE DRAWING NO. REVISION-LOCATION ECN DATE BY

Wire Humidity Sensing Vapor Tension Branch Information

Element Located under Bulb Type Temperature 3-Way Valve with
Electrical Wire Terminal Humidifier Temperature Sensing
Connected Lines or Shield in Outside air Sensing Element Actuator
1 with Appropriate Element (Low Limit)
Wires
Number C NC
Crossing Lines or Fan
Item Located on Panel Bulb Type Temperature ,
Wires, Not Connected Current Sensing Switch N0
Face Sensing Element Pressure Sensing Phone:
or Combination Current
Located inside Device Fax:
In-Line Restrictor Drawing Revision Sensing switch &
Symbol with Pump Separable Socket/Well Command Relay
1 SALES ENGINEER PROJECT MANAGER APPLICATION ENGINEER DATE CONTRACT NUMBER
Appropriate Number Mr. Optimistic I.N. Charge Bit Wizard 1234-5678
 BILL OF MATERIAL

TAG QTY PART DESCRIPTION

NAE-1 1 PAGJ00001FC0 PANEL NAE3510 16X20

ROUTER
BY OWNER INTERNET
CONNECTION

ETHERNET
FIREWALL
BY OWNER

HUB VAC
Power

ETHERNET
MS/TP MS/TP MS/TP MS/TP
COM

HOT

BATTERY

24 V~

POWER BATT FAULT

NAE
FAULT ETHERNET
10 LINK
FC BUS 100 LINK
RUN
FC BUS
PEER COM

FC BUS

RS232C A RS232C B ETHERNET USB

SHD

REF

--
+

+
REF
A
SH
LD

NAE-1
Mech Room 1
Address 4 Address 5 Address 6

CHILLER BOILER AHU-1

VAV Boxes
Mech Mech Mech
Room 3 Room 2 Room 1 Typical of 40
SEE ROOM SCHEDULE
FOR ADDRESS AND
LOCATION
INFORMATION

SHIELD GROUNDING
Earth
Ground
REF
A
SH
LD

+
–

Drawing Title
IN CONSIDERATION OF THE RECEIPT OF
THIS DOCUMENT, THE RECIPIENT AGREES
NOT TO REPRODUCE, COPY, USE OR Riser Diagram.vsd
If a shield is used, it should be earth TRANSMIT THIS DOCUMENT AND/OR THE
REFERENCE DRAWING NO. REVISION-LOCATION ECN DATE BY
INFORMATION THEREIN CONTAINED, IN
grounded at one and only one point for the WHOLE OR IN PART, OR TO SUFFER SUCH Sales Engineer Project Manager Application Engineer DRAWN APPROVED

entire bus segment. (Preferably in the NAE ACTION BY OTHERS, FOR ANY PURPOSE, BY DATE
Branch Information
BY DATE
CONTRACT NUMBER
EXCEPT WITH THE ADVANCE WRITTEN Project Title
Panel.) The shield screws on the controllers PERMISSION OF JOHNSON CONTROLS,
are simply a convenient way to continue the INC. AND FURTHER AGREES TO FAN 55.510 Electrical Installer 1234-5678
SURRENDER SAME TO JOHNSON Guide DRAWING NUMBER
daisy chain of the bus. They are not attached CONTROLS, INC. UPON DEMAND.

to earth ground. COPYRIGHT JOHNSON CONTROLS, INC. 2007 1.1

29001
 RA-SD BILL OF MATERIAL
(BY OTHER)

RA TAG
FIELD DEVICES:
QTY PART DESCRIPTION

CLG-O 1 VG1241FR+909GGA BRASS TRIM, NON-SPG RTN M9109-GGA-2, NO SWITCHES,

DA-T 1 TE-6311M-1 8" 1000 OHM NI DUCT TEMP
HTG-O 1 VG1241FR+92JGGA BRASS TRIM SPRING OPEN M9210-GGA-3 0-10V PROP.CO
LT-A 1 A70HA-1C DUCT,MLT,SP=15-55 F (-9-13 C),STG=2
MA-T 1 TE-6316M-1 NICKEL DUCT AVERAGE,17 FEET
MA-T \ LT-A 1 TE-6001-8 AVERAGING ELEMENT HOLDER
MAD-O MAD-O 2 M9220-GGA-3 20 NM SR DPR ACT 0(2) TO 10 VDC 24 VAC 50/60 HZ 2
NO
(D-2) 2 VOPEN-048X048 VD-1320 VOLUME DAMPER
SDR-1 1 RIBU1C SPDT,10A,HC=10-30 VAC/DC,W/LED
SF-C, SF-S 1 CSD-SA1E1-1 SLD/ADJ LED 1A W/RLY
ZN-T 1 NS-BTN7001-0 3X4.5.T.PJ
PANEL DEVICES:
PANEL 1 PAKA00001FH0 PANEL FEC1610 16X20

MAD-O
MA-T LT-A DA-T
(D-1)
C H
OA C C
NC DA
CLG-O HTG-O SF STARTER

RETURN RETURN
NO SF-C
SDR-1 ZN-T
SF-S
SUPPLY SUPPLY

SUPPLY FAN START/STOP: THE SUPPLY FAN WILL BE STARTED ACCORDING TO THE SCHEDULE. IF THE
SUPPLY FAN STATUS DOES NOT MATCH THE COMMANDED VALUE, AN ALARM WILL BE GENERATED. WHEN
THE SUPPLY FAN STATUS INDICATES THE FAN STARTED, THE CONTROL SEQUENCE WILL BE ENABLED.

DISCHARGE AIR CONTROL: THE DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE SETPOINT WILL RESET AS NECESSARY TO
MAINTAIN THE ZONE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT AS SENSED BY THE ZONE TEMPERATURE SENSOR. THE
DA-T \ UI IN-1 2/22 MIXED AIR DAMPERS, HEATING VALVE, AND THE COOLING VALVE WILL MODULATE IN SEQUENCE TO
DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE VAC
MAINTAIN THE DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE AT SETPOINT.
MA-T \ UI IN-2 Power
MIXED AIR TEMPERATURE
2/22 MIXED AIR LOW LIMIT OVERRIDE: THE MIXED AIR TEMPERATURE WILL OVERRIDE THE MINIMUM POSITION
AND CLOSE THE OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER IF A TEMPERATURE IS SENSED BELOW THE SETPOINT.
SF-S \ BI IN-3
2/22
SUPPLY FAN STATUS
ECONOMIZER DRY BULB SWITCHOVER: WHEN THE SHARED OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE IS BELOW THE
SF-C \ BO OUT-1
2/22 SWITCHOVER SETPOINT, THE ECONOMIZER WILL BE ENABLED. WHEN THE SHARED OUTSIDE AIR
SUPPLY FAN COMMAND TEMPERATURE RISES ABOVE THE SWITCHOVER SETPOINT PLUS A DIFFERENTIAL, THE ECONOMIZER WILL
LT-A BE DISABLED.
2/22
LT-A LOW TEMP CUT OUT
SDR-1 PANEL NIGHT SETBACK/NIGHT SETUP: WHEN IN “UNOCCUPIED” MODE, THE UNIT WILL CYCLE AS NECESSARY TO
SHUT DOWN RELAY
2/22 MAINTAIN THE NIGHT SETBACK ZONE TEMPERATURE AT SETPOINT. A DIFFERENTIAL PREVENTS THE UNIT
FROM CYCLING EXCESSIVELY.
MAD-O \ CO OUT-4 3/18
MIXED AIR DAMPER OUTPUT
SAFETY:
CLG-O \ CO OUT-5 3/18 ALL OF THE SAFETY DEVICES ARE MANUAL RESET; THE DEVICE THAT HAS TRIPPED MUST BE MANUALLY
COOLING OUTPUT RESET BEFORE RESTARTING THE AIR HANDLING UNIT.
HTG-O \ CO OUT-6 3/18 IF A TEMPERATURE LOW LIMIT SWITCH SENSES A TEMPERATURE BELOW SETPOINT THE SUPPLY FAN
HEATING OUTPUT WILL BE SHUTDOWN.
ZN-T \ STAT
IF A FIRE ALARM SHUTDOWN CONTACT IS PROVIDED, THE SUPPLY FAN WILL BE SHUTDOWN WHEN
6/24
ZONE TEMPERATURE TRIGGERED.

BAC 3/22 SHUTDOWN:

TO NEXT BACNET DEVICE BLU
WHEN THE UNIT IS SHUTDOWN BY EITHER A STOP COMMAND OR SYSTEM SAFETY THE UNIT WILL BE SET AS
FROM LAST BACNET DEVICE BAC 3/22 FOLLOWS:
BLU SUPPLY FAN WILL BE OFF
OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER WILL CLOSE
RETURN AIR DAMPER WILL OPEN
COOLING VALVE WILL CLOSE
HEATING VALVE WILL CLOSE

Drawing Title
IN CONSIDERATION OF THE RECEIPT OF
THIS DOCUMENT, THE RECIPIENT AGREES
NOT TO REPRODUCE, COPY, USE OR
TRANSMIT THIS DOCUMENT AND/OR THE AHU-BACnet Flow.vsd
REFERENCE DRAWING NO. REVISION-LOCATION ECN DATE BY
INFORMATION THEREIN CONTAINED, IN
Sales Engineer Project Manager Application Engineer DRAWN APPROVED
WHOLE OR IN PART, OR TO SUFFER SUCH
BY DATE BY DATE
ACTION BY OTHERS, FOR ANY PURPOSE,
Branch Information CONTRACT NUMBER
EXCEPT WITH THE ADVANCE WRITTEN Project Title
PERMISSION OF JOHNSON CONTROLS,
INC. AND FURTHER AGREES TO
FAN 55.510 Electrical Installer
1234-5678
SURRENDER SAME TO JOHNSON
DRAWING NUMBER
CONTROLS, INC. UPON DEMAND. Guide
COPYRIGHT JOHNSON CONTROLS, INC. 2007 2.1
1224
Electrician/Fitter Point Information Controller Information f Intermediate Device Field Device
Cable Ref
System Controller Trunk Trunk Trunk Wiring Wiring
Point Type Object Name Expanded ID Destination Termination Out Termination In Device Termination Out Termination In Device Location Detail Comment
Name Details Type Nbr Addr. /Tubing /Tubing
Tag Bay/Terminal Shape
FEC 16xx Power to Controller
FEC 16xx MS/TP 1 6 BacNet FC Bus
UI IN-1 DA-T Discharge Air Temperature FEC 16xx MS/TP 1 6 UI IN-1 IN1, ICOM1 2/22 2-Wire TE F131
UI IN-2 MA-T Mixed Air Temperature FEC 16xx MS/TP 1 6 UI IN-2 IN2, ICOM2 2/22 2-Wire TE F131
BI IN-3 SF-S Supply Fan Status FEC 16xx MS/TP 1 6 BI IN-3 IN3, ICOM3 2/22 OUT, COM Current Relay Motor Lead Motor Lead See wiring detail Motor Status (Contact) F301
BO OUT-1 SF-C Supply Fan Command FEC 16xx MS/TP 1 6 BO OUT-1 OUT1, 24V COM 2/22 COIL (24V, Com) Current Relay COM, NO 2/14 See wiring detail Starter (NO) (Sw Hi, EXT Source) F502
BO OUT-2 FEC 16xx MS/TP 1 6 BO OUT-2
BO OUT-3 FEC 16xx MS/TP 1 6 BO OUT-3
CO OUT-4 MAD-O Mixed Air Damper Output FEC 16xx MS/TP 1 6 CO OUT-4 OUT4, OCOM4,24V HOT 3/18 GRY, BLK, RED M9210/20-GGx (Vdc) (Int Source) F247
CO OUT-5 CLG-O Cooling Output FEC 16xx MS/TP 1 6 CO OUT-5 OUT5, OCOM5,24V HOT 3/18 Vdc, Com, +24V M-9106,9109 (Vdc) (Int Source) F243
CO OUT-6 HTG-O Heating Output FEC 16xx MS/TP 1 6 CO OUT-6 OUT6, OCOM6,24V HOT 3/18 GRY, BLK, RED M9206-GGx-2S (Vdc) (Int Source) F249
CO OUT-7 FEC 16xx MS/TP 1 6 CO OUT-7
NET STAT
NET STAT SA Bus 1 199 BacNet SA Bus
STAT ZN-T Zone Temperature NET STAT SA Bus 1 199 STAT Phone Jack 6/24 Phone Jack NetStat (Jack,Fixed Address=199) NS101

DETAIL F131 TEMPERATURE SENSOR INPUT DETAIL F243 0-10VDC OUTPUT to M-9106, 9109 DETAIL F247 0-10VDC OUTPUT to M9210/20- DETAIL F249 0 (2)-10VDC OUTPUT to M9206-
Add Jumper from 24VAC Com to 24VAC Com
GGx and HGx-3 GGx-2S
only one AO Com per Transformer Add Jumper from 24VAC Com to Add Jumper from 24VAC Com to
COM 24VAC Hot only one OCOM# per Transformer only one OCOM# per Transformer

+24 OCOM# Counterclockwise (CCW) Spring Return Direction – 24VAC Com Counterclockwise (CCW) Spring Return Direction – 24VAC Com
Clockwise (CW) Powered Operation Clockwise (CW) Powered Operation
IN#
VDC/mA OUT# 2 Red 24VAC Hot 2 Red 24VAC Hot
Side A: Side A:
ICOM# Mounted Mounted
FB FEC/IOM away from
1 Black OCOM#
away from
1 Black OCOM#
RTD FEC/IOM W1 damper damper
DA (cw) RA (ccw) 3 Gray OUT# 3 Gray OUT#
Temperature Element
W2 To change the spring return direction to CW, mount FEC/IOM To change the spring return direction to CW, mount FEC/IOM
0-10V 2-10V
0-20mA 4-20 mA the actuator to the damper shaft so that Side B of the the actuator to the damper shaft so that Side B of the
actuator is away from the damper. With power actuator is away from the damper. With power
W3 applied, the actuator now drives CCW from the 0° applied, the actuator now drives CCW from the 0°
VDC mA position, and spring returns CW. position, and spring returns CW.

DETAIL S1 Supply Fan Starter Wiring Diagram DETAIL F301 BINARY INPUT (DRY CONTACT) DETAIL NS101 NET STAT WITH PHONE JACK DETAIL F502 24 VAC BINARY OUTPUT
THERMOSTAT CIRCUIT BOARD
FIXED ADDRESS=199 (Switch High, EXT Sourced)
J1 CABLE WITH AN RJ-12 CONNECTOR
ON EACH END FIELD
J2 DEVICE
H 120 VAC N FIELD DEVICE OCOM#

SDR-1 H
O
A M1 OL’S 1 6 1 6 H OUT#
ICOM# JACK J2 IS FOR 1 1
IN#
COMMISIONING TOOLS. J1 2 2 N 24V Com
3 3 24V Hot
SF-C
SF-S DRY CONTACT FEC/IOM SENSOR 6-Pin 4 4 CONTROLLER OUT#
INT
(N.O. or N.C. as required) Terminal 1 is to the
extreme left as you PHONE PLUG 5 5 SENSOR PLUG FEC/IOM
face the Jack
opening, Tab Notch
(JACK J1) 6 6
down. EXT
TRIAC JUMPER

H 24 VAC N

WIRE IN FIRE ALARM

SHUTDOWN HERE IF Drawing Title
REQUIRED LT-A SDR-1 IN CONSIDERATION OF THE RECEIPT OF
THIS DOCUMENT, THE RECIPIENT AGREES
NOT TO REPRODUCE, COPY, USE OR AHU-BACnet Details.vsd
TRANSMIT THIS DOCUMENT AND/OR THE
REFERENCE DRAWING NO. REVISION-LOCATION ECN DATE BY
INFORMATION THEREIN CONTAINED, IN
Sales Engineer Project Manager Application Engineer DRAWN APPROVED
WHOLE OR IN PART, OR TO SUFFER SUCH
BY DATE BY DATE
ACTION BY OTHERS, FOR ANY PURPOSE,
Branch Information CONTRACT NUMBER
EXCEPT WITH THE ADVANCE WRITTEN Project Title
PERMISSION OF JOHNSON CONTROLS,
INC. AND FURTHER AGREES TO FAN 55.510 Electrical Installer 1234-5678
SURRENDER SAME TO JOHNSON Guide DRAWING NUMBER
CONTROLS, INC. UPON DEMAND.

COPYRIGHT JOHNSON CONTROLS, INC. 2007 2.2 21224

 BILL OF MATERIAL
TX-1

FIELD MOUNTED TRANSFORMER TAG QTY PART DESCRIPTION

MAXIMUM NUMBER OF BOXES FIELD DEVICES:
PER CIRCUIT TX-1 2 PSH500A RIB 500VA 120/24VAC PWR
100VA - 6 BOXES DA-T DA-T 40 TE-631GV-2 NICKEL DUCT PROB,4 INCHES
75VA - 5 BOXES VMA 40 MS-VMA1620-0 VAV CTRL/ACT/DP.HTG.FAN
50VA - 3 BOXES Discharge Air ZN-T, WC-ADJ 40 NS-BTP7001-0 TE, W/C, OCC, PJ
H
40VA - 2 BOXES from
PSH500A – PROVIDES 5-100VA C
CIRCUITS
Air Handling Unit NC
DA-VP VMA

ZN-T
RETURN SEE HEATING
WC-ADJ
VALVE DETAILS
SUPPLY BELOW

H H H
3 WAY 3 WAY
C COIL-A C COIL-B C

HTG-O HTG-O 2 WAY

HTG-O
A C RETURN A C RETURN

B RETURN
B
SUPPLY SUPPLY
SUPPLY
PIPING DETAILS SHOWN FOR VALVE CONFIGURATIONS:
SEE THE VALVE SCHEDULE FOR THE SPECIFIC CONFIGURATION
SEE THE WIRING DETAIL BELOW FOR TERMINATIONS FOR SPECIFIC APPLICATION

HI
(Red)

LO
PNEUMATIC TUBING
(DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE) DISCHARGE AIR TEMP SENSOR: A DISCHARGE AIR TEMP SENSOR IS PROVIDED ON EACH BOX FOR
DA-VP MONITORING PURPOSES.
TERMINATIONS FOR TERMINATIONS FOR
2 WAY / 3 WAY COIL-B 3 WAY COIL-A VALVE
VALVE CONFIGURATIONS CONFIGURATION OCCUPIED MODE: WHEN THE ZONE TEMPERATURE IS BETWEEN THE OCCUPIED HEATING AND COOLING
DA-T
SETPOINTS (INSIDE OF THE BIAS), THE PRIMARY AIR DAMPER WILL BE AT THE MINIMUM CFM AND THE
UNIVERSAL

HTG-O HTG-O
+15
IN
OUT1 COM COM REHEAT VALVE WILL BE FULLY CLOSED. ON A RISE IN ZONE TEMPERATURE ABOVE THE COOLING
ICOM
MANUAL OCOM1 CW CW SETPOINT, THE PRIMARY AIR DAMPER WILL INCREASE THE CFM AND THE REHEAT VALVE REMAINS FULLY
BINARY

OVERRIDE OUT2 CCW CCW

CLOSED. ON A DROP IN ZONE TEMPERATURE BELOW THE HEATING SETPOINT, THE REHEAT VALVE
128 OCOM2 MODULATES OPEN AND THE DAMPER IS CONTROLLED TO PROVIDE A MINIMUM CFM.
64 OUT3
32
OCOM3
16 UNOCCUPIED (NIGHT SETBACK) MODE: WHEN THE AIR HANDLING UNIT SHUTS DOWN, ALL BOX
8
4 CONTROLLERS ARE INDEXED TO UNOCCUPIED MODE. WHEN THE ZONE TEMPERATURE IS BETWEEN THE
PLUG 2 Address: UNOCCUPIED HEATING AND COOLING SETPOINTS (INSIDE OF THE BIAS), THE PRIMARY AIR DAMPER WILL BE
1
CONFIGURABLE

INTO VMA See Room Schedule AT THE MINIMUM CFM, AND THE REHEAT VALVE WILL BE FULLY CLOSED. ON A RISE IN ZONE TEMPERATURE
ON OUT4
SENSOR
SENSOR

ZONE SENSOR ZN-T ABOVE THE UNOCCUPIED COOLING SETPOINT, THE PRIMARY AIR DAMPER WILL INCREASE THE CFM (IF
PORT OCOM4
CONNECTOR ON BACK
OF THERMOSTAT
RJ12
OUT5 AVAILABLE), AND THE REHEAT VALVE REMAINS FULLY CLOSED. ON A DROP IN ZONE TEMPERATURE BELOW
OCOM5 THE UNOCCUPIED HEATING SETPOINT, THE REHEAT VALVE MODULATES OPEN, AND THE DAMPER IS
SA PWR
CONTROLLED TO PROVIDE A MINIMUM CFM.
SA BUS

COM
IF THIS IS THE LAST DEVICE
-
ON THE TRUNK TERMINATE
THE END OF LINE BY + FOR BOX PARAMETERS AND SETTINGS SEE THE
SWITCHING THIS SWITCH ON. IN FC EOL HOT 480/277/240/
ROOM SCHEDULE
24~

SHLD 208/120/24/
FC BUS

COM COM 24VAC

FROM LAST
MS/TP - GROUND
DEVICE
+ WHERE 2 OR MORE DEVICES
SHARE A SINGLE
TRANSFORMER, MAINTAIN Drawing Title
TO NEXT IN CONSIDERATION OF THE RECEIPT OF
MS/TP POLARITY (COM TO COM)
DEVICE THIS DOCUMENT, THE RECIPIENT AGREES
BETWEEN DEVICES
NOT TO REPRODUCE, COPY, USE OR VAV-BACnet Flow.vsd
TRANSMIT THIS DOCUMENT AND/OR THE
REFERENCE DRAWING NO. REVISION-LOCATION ECN DATE BY
INFORMATION THEREIN CONTAINED, IN
Sales Engineer Project Manager Application Engineer DRAWN APPROVED
WHOLE OR IN PART, OR TO SUFFER SUCH
BY DATE BY DATE
ACTION BY OTHERS, FOR ANY PURPOSE,
Branch Information CONTRACT NUMBER
EXCEPT WITH THE ADVANCE WRITTEN Project Title
PERMISSION OF JOHNSON CONTROLS,
INC. AND FURTHER AGREES TO FAN 55.510 Electrical Installer 1234-5678
SURRENDER SAME TO JOHNSON Guide DRAWING NUMBER
CONTROLS, INC. UPON DEMAND.

COPYRIGHT JOHNSON CONTROLS, INC. 2007 3.1

25003
 OA-T
BILL OF MATERIAL

LOCATED IN THE SHADE ON THE TAG QTY PART DESCRIPTION

NORTH SIDE OF THE BUILDING FIELD DEVICES:
CH1-EN 1 RH2B-UAC24-L DPDT,10A,HC=24 VAC,
1 SH2B-05 DPDT RELAY BASE FOR RH2B
CHWP1-C, CHWP1-S 1 CSD-SA1E1-1 SLD/ADJ LED 1A W/RLY
CHWP2-C, CHWP2-S 1 CSD-SA1E1-1 SLD/ADJ LED 1A W/RLY
CHWR-T 1 TE-6300W-102 T-WELL 6" SS DIRECT MNT
1 TE-631AM-2 WELL TEMP SEN 6" 1K NI
CHILLER 1 CONTROL CHWS-T 1 TE-6300W-102 T-WELL 6" SS DIRECT MNT
CABINET CHWS-T
1 TE-631AM-2 WELL TEMP SEN 6" 1K NI
OA-T 1 TE-6313P-1 SENSOR,T-NI,0.1%,3IN OAT
PANEL DEVICES:
CHWS PANEL 1 PAKB00001FH0 PANEL FEC 16X20
CH1-EN
COMP
EVAP
CHWP1

CHWR
CHILLER 1
CHWP1-C
CHWP1-S CHWR-T

CHWP2

CHWP2-C
CHWP2-S

VAC
Power
OA-T \ UI IN-1 2/22
OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE
CHWS-T \ UI IN-2 2/22
CHW SUPPLY TEMP
CHWR-T \ UI IN-3 2/22
CHW RETURN TEMP
CHWP1-S \ BI IN-7
2/22
CHW PUMP 1 STATUS
PANEL
CHWP2-S \ BI IN-8
2/22
CHW PUMP 2 STATUS
CH1-EN \ BO OUT-1
2/22
CHILLER 1 ENABLE
CHWP1-C \ BO OUT-2
2/22
CHW PUMP 1 COMMAND
CHILLED WATER PUMP CONTROL: THE CHILLED WATER PUMP WITH THE LOWEST RUNTIME WILL
CHWP2-C \ BO OUT-3 AUTOMATICALLY START WHEN THE OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE RISES ABOVE THE SYSTEM ENABLE
2/22
CHW PUMP 2 COMMAND SETPOINT. WHEN THE OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE FALLS BELOW THIS SETPOINT, THE CHILLED WATER
BAC 3/22 PUMPS WILL TURN OFF. WHEN ENABLED, THE LEAD PUMP WILL START AND RUN CONTINUOUSLY. IF FOR
TO NEXT BACNET DEVICE BLU ANY REASON ITS STATUS DOES NOT MATCH ITS COMMANDED VALUE AN ALARM WILL BE GENERATED. THE
3/22 LAG PUMP WILL START IF THE LEAD PUMP IS IN ALARM.
FROM LAST BACNET DEVICE BAC BLU
CHILLER CONTROL: THE CHILLER WILL BE ENABLED WHEN THE CHILLED WATER PUMP HAS A STATUS OF
ON. THE CHILLER VIA ITS INTERNAL CONTROLS WILL MAINTAIN THE CHILLED WATER SUPPLY
TEMPERATURE AT SETPOINT. IF THE CHILLED WATER SUPPLY TEMPERATURE RISES ABOVE THE HIGH LIMIT
SETPOINT AFTER OPERATING FOR A PERIOD OF TIME, AN ALARM WILL BE GENERATED.

Drawing Title
IN CONSIDERATION OF THE RECEIPT OF
THIS DOCUMENT, THE RECIPIENT AGREES
NOT TO REPRODUCE, COPY, USE OR CHWS-BACnet Flow.vsd
TRANSMIT THIS DOCUMENT AND/OR THE
REFERENCE DRAWING NO. REVISION-LOCATION ECN DATE BY
INFORMATION THEREIN CONTAINED, IN
Sales Engineer Project Manager Application Engineer DRAWN APPROVED
WHOLE OR IN PART, OR TO SUFFER SUCH
BY DATE BY DATE
ACTION BY OTHERS, FOR ANY PURPOSE,
Branch Information CONTRACT NUMBER
EXCEPT WITH THE ADVANCE WRITTEN Project Title
PERMISSION OF JOHNSON CONTROLS,
INC. AND FURTHER AGREES TO FAN 55.510 Electrical Installer 1234-5678
SURRENDER SAME TO JOHNSON Guide DRAWING NUMBER
CONTROLS, INC. UPON DEMAND.

COPYRIGHT JOHNSON CONTROLS, INC. 2007 4.1

28101
Electrician/Fitter Point Information Controller Information f Intermediate Device Field Device
Cable Ref
Controller Trunk Trunk Trunk Wiring Wiring
Point Type Object Name Expanded ID Destination Termination Out Termination In Device Termination Out Termination In Device Location Detail Comment
Details Type Nbr Addr. /Tubing /Tubing
Tag Bay/Terminal Shape
FEC 26xx Power to Controller
FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 4 BacNet FC Bus
UI IN-1 OA-T Outdoor Air Temperature FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 4 UI IN-1 IN1, ICOM1 2/22 2-Wire TE F131
UI IN-2 CHWS-T CHW Supply Temp FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 4 UI IN-2 IN2, ICOM2 2/22 2-Wire TE F131
UI IN-3 CHWR-T CHW Return Temp FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 4 UI IN-3 IN3, ICOM3 2/22 2-Wire TE F131
UI IN-4 FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 4 UI IN-4
UI IN-5 FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 4 UI IN-5
UI IN-6 FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 4 UI IN-6
BI IN-7 CHWP1-S CHW Pump 1 Status FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 4 BI IN-7 IN7, ICOM7 2/22 OUT, COM Current Relay Motor Lead Motor Lead See wiring detail Motor Status (Contact) F301
BI IN-8 CHWP2-S CHW Pump 2 Status FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 4 BI IN-8 IN8, ICOM8 2/22 OUT, COM Current Relay Motor Lead Motor Lead See wiring detail Motor Status (Contact) F301
BO OUT-1 CH1-EN Chiller 1 Enable FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 4 BO OUT-1 OUT1, 24V COM 2/22 COIL (13,14) IDEC Relay COM, NO (9,5) 2/14 See wiring detail Control Panel (NO) (Sw Hi, EXT SourcF502
BO OUT-2 CHWP1-C CHW Pump 1 Command FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 4 BO OUT-2 OUT2, 24V COM 2/22 COIL (24V, Com) Current Relay COM, NO 2/14 See wiring detail Starter (NO) (Sw Hi, EXT Source) F502
BO OUT-3 CHWP2-C CHW Pump 2 Command FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 4 BO OUT-3 OUT3, 24V COM 2/22 COIL (24V, Com) Current Relay COM, NO 2/14 See wiring detail Starter (NO) (Sw Hi, EXT Source) F502
CO OUT-4 FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 4 CO OUT-4
CO OUT-5 FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 4 CO OUT-5
CO OUT-6 FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 4 CO OUT-6
CO OUT-7 FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 4 CO OUT-7
AO OUT-8 FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 4 AO OUT-8
AO OUT-9 FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 4 AO OUT-9

DETAIL S46 One Air Cooled Chiller Wiring Detail DETAIL S43 Chill Water Pump 1 Starter DETAIL F131 TEMPERATURE SENSOR INPUT DETAIL F502 24 VAC BINARY OUTPUT
Wiring Diagram (Switch High, EXT Sourced)
Chiller 1 Wiring Detail
FIELD
CHILLER CONTROL CABINET H 120 VAC N DEVICE OCOM#
O M1 OL’S IN#
CH1-EN H A H OUT#
ICOM#
START/STOP N 24V Com
COMMAND
CHWP1-C RTD FEC/IOM 24V Hot
CHWP1-S Temperature Element OUT#
INT
FEC/IOM
EXT
TRIAC JUMPER

DETAIL S44 Chill Water Pump 2 Starter DETAIL F301 BINARY INPUT (DRY CONTACT)
Wiring Diagram

H 120 VAC N
FIELD DEVICE
O M1 OL’S
H A
ICOM#

IN#
CHWP2-C
CHWP2-S DRY CONTACT FEC/IOM
(N.O. or N.C. as required)

Drawing Title
IN CONSIDERATION OF THE RECEIPT OF
THIS DOCUMENT, THE RECIPIENT AGREES
NOT TO REPRODUCE, COPY, USE OR CHWS-BACnet Details.vsd
TRANSMIT THIS DOCUMENT AND/OR THE
REFERENCE DRAWING NO. REVISION-LOCATION ECN DATE BY
INFORMATION THEREIN CONTAINED, IN
Sales Engineer Project Manager Application Engineer DRAWN APPROVED
WHOLE OR IN PART, OR TO SUFFER SUCH
BY DATE BY DATE
ACTION BY OTHERS, FOR ANY PURPOSE,
Branch Information CONTRACT NUMBER
EXCEPT WITH THE ADVANCE WRITTEN Project Title
PERMISSION OF JOHNSON CONTROLS,
INC. AND FURTHER AGREES TO FAN 55.510 Electrical Installer 1234-5678
SURRENDER SAME TO JOHNSON Guide DRAWING NUMBER
CONTROLS, INC. UPON DEMAND.

COPYRIGHT JOHNSON CONTROLS, INC. 2007 4.2

28101
 INTERLOCK WITH
BOILER AS REQUIRED
BY BOILER MFR
CD-C BILL OF MATERIAL

OA TAG QTY PART DESCRIPTION

FIELD DEVICES:
NC
BLR1-A 1 RIBU1C SPDT,10A,HC=10-30 VAC/DC,W/LED
BLR1-C 1 RIBU1C SPDT,10A,HC=10-30 VAC/DC,W/LED
CD-C, CD-S 1 M9210-BGC-3 DAMPER ACTUATOR 10 NM SR
HWP2-C HWP1-C, HWP1-S 1 CSD-SA1E1-1 SLD/ADJ LED 1A W/RLY
HWP2-S HWP2-C, HWP2-S 1 CSD-SA1E1-1 SLD/ADJ LED 1A W/RLY
OA-T
HWR-T 1 TE-6300W-102 T-WELL 6" SS DIRECT MNT
1 TE-631AM-2 WELL TEMP SEN 6" 1K NI
HWP2
HWS-T 1 TE-6300W-102 T-WELL 6" SS DIRECT MNT
LOCATED IN THE SHADE ON THE 1 TE-631AM-2 WELL TEMP SEN 6" 1K NI
NORTH SIDE OF THE BUILDING OA-T 1 TE-6313P-1 SENSOR,T-NI,0.1%,3IN OAT
R-1 1 RIBU1C 10AMP SPDT 10-30VAC/DC/120VAC
HWP1-C R-2 1 RIBU1C 10AMP SPDT 10-30VAC/DC/120VAC
HWP1-S PANEL DEVICES:
BOILER 1 CONTROL CABINET HWS-T PANEL 1 PAKB00001FH0 PANEL FEC 16X20
HWP1
HWS
BLR1-A BLR1-C

HWR
BOILER 1

HWR-T

OA-T \ UI IN-1 2/22 VAC

OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE Power
HWS-T \ UI IN-2 2/22
HW SUPPLY TEMP
HWR-T \ UI IN-3 2/22
HW RETURN TEMP
BLR1-A \ UI IN-4
2/22
BOILER 1 ALARM
HWP1-S \ BI IN-7
2/22
HW PUMP 1 STATUS
HWP2-S \ BI IN-8 PANEL
2/22
HW PUMP 2 STATUS
BLR1-C \ BO OUT-1
2/22
HOT WATER PUMP CONTROL: THE HOT WATER PUMP WITH THE LOWEST RUNTIME WILL AUTOMATICALLY
BOILER 1 COMMAND START WHEN THE OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE FALLS BELOW THE SYSTEM ENABLE SETPOINT. WHEN THE
HWP1-C \ BO OUT-2
2/22 OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE RISES ABOVE THIS SETPOINT, THE HOT WATER PUMPS WILL TURN OFF. WHEN
HW PUMP 1 COMMAND
ENABLED, THE LEAD PUMP WILL START AND RUN CONTINUOUSLY. IF FOR ANY REASON ITS STATUS DOES
HWP2-C \ BO OUT-3 NOT MATCH ITS COMMANDED VALUE AN ALARM WILL BE GENERATED. THE LAG PUMP WILL START IF THE
2/22
HW PUMP 2 COMMAND
LEAD PUMP IS IN ALARM. WHENEVER THE SYSTEM IS COMMANDED OFF, THE LEAD HOT WATER PUMP WILL
3/22
TO NEXT BACNET DEVICE BAC BLU RUN FOR A PERIOD OF TIME TO DISPATE THE HEAT IN THE SYSTEM.

BAC 3/22
FROM LAST BACNET DEVICE BLU BOILER CONTROL: THE BOILER CONTROL SEQUENCE WILL BEGIN WHEN ONE OF THE HOT WATER PUMPS
HAS A STATUS OF ON. WHEN A BOILER ENABLE COMMAND IS SENT, THE COMBUSTION DAMPERS SHALL
OPEN AND THE BOILER WILL FIRE. THE BOILER WILL CYCLE TO MAINTAIN THE HOT WATER RETURN
TEMPERATURE AT A SETPOINT AND IS RESET INVERSLY TO THE OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE. THE BOILERS
SAFETIES CIRCUIT WILL BE MONITORED AND THE SYSTEM WILL REPORT A GENERAL ALARM CONDITION IF A
SAFETY IS TRIPPED. A MANUAL RESET OF THE BOILER SAFETY WILL BE REQUIRED BEFORE THE BOILER
CAN BE RESTARTED.

Drawing Title
IN CONSIDERATION OF THE RECEIPT OF
THIS DOCUMENT, THE RECIPIENT AGREES
NOT TO REPRODUCE, COPY, USE OR HWS-BACnet Flow.vsd
TRANSMIT THIS DOCUMENT AND/OR THE
REFERENCE DRAWING NO. REVISION-LOCATION ECN DATE BY
INFORMATION THEREIN CONTAINED, IN
Sales Engineer Project Manager Application Engineer DRAWN APPROVED
WHOLE OR IN PART, OR TO SUFFER SUCH
BY DATE BY DATE
ACTION BY OTHERS, FOR ANY PURPOSE,
Branch Information CONTRACT NUMBER
EXCEPT WITH THE ADVANCE WRITTEN Project Title
PERMISSION OF JOHNSON CONTROLS,
INC. AND FURTHER AGREES TO FAN 55.510 Electrical Installer 1234-5678
SURRENDER SAME TO JOHNSON Guide DRAWING NUMBER
CONTROLS, INC. UPON DEMAND.

COPYRIGHT JOHNSON CONTROLS, INC. 2007 5.1

28001
Electrician/Fitter Point Information Controller Information f Intermediate Device Field Device
Cable Ref
Controller Trunk Trunk Trunk Module Wiring Wiring
Point Type Object Name Expanded ID Destination Termination Out Termination In Device Termination Out Termination In Device Location Detail Comment
Details Type Nbr Addr. Type /Tubing /Tubing
Tag Bay/Terminal Shape
FEC 26xx Power to Controller
FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 5 BacNet FC Bus
UI IN-1 OA-T Outdoor Air Temperature FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 5 UI IN-1 IN1, ICOM1 2/22 2-Wire TE F131
UI IN-2 HWS-T HW Supply Temp FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 5 UI IN-2 IN2, ICOM2 2/22 2-Wire TE F131
UI IN-3 HWR-T HW Return Temp FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 5 UI IN-3 IN3, ICOM3 2/22 2-Wire TE F131
UI IN-4 BLR1-A Boiler 1 Alarm FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 5 UI IN-4 IN4, ICOM4 2/22 COM, NO (Yel, Org) RIB Relay COIL (Confirm Voltage) 2/14 See wiring detail Status (NO) F301
UI IN-5 FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 5 UI IN-5
UI IN-6 FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 5 UI IN-6
BI IN-7 HWP1-S HW Pump 1 Status FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 5 BI IN-7 IN7, ICOM7 2/22 OUT, COM Current Relay Motor Lead Motor Lead See wiring detail Motor Status (Contact) F301
BI IN-8 HWP2-S HW Pump 2 Status FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 5 BI IN-8 IN8, ICOM8 2/22 OUT, COM Current Relay Motor Lead Motor Lead See wiring detail Motor Status (Contact) F301
BO OUT-1 BLR1-C Boiler 1 Command FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 5 BO OUT-1 OUT1, 24V COM 2/22 COIL (Wh/Yel,Wh/Blue) RIB Relay COM, NO (Yel, Org) 2/14 See wiring detail Control Panel (NO) (Sw Hi, EXT SourcF502
BO OUT-2 HWP1-C HW Pump 1 Command FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 5 BO OUT-2 OUT2, 24V COM 2/22 COIL (24V, Com) Current Relay COM, NO 2/14 See wiring detail Starter (NO) (Sw Hi, EXT Source) F502
BO OUT-3 HWP2-C HW Pump 2 Command FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 5 BO OUT-3 OUT3, 24V COM 2/22 COIL (24V, Com) Current Relay COM, NO 2/14 See wiring detail Starter (NO) (Sw Hi, EXT Source) F502
CO OUT-4 FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 5 CO OUT-4
CO OUT-5 FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 5 CO OUT-5
CO OUT-6 FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 5 CO OUT-6
CO OUT-7 FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 5 CO OUT-7
AO OUT-8 FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 5 AO OUT-8
AO OUT-9 FEC 26xx MS/TP 1 5 AO OUT-9

DETAIL S33 One Boiler (On/Off or Modulating) Wiring Details DETAIL S35 Hot Water Pump 1 Starter DETAIL F131 TEMPERATURE SENSOR INPUT DETAIL F502 24 VAC BINARY OUTPUT
Wiring Diagram (Switch High, EXT Sourced)
FIELD
H 120 VAC N DEVICE OCOM#
BOILER 1 CONTROL PANEL
Relay Relay O M1 OL’S IN#
H A H OUT#
Coil Contact
BOILER 1 ICOM#
N 24V Com
COMMAND START/STOP
HWP1-C RTD FEC/IOM 24V Hot
HWP1-S Temperature Element OUT#
BOILER 1 INT
FIRE RATE
- BURNER INPUT FEC/IOM
+ 0-10v
(IF USED)
EXT
TRIAC JUMPER
BOILER 1
ALARM
ALARM OUTPUT DETAIL S36 Hot Water Pump 2 Starter DETAIL F301 BINARY INPUT (DRY CONTACT)
Wiring Diagram
STATUS
24VAC HOT
H 120 VAC N
FIELD DEVICE
CD-C O M1 OL’S
H A
24VAC COM ICOM#

IN#
Combustion Air Damper Wiring HWP2-C
HWP2-S DRY CONTACT FEC/IOM
(N.O. or N.C. as required)

Drawing Title
IN CONSIDERATION OF THE RECEIPT OF
THIS DOCUMENT, THE RECIPIENT AGREES
NOT TO REPRODUCE, COPY, USE OR HWS-BACnet Details.vsd
TRANSMIT THIS DOCUMENT AND/OR THE
REFERENCE DRAWING NO. REVISION-LOCATION ECN DATE BY
INFORMATION THEREIN CONTAINED, IN
Sales Engineer Project Manager Application Engineer DRAWN APPROVED
WHOLE OR IN PART, OR TO SUFFER SUCH
BY DATE BY DATE
ACTION BY OTHERS, FOR ANY PURPOSE,
Branch Information CONTRACT NUMBER
EXCEPT WITH THE ADVANCE WRITTEN Project Title
PERMISSION OF JOHNSON CONTROLS,
INC. AND FURTHER AGREES TO FAN 55.510 Electrical Installer 1234-5678
SURRENDER SAME TO JOHNSON Guide DRAWING NUMBER
CONTROLS, INC. UPON DEMAND.

COPYRIGHT JOHNSON CONTROLS, INC. 2007 5.2

28001
Box Location Controller Information Reheat Valve Box Information

Room Controller Box Config

Required Required

System Mfgr JCI Ctrl Inlet Inlet Clg Clg

System Mech. Serving Box Box Dwg NC/ NAE Trunk Device PAN CSModel or Box Supplemental Size Area K Min Max
Bldg./Flr. No. Name Name Dwg. this Box Mfgr. Type No. Controller Part No. Addr ID Addr Offset Template Heat Heat Device Code Config File Name (Inches) (Sq. Ft.) Factor Flow Flow
1st FLOOR 135 Scanning VAV-1-1 M1.01 AHU-1 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 7 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-7.caf 10 0.55 1.78 270 1360
1st FLOOR 136 Mail Processing VAV-1-2 M1.01 AHU-1 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 8 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-8.caf 10 0.55 1.78 120 600
1st FLOOR 137 Outgoing Storage VAV-1-3 M1.01 AHU-1 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 9 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-9.caf 14 1.07 1.5 340 1715
1st FLOOR 133 Corridor VAV-1-4 M1.01 AHU-1 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 10 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-10.caf 8 0.35 1.87 180 915
1st FLOOR 138 Promo Storage VAV-1-5 M1.01 AHU-1 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 11 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-11.caf 10 0.55 1.78 260 1320
1st FLOOR 139 Break RM VAV-1-6 M1.01 AHU-1 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 12 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-12.caf 10 0.55 1.78 150 765
1st FLOOR 140 Nurse HR VAV-1-7 M1.01 AHU-1 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 13 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-13.caf 8 0.35 1.87 150 730
1st FLOOR 144 Mail Room VAV-1-8 M1.01 AHU-2 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 14 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-14.caf 14 1.07 1.5 320 1590
1st FLOOR 133 Corridor VAV-1-9 M1.01 AHU-2 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 15 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-15.caf 8 0.35 1.87 120 585
1st FLOOR 145 Ikon Printing VAV-1-10 M1.01 AHU-2 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 16 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-16.caf 12 0.79 1.67 320 1600
1st FLOOR 145 Ikon Printing VAV-1-11 M1.01 AHU-2 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 17 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-17.caf 16 1.4 1.5 580 2910
1st FLOOR 146 Inserting VAV-1-12 M1.01 AHU-2 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 18 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-18.caf 16 1.4 1.5 560 2800
1st FLOOR 148 Secured Checks VAV-1-13 M1.01 AHU-2 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 19 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-19.caf 6 0.2 1.97 50 265
1st FLOOR 127 Corridor VAV-1-14 M1.01 AHU-2 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 20 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-20.caf 8 0.35 1.87 100 515
1st FLOOR 126 MTG Room VAV-1-15 M1.01 AHU-2 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 21 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-21.caf 10 0.55 1.78 190 925
1st FLOOR 123 Training Room VAV-1-16 M1.01 AHU-2 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 22 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-22.caf 6 0.2 1.97 60 320
1st FLOOR 122 Training Room VAV-1-17 M1.01 AHU-2 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 23 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-23.caf 10 0.55 1.78 220 1100
1st FLOOR 121 Auditorium VAV-1-18 M1.01 AHU-2 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 24 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-24.caf 14 1.07 1.5 400 1980
1st FLOOR 120 Auditorium VAV-1-19 M1.01 AHU-2 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 25 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-25.caf 16 1.4 1.5 520 2600
1st FLOOR 102 Reception VAV-1-20 M1.01 AHU-1 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 26 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-26.caf 10 0.55 1.78 60 300
2nd FLOOR 215 Open Office VAV-2-1 M1.02 AHU-1 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 27 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-27.caf 14 1.07 1.5 330 1670
2nd FLOOR 215 Open Office VAV-2-2 M1.02 AHU-1 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 28 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-28.caf 10 0.55 1.78 260 1300
2nd FLOOR 220 Copy VAV-2-3 M1.02 AHU-1 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 29 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-29.caf 16 1.4 1.5 500 2490
2nd FLOOR 215 Open Office VAV-2-4 M1.02 AHU-1 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 30 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-30.caf 16 1.4 1.5 660 3320
2nd FLOOR 215 Open Office VAV-2-5 M1.02 AHU-1 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 31 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-31.caf 14 1.07 1.5 240 1220
2nd FLOOR 219 Training Room VAV-2-6 M1.02 AHU-1 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 32 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-32.caf 12 0.79 1.67 250 1250
2nd FLOOR 218 Training Room VAV-2-7 M1.02 AHU-1 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 33 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-33.caf 8 0.35 1.87 80 420
2nd FLOOR 215 Open Office VAV-2-8 M1.02 AHU-2 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 34 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-34.caf 8 0.35 1.87 60 300
2nd FLOOR 215 Open Office VAV-2-9 M1.02 AHU-2 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 35 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-35.caf 10 0.55 1.78 200 1000
2nd FLOOR 215 Open Office VAV-2-10 M1.02 AHU-2 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 36 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-36.caf 16 1.4 1.5 500 2520
2nd FLOOR 215 Open Office VAV-2-11 M1.02 AHU-2 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 37 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-37.caf 8 0.35 1.87 90 440
2nd FLOOR 215 Open Office VAV-2-12 M1.02 AHU-2 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 38 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-38.caf 8 0.35 1.87 90 440
2nd FLOOR 214 Conf VAV-2-13 M1.02 AHU-2 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 39 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-39.caf 12 0.79 1.67 290 1460
2nd FLOOR 223 Conf VAV-2-14 M1.02 AHU-2 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 40 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-40.caf 10 0.55 1.78 210 1035
2nd FLOOR 226 Office VAV-2-15 M1.02 AHU-2 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 41 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-41.caf 14 1.07 1.5 480 2400
2nd FLOOR 213 Copy VAV-2-16 M1.02 AHU-2 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 42 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-42.caf 10 0.55 1.78 190 960
2nd FLOOR 201 Open Office VAV-2-17 M1.02 AHU-2 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 43 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-43.caf 10 0.55 1.78 260 1305
2nd FLOOR 201 Open Office VAV-2-18 M1.02 AHU-2 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 44 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-44.caf 10 0.55 1.78 150 750
2nd FLOOR 201 Open Office VAV-2-19 M1.02 AHU-2 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 45 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-45.caf 10 0.55 1.78 200 1000
2nd FLOOR 227 Office VAV-2-20 M1.02 AHU-2 Titus ESV 3.1 MS-VMA1620-0 NAE1 1 46 25003 Yes No NS-BTP7001-0 VMA-NAE1-1-46.caf 10 0.55 1.78 150 760

Drawing Title

Room Schedule.vsd
REFERENCE DRAWING NO. REVISION-LOCATION ECN DATE BY
Sales Engineer Project Manager Application Engineer DRAWN APPROVED
BY DATE BY DATE
Branch Information CONTRACT NUMBER
Project Title

FAN 55.510 Electrical Installer 1234-5678

Guide DRAWING NUMBER

6.1
CD SLEEVE PAGE

Directions to printer:

Remove this page and insert a CD Sleeve page with a CD containing the following files:

1. Folder titled “Bus Checkout Tools”

a. “55.510 - Appendix C - CD - LIT-MS-CQT485_Manual.pdf”
b. “55.510 - Appendix C - CD - Metasys Checkout Guide v8.pdf”
2. Folder titled “Communication Literature”
a. 55.510 - Appendix C - CD - LIT-12011034_MSTPCommunications.pdf
b. 55.510 - Appendix C - CD - LIT-636018_N2Communications.pdf
c. 55.510 - Appendix C - CD - LIT-1162150_LONWorks_NetwokLayout.pdf
d. 55.510 - Appendix C - CD - LIT-TD-2029-Official version of LonWiring
document.pdf
3. Folder titled “Sample Drawings
a. “55.510 - Appendix C - CD - Sample Control Drawings.pdf”
b. “55.510 - Appendix C - CD - Sample York Drawings.pdf”
TAB PAGE

Directions to printer:

Remove this page and create a Tab titled, “Appendix D: Sample

Installation Instruction Sheets”
This page is intentionally blank.
 Functional Devices, Inc. Office 765.883.5538
310 South Union Street Sales 800.888.5538
Russiaville, IN 46979 Fax 765.883.7505
www.FunctionalDevices.com Email sales@FunctionalDevices.com

AC Power Supply

Shown Class 2 PSH500A PSMN500A

Enclosed 500VA Power Supply with Five 100VA Sub-Panel Mounted 500VA Power Supply with
With
Cover
Class 2 Outputs, 480/277/240/120 Vac to 24 Vac Five 100VA Class 2 Outputs, 480/277/240/120 Vac
to 24 Vac
11.400˝

480
Shown
277
Without
240
Cover
120
COM

ON 24V

USER CONNECTIONS
OFF
1 11.330˝
COM
ON 24V
OFF 2
COM
ON 24V
OFF 3
COM
ON 24V
OFF 4
COM
ON 24V
OFF 5
COM

SWITCH

INDICATOR
BREAKER

SPECIFICATIONS
Transformer: One (1) 500 VA 5 Secondaries: Standby Wattage:
Over Current Protection: Circuit Breaker 24 Vac, with LED Indicators 48.515 W @ 120 Vac
Primary: 480/277/240/120 Vac 48.699 W @ 240 Vac
Frequency: 50/60 Hz 24 Vac ON/OFF: 49.564 W @ 277 Vac
Dimensions: 12.125˝ x 12.125˝ x 6.000˝ (PSH500A) On / Off Switch & Breaker 48.255 W @ 480 Vac
11.330˝ x 11.400˝ x 5.000˝ (PSMN500A)
Approvals: Class 2 UL Listed, UL916, UL508, C-UL, Input: Full Load Primary Current:
CE, RoHS 480/277/240/120 Vac Finger-Safe Terminals, 10-26 AWG 4.66 A @ 120 Vac
Sub-Panel: Plenum Rated Polymetal Sub-Panel 2.41 A @ 240 Vac
Housing: NEMA1 Metal Enclosure Output: 2.06 A @ 277 Vac
Weight: 30.16 lbs. (PSH500A) 5 Isolated 100 VA Class 2 24 Vac Terminals, 12-26 AWG 1.17 A @ 480 Vac
20.60 lbs. (PSMN500A)
Notes: Ambient Temperature Derating:
» To order UL508, add “-IC” to end of model number. 4A up to 40˚ C ; 3A up to 50˚ C ; 2A up to 55˚ C
(When All 5 Outputs Operated Simultaneously)

Great for VAV Applications

 Code No. LIT-1927140
Issued February 1, 2009

A70 Series
Four-Wire, Two-Circuit Temperature Control
Description A70 Series
The A70 Series temperature control
incorporates a vapor-charged sensing L ine 2
element. The A70G, A70H, and A70K have a
4-wire, 2-circuit contact block that contains
two isolated sets of contacts. M2
The contacts are designed so that when the
main contact opens, the auxiliary contact
closes. M1

Features L ine 1

a70s.eps
• long-life, snap-acting contacts
Action on Increase
• automatic or manual reset models on Temperature
Applications A70 Series Action Diagram A70GA-1
Typical applications include energizing an
indicator light after a low temperature cutout on
a ventilating system.

Selection Charts
A70 Series Four-Wire, Two-Circuit Temperature Control
Code Switch Action Range Diff Bulb and Max Bulb Range
Number Main Contacts Auxiliary Contacts °F (°C) F° (C°) Capillary Temp °F (°C) Adjuster

A70GA-1C1 15 to 55 5 (2.8) 20 ft of 1/8 in. 400 (204.4)

(-9.4 to 12.8) O.D. Tubing
A70GA-2C 35 to 80 3 to 30 3/8 in. x 3 in. 250 (121)
(1.7 to 26.7) (-16.1 to -1.1), 6 ft Cap.
factory set at 12 (-11.1)
A70HA-1C1 Open Low Close Low 15 to 55 20 ft of 1/8 in. 400 (204.4)
(-9.4 to 12.8) O.D. Tubing Screwdriver
slot
A70HA-2C 35 to 80 3/8 in. x 3 in. 250 (121)
(1.7 to 26.7) 6 ft Cap.
Manual reset
A70HA-14C 15 to 55 20 ft of 1/8 in. 400 (204.4)
(-9.4 to 12.8) O.D. Tubing
A70KA-1C Open High Close High 100 to 170 3/8 in. x 3 in. 240 (116)
(37.8 to 76.7) 6 ft Cap.
1. On these models, the low cutout stop is set and sealed at 35°F (1.6°C). It cannot be set lower. The control responds only to the lowest temperature
along any 14 to 16 in. section of the entire 20 ft element.

Replacement Covers
Code Number Description
CVR17A-620R Automatic reset cover
CVR17A-621R Manual reset cover

Technical Specifications
Electrical Ratings
Pole Number LINE-M2 (Main) LINE-M1 (Auxiliary)
Motor Ratings VAC 120 208 240 277 4801 600 1 120 208 240 277
AC Full Load A 16.0 9.2 8.0 — 5.0 4.8 6.0 3.4 3.0 —
AC Locked Rotor A 96.0 55.2 48.0 — 30.0 28.8 36.0 20.4 18.0 —
AC Non-Inductive A 16.0 9.2 8.0 7.2 — — 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0
Pilot Duty – Both Poles 125 VA, 120 to 600 VAC and 57.5 VA, 120 to 300 VDC
1. Not compressor motor loads.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.
Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2009 Johnson Controls, Inc. www.johnsoncontrols.com

1 of 1
 Cleveland Controls Model
Division of UniControl Inc.
AFS–460
Air Pressure Sensing Switch with Manual Reset Feature
3.25" 3.56"
Application (82) (90)
1.63." 1.38"
(41) 0.44" (35)
The Model AFS-460 is a general purpose (11)
proving switch designed to require manual
operator reset following actuation. It can 2.81"
(71)
be used to sense positive, negative, or dif-
ferential air pressure in HVAC and Energy
6.13"
Management applications which require (156) Reset
operator interface. Button

0.19"
(5)
dia
General Description & hole

Operation High
Pressure
Inlet
1.94" (49) 0.78" Low
The plated housing contains a diaphragm, (20) Pressure
a calibration spring and a snap-acting 3.88" 0.71" Inlet
(99) (18)
SPST–NC switch with manual reset but- Dimensions in Inches
ton. (Millimeters)

The sample connections located on each

side of the diaphragm accept 0.25" OD
Mounting (see Figure 1) sion connections. An optional ¼"
Select a mounting location which is free adapter, suitable for slip-on flexible tub-
metallic tubing via the integral compres- ing is available: order part number
from vibration. The AFS-460 must be
sion ferrule and nut. 18311. For sample lines of up to 10 feet,
mounted with the diaphragm in any verti-
An enclosure cover protects the operator cal plane in order to obtain the lowest ¼" OD tubing is acceptable. For lines
from accidental contact with the live specified operating set point. Avoid up to 20 feet, use ¼" ID tubing.
switch terminal screws and the set point mounting with the sample line connec- For lines up to 60 feet, use ½" ID tub-
adjusting screw. The enclosure cover ac- tions in the "up" position. Surface mount ing. Locate the sampling probe a mini-
cepts a 0.5" conduit connection. via the two 3/16" diameter holes in the in- mum of 1.5 duct diameters downstream
tegral mounting bracket. The mounting from the air source. Install the sampling
holes are 3–7/8" apart. probe as close to the center of the air-
stream as possible. Refer to Figure 2 to
Air Sampling Connection identify the high pressure inlet (H) and
(Figure 1) (see Figure 2) the low pressure inlet (L). Select one of
The AFS-460 is designed to accept the five application options listed on
firm-wall sample lines of ¼" OD tubing page 2, and connect the sample lines as
by means of ferrule and nut compres- recommended.
(Figure 2) (Figure 3)

Bulletin AFS460.05 08/01/02

(Figure 4) Electrical Connections Specifications
(see Figure 3)
Model AFS-460 Air Pressure
Before pressure is applied to the dia- Sensing Switch with Manual Reset
phragm, the switch contacts will be in the Feature
normally closed (NC) position.
Sample Media: Air.
The snap switch has screw top terminals Mounting Position (in order to meet
with cup washers. Wire alarm and control lowest operating specifications):
applications as shown in Figure 4. Diaphragm in any vertical plane.
Field Adjustable Range:
POSITIVE PRESSURE ONLY: Con- 0.40 ± 0.06"w.c. to 12.0"w.c.
nect the sample line to inlet H; inlet L re- Field Adjustment Switch Differential: Progressive,
mains open to the atmosphere. increasing from approximately
NEGATIVE PRESSURE ONLY: Con- The adjustment range of an AFS-460 Air 0.06± 0.01"w.c. at minimum set
nect the sample line to inlet L; inlet H re- Switch is 0.4" ± 0.02" w.c. to 12.0" w.c. point, to approximately 0.8"w.c. at
mains open to the atmosphere. To adjust the set point, turn the adjusting maximum set point.
TWO NEGATIVE SAMPLES: Con- screw counterclockwise until motion has Maximum Pressure:
nect the higher negative sample to inlet stopped. Next, turn the adjusting screw 0.5 psi (0.03 bar)
L. Connect the lower negative sample to four complete turns in a clockwise direc- Operating Temperature Range:
inlet H. tion to engage the spring. From this point, -40 to 180F (-40.0 to 82.2C)
the next ten turns will be used for the ac- Life: Exceeds UL-recognized
TWO POSITIVE SAMPLES: Connect tual calibration. Each full turn repre- mechanical endurance test of 6,000
the higher positive sample to inlet H. Con- sents approximately 1.16" w.c. cycles minimum at 0.5 psi maximum
nect the lower positive sample to inlet L.
Please note: To properly calibrate an air pressure each cycle and at
ONE POSITIVE AND ONE NEGA- maximum electrical load.
TIVE SAMPLE: Connect the positive switch, a digital manometer or other mea-
suring device should be used to confirm Electrical Rating: @ 60 Hz.
sample to inlet H. Connect the negative 15 amp 125, 250, or 277 VAC
sample to inlet L. the actual set point.
¼ hp 125 V AC, ½Hp 250 VAC,
½ amp 125 V DC,
Location of Sample Lines for Typical Applications ¼ amp 250 V DC .
Contact Arrangement:
SPST–NC (manual reset).
Electrical Connections:
Screw top terminals with cup
washers.
Sample Line Connections:
Ferrule and nut compression type
connectors will accept 0.25" OD rigid
tubing.
Shipping Weight:
1.2 lbs.
Approval and Recognition:
UL, CSA, CE.
Accessories
• P/N 18311 Slip-on ¼" OD Tubing Adapter,
suitable for slipping on flexible plastic tubing.
• Sample line probes.
• Orifice plugs (pulsation dampeners).
Pressure Conversion Table
1" H2O =0.0361 lbs./sq. in. or 0.0736 in. mercury
1" Hg. = 0.491 lbs./sq. in. or 13.6 in. water
1 psi = 27.7 in. water or 2.036 in. Hg.

Are you

Cleveland Controls reading a FAX or a

COPY of this bulletin?
Tel: 216-398-0330 DOWNLOAD the full-
DIVISION OF UNICONTROL INC. color PDF version of
1111 Brookpark Rd Fax: 216-398-8558 this and other
Cleveland OH 44109 literature at our
website!
Email:saleshvac@unicontrolinc.com
Bulletin AFS460.05 08/01/02 Web page: http://www.clevelandcontrols.com
 Code No. LIT-1900454
Issued August 12, 2008

CSD Series Current Devices

Description Fixed Setpoint Models
The Current Switch Device (CSD) Series of CSD-SF0C0-1 (solid core)
digital output current switches are • Setpoint fixed at 0.25 A
non-intrusive devices designed to detect
• Current range — 0.25 to 200 A
current flowing through a cable or wire. A
cost-effective solution for monitoring on and CSD-CF0A0-1 (split core)
off status or proof of operation, these units are • Setpoint fixed at 0.15 A
ideal for monitoring very small current loads • Current range — 0.15 to 200 A
on motors driving fans, blowers, pumps, CSD-CF0J0-1 (split core)
heating coils, and lighting.
• Setpoint fixed at 1.5 A
The CSD models with command relays not • Current range — 1.5 to 200 A
only monitor the current flowing through the
CSD-CF0J1-1 (split core with command relay)
cable but also facilitate the start and stopping
of the motor. • Relay Single Pole, Single Throw (SPST),
Normally Open (NO), 10 A @ 260 VAC, 5A
These units also provide a universal
@ 30 VDC
solid-state output and do not require a power
• Actuation coil — 20-30 VAC/DC, CSD Series Current Device
supply. Completely self-powered, these units
32.5 mA maximum
draw their power from current induced from
the cable or line being monitored. • Setpoint fixed at 1.5 A
• Current range — 1.5 to 200 A • Adjustable setpoint — wide range from 1.25
CSD Series Current Devices are available in to 135 A
Adjustable Setpoint Models
the following types: CSD-CA1G1-1 (split core with command
CSD-SA1E0-1 (solid core) relay)
• solid core, setpoint fixed
• solid core, setpoint adjustable • Multi-turn potentiometer — adjust setpoint • Multi-turn potentiometers — adjust setpoint
• solid core with command relay, for application for application
setpoint adjustable • Adjustable setpoint — wide range from • Adjustable setpoint — wide range from
• split core, setpoint fixed 1.0 to 135 A 1.25 to 135 A
• split core, setpoint adjustable • Two status Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs) • Relay SPST, NO, 10 A @ 260 VAC,
— provide visual indication of off and on 5 A @ 30 VDC, 12.8-26mA
• split core with command relay,
status • Actuation coil — 20-30 VAC/DC,
setpoint fixed
CSD-SA1E1-1 (solid core with command 32.5 mA maximum
• split core with command relay,
relay) •
setpoint adjustable
Refer to the CSD Series Current Devices • Multi-turn potentiometer — adjust setpoint • Two status LEDs — provide visual
Product Bulletin (LIT-12011292) for important for application indication of off and on status
product application information. • Adjustable setpoint — wide range from
1.00 to 135 A Repair Information
Features • Relay SPST, NO, 10 A @ 260 VAC,
5 A @ 30 VDC If the CSD Series current device fails to
• dual function — monitors current and motor • Actuation coil — 20-30 VAC/DC, operate within its specifications, replace the
start and stop 32.5 mA maximum unit. For a replacement CSD, contact the
• 100% solid-state output — has no moving nearest Johnson Controls® representative.
• Two Status LEDs — provide visual
parts to fail indication of off and on status
• polarity insensitive output — provides CSD-CA1G0-1 (split core)
easier wiring • Multi-turn potentiometers — adjust setpoint
• snap-in mounting bracket — simplifies for application
installation • Two status LEDs — provide visual
• small size — fits in tight enclosures indication of off and on status

Selection Chart
Code Number Core Type Setpoint LED Display Low Setpoint Output Relay
Threshold (Amperes)
CSD-SF0C0-1 Solid Fixed No 0.25 No
CSD-SA1E0-1 Solid Adjustable Yes 1.00 No
CSD-SA1E1-1 Solid Adjustable Yes 1.00 SPST, NO, 10 A @ 260 VAC, 5 A @ 30 VDC
CSD-CF0A0-1 Clamp/Split Fixed No 0.15 No
CSD-CF0J0-1 Clamp/Split Fixed No 1.5 No
CSD-CA1G0-1 Clamp/Split Adjustable Yes 1.25 No
CSD-CF0J1-1 Clamp/Split Fixed No 1.5 SPST, NO, 10 A @ 260 VAC, 5 A @ 30 VDC
CSD-CA1G1-1 Clamp/Split Adjustable Yes 1.25 SPST, NO, 10 A @ 260 VAC, 5 A @ 30 VDC

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.
Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2008 Johnson Controls, Inc. www.johnsoncontrols.com

1 of 2
CSD Series Current Devices (Continued)

Technical Specifications
Solid Core Models
CSD-SF0C0-1 CSD-SA1E0-1 CSD-SA1E1-1
Amperage Range 0.25-200 A 1.00-135 A 1.00-135 A
Switch Setpoint Fixed Adjustable Adjustable
Output Relay No No SPST, NO, 10 A @ 260 VAC, 5 A @ 30 VDC
Actuation Coil No No 20-30 VAC/DC, 32.5 mA maximum
Switch LED Indication No Yes Yes
Relay LED Indication No No Yes
Trip Setpoint Value 0.25 A 1.00-135 A 1.00-135 A
Current Switching Mode Under current sensing Over/under current sensing Over/under current sensing
Sensor Supply Voltage Induced from power conductor cable.
Wire Size 18 AWG (1.0 mm Diameter) maximum, 22 AWG (0.6 mm Diameter) recommended
Status Output Switch normally open
Switch Load Capacity 1 A @ 30 VAC/42 VDC max.
Isolation Voltage 600 AC rms
Temperature Range 5 to 140°F (-15 to 60°C)
Frequency Range 50/60 Hz
Humidity Range 0-95% noncondensing
Dimensions 2.54 x 1.85 x 0.98 in. (65 x 47 x 25 mm) 2.54 x 2.56 x 1.56 in. (65 x 65 x 40 mm)
Aperture (Sensing Hole) Size 0.71 in. Dia. (18 mm Dia.)
Compliance
United States UL Listed, File E310692, CCN NRNT, Under UL 508, Industrial Control Equipment
Canada UL Listed, File E310692, CCN NRNT7, Under CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 14-M91
Industrial Control Equipment
Europe CE Mark, Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC
Shipping Weight .35 lb (.16 kg)

Split Core Models

CSD-CF0A0-1/CSD-CF0J0-1 CSD-CA1G0-1 CSD-CF0J1-1 CSD-CA1G1-1
Amperage Range 0.15-200 A/1.5-200 A 1.25-135 A 1.5-200 A 1.25-135 A
Switch Setpoint Fixed Adjustable Fixed Adjustable
Output Relay No No SPST, NO 10 A @ 260 VAC, SPST, NO, 10 A @ 260 VAC,
5 A @ 30 VDC 5 A @ 30 VDC
Actuation Coil No No 20-30 VAC/DC, 32.5 mA max. 20-30 VAC/DC, 32.5 mA max.
Switch LED Indication No Yes No Yes
Relay LED Indication No No Yes Yes
Trip Setpoint Value 0.15 A/1.5 A 1.25-135 A 1.5 A 1.25-135 A
Current Switching Mode Under current sensing Over/under current sensing Under current sensing Over/under current sensing
Sensor Supply Voltage Induced from power conductor cable.
Wire Size 18 AWG (1.0 mm Diameter) Maximum, 22 AWG (0.6 mm Diameter) Recommended
Status Output Switch normally open
Switch Load Capacity 1 A @ 30 VAC/42 VDC max.
Isolation Voltage 600 AC rms.
Temperature Range 5 to 140°F (-15 to 60°C)
Frequency Range 50/60 Hz
Humidity Range 0-95% noncondensing
Dimensions 2.7 x 2.56 x 1.06 in. (69 x 65 x 27) 2.7 x 2.56 x 1.73 in. (69 x 65 x 44 mm)
Aperture (Sensing Hole) 0.72 x 0.78 in. (18 x 20 mm)
Size
Compliance
United States UL Listed, File E310692, CCN NRNT, Under UL 508, Industrial Control Equipment
Canada UL Listed, File E310692, CCN NRNT7, Under CAN/CSA C22.2 No.14-M91
Industrial Control Equipment
Europe CE Mark, Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC
Shipping Weight .35 lb (.16 kg)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.
Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2008 Johnson Controls, Inc. www.johnsoncontrols.com

2 of 2
 Model DPT 264 Applications
r
3-YeaIO
DIT NAL Very Low Differential Pressure Transducer
UNCON RANTY ● Heating, Ventilating and
WAR Unidirectional Ranges: 0 - 0.1 to 0 - 100 in. W.C.
Bidirectional Ranges: 0 - ±0.1 to 0 - ±50 in. W.C.
Air Conditioning (HVAC)
Air or non-conducting gas ● Energy Management
HI Systems
G
CA HER ● Variable Air Volume and
PA OV
BIL ER Fan Control (VAV)
ITY PR
OF ESS ● Environmental Pollution
10 URE
PS Control
I
● Lab and Fume Hood
Control
● Oven Pressurization and
Furnace Draft Controls
Benefits
■ 10 PSI Overpressure on
All Ranges.
■ ± 0.5% FS Standard
± Accuracy
AC 0.5% (Optional ± 0.25% FS
CU Accuracy).
RA FS
CY ■ Installation Time
Minimized with Snap
Track Mounting and

S
etra Systems 264 pressure transducers The Model 264 utilizes an improved all
sense differential or gauge (static) stainless steel micro-tig welded sensor. The Easy-To-Access Pressure
pressure and convert this pressure tensioned stainless steel diaphragm and Ports and Electrical
difference to a proportional electrical output insulated stainless steel electrode, positioned Connections.
for either unidirectional or bidirectional close to the diaphragm, form a variable
■ 0 to 5 VDC or 2-wire 4 to
pressure ranges. The 264 Series is offered capacitor. Positive pressure moves the
with a high level analog 0 to 5 VDC or diaphragm toward the electrode, increasing
20 mA Analog Outputs
4 to 20 mA output. the capacitance. A decrease in pressure Are Compatible with
moves the diaphragm away from the Energy Management
Used in Building Energy Management electrode, decreasing the capacitance. The Systems.
Systems, these transducers are capable of
measuring pressures and flows with the
change in capacitance is detected and ■ Reverse Wiring
converted to a linear DC electrical signal by Protection.
accuracy necessary for proper building Setra’s unique electronic circuit.
pressurization and air flow control. ■ Internal Regulation
The tensioned sensor allows up to 10 PSI Permits Use with
The 264 Series transducers are available for air overpressure (in either direction) with no
pressure ranges as low as 0.1 in. W.C. full scale Unregulated DC Power
damage to the unit. In addition, the parts that
to 100 in. W.C. full scale. Static standard Supplies.
make up the sensor have thermally matched
accuracy is ±0.5% full scale in normal ambient coefficients, which promote improved
temperature environments, but higher temperature performance and excellent long
accuracies are available. The units are term stability.
ISO
✓
temperature compensated to 0.033% FS/oF
thermal error over the temperature range of
0oF to +150oF.
9001
Certified
Visit Setra Online:
http://www.setra.com

NOTE: Setra quality standards are based on ANSI-Z540-1.

The calibration of this product is NIST traceable.

U.S. Patent nos. 4093915; 4358814; 4434203 800-257-3872

159 Swanson Rd., Boxborough, MA 01719/Telephone: 978-263-1400/Fax: 978-264-0292
 Model DPT 264 Specifications
Performance Data Environmental Data Electrical Data (Voltage)
Accuracy* RSS(at constant temp) ±0.5% FS** ±0.25% Temperature Circuit 3-Wire (Com, Exc, Out)
Non-Linearity, BFSL ±0.48% FS Operating* °F (°C) 0 to +175 (-18 to +79) Excitation 9 to 30 VDC
Hysteresis 0.10% FS 0.20% FS Storage °F (°C) -65 to +250 (-54 to +121) Output* 0 to 5 VDC**
Non-Repeatability 0.05% FS 0.02% FS * Operating temperature limits of the electronics only. Pressure media Bidirectional output at zero
Thermal Effects temperatures may be considerably higher. pressure: 2.5 VDC**
Compensated Range °F(°C) 0 to +150 (-18 to +65) Output Impedance 100 Ohms
Physical Description *Calibrated into a 50K ohm load, operable into a 5000 ohm load or greater.
Zero/Span Shift %FS/°F(°C) 0.033 (0.06) **Zero output factory set to within ±50mV.
Case Fire-Retardant Glass Filled
Maximum Line Pressure 10 psi **Span (Full Scale) output factory set to within ±50mV.
Polyester
Overpressure 10 psi in Positive or Negative
Mounting Four screw holes on removable Electrical Data (Current)
Direction.
zinc plated steel base. Designed Circuit 2-Wire
Zero Offset for 2.75” snap track. Output* 4 to 20mA**
Position Effect Range (%FS/G) Electrical Connection Screw Terminal Strip Bidirectional output at zero
(Unit is factory calibrated at 0g 0 to 0.1 in. WC 2.1 Pressure Fittings 3/16” O.D. barbed brass pressure: 12mA**
effect in the vertical position.) 0 to 1.0 in.WC .22 pressure fitting for 1/4” push-on External Load 0 to 800 ohms
0 to 5 in.WC .14 tubing. Minimum supply voltage (VDC) = 9+ 0.02 x
0 to 10 in. WC .12 Zero and Span Adjustments Accessible on top of case (Resistance of receiver plus line).
* RSS of Non-Linearity, Hysteresis, and Non-Repeatability. Weight (approx.) 10 ounces Maximum supply voltage (VDC) = 30+ 0.004 x
**Note: See ordering information below for optional accuracies. (Resistance of receiver plus line).
Pressure Media *Calibrated at factory with a 24 VDC loop supply voltage and a 250 ohm load.
Typically air or similar non-conducting gases. **Zero output factory set to within ±0.16mA.
Specifications subject to change without notice. **Span (Full Scale) output factory set to wtihin ±0.16mA.
R0.078
Outline Drawings #6 SCREW WIRE CLAMP 3 PLACES R1.98
0.312
7.92
2.750
69.85 0.385
1.662 9.78
42.21

SSP264JCI Rev.C-2pg. 09/14/99

1.187 1.19
30.15 4.562 30.15
IN 115.87 5.062 1.19
MM 30.15
128.57
PRESSURE PORTS PRESSURE PORTS

0.594
15.08

1.811 1.624
45.99 41.25
Ordering Information
Input Range Product Codes for ±0.5% Accuracy Input Range Product Codes for ±0.25% Accuracy
(Inches of WC) 0 to 5 VDC Output 4 to 20 mA Output (Inches of WC) 0 to 5 VDC Output 4 to 20 mA Output
0 to 0.1 DPT2640-0R1D DPT2641-0R1D 0 to 0.1 DPT2640-0R1D-A DPT2641-0R1D-A
0 to 0.25 DPT2640-R25D DPT2641-R25D 0 to 0.25 DPT2640-R25D-A DPT2641-R25D-A
0 to 0.5 DPT2640-0R5D DPT2641-0R5D 0 to 0.5 DPT2640-0R5D-A DPT2641-0R5D-A
0 to 1 DPT2640-001D DPT2641-001D 0 to 1 DPT2640-001D-A DPT2641-001D-A
0 to 2.5 DPT2640-2R5D DPT2641-2R5D 0 to 2.5 DPT2640-2R5D-A DPT2641-2R5D-A
0 to 5 DPT2640-005D DPT2641-005D 0 to 5 DPT2640-005D-A DPT2641-005D-A
0 to 10 DPT2640-010D DPT2641-010D 0 to 10 DPT2640-010D-A DPT2641-010D-A
0 to 25 DPT2640-025D DPT2641-025D 0 to 25 DPT2640-025D-A DPT2641-025D-A
0 to 50 DPT2640-050D DPT2641-050D 0 to 50 DPT2640-050D-A DPT2641-050D-A
0 to 100 DPT2640-100D DPT2641-100D 0 to 100 DPT2640-100D-A DPT2641-100D-A
-0.1 to 0.1 DPT2640-0R1B DPT2641-0R1B -0.1 to 0.1 DPT2640-0R1B-A DPT2641-0R1B-A
-0.25 to 0.25 DPT2640-R25B DPT2641-R25B -0.25 to 0.25 DPT2640-R25B-A DPT2641-R25B-A
-0.5 to 0.5 DPT2640-0R5B DPT2641-0R5B -0.5 to 0.5 DPT2640-0R5B-A DPT2641-0R5B-A
-1 to 1 DPT2640-001B DPT2641-001B -1 to 1 DPT2640-001B-A DPT2641-001B-A
-2.5 to 2.5 DPT2640-2R5B DPT2641-2R5B -2.5 to 2.5 DPT2640-2R5B-A DPT2641-2R5B-A
-5 to 5 DPT2640-005B DPT2641-005B -5 to 5 DPT2640-005B-A DPT2641-005B-A
Add DPT-CAL-REPORT for Calibration Certificate Note: All units provided with a Calibration Certificate

159 Swanson Road, Boxborough, MA 01719/Tel: 978-263-1400;

Toll Free: 800-257-3872; Fax: 978-264-0292; email: sales@setra.com
 Code No. LIT-1927195
Issued February 1, 2009

P32 Series
Sensitive Pressure Switch
Description Features
This differential pressure switch is used to • easy-to-read setpoint scale
sense pressure/air flow in ducts. • versatile mounting options
P32 Series Applications
Y • pressure/air flow proving with electric duct
R heaters, humidifiers, and other equipment
• maximum pressure/air flow control for
B variable volume systems
• reheat duct powered systems
• clogged filter detection
• detection of icing of air conditioning coils
p32.eps

Action on Increase and initiation of defrost cycle

P32
of Pressure • sensitive pressure settings
• dust-tight snap switch
P28 Action Diagram

Selection Chart
Code Ambient Connector Maximum Contact Range Sensitivity Setpoint Scale Mounting Bracket
Number Temperature Over- Action in. WC at Plate (Included)
Min./Max. pressure (kPa) Min. Set
psig point
(kPa) 1 in. WC (kPa)
P32AC-1C

bracket2.eps
0.15 to 12 0.07
L
(0.037 to 2.99) (0.017)
BKT182-1R
High Pressure
P32AC-2C2

bracket1.eps
connectors are metal
1/8 in. female NPT 0.04
-40°F (-40°C) U
inside, 1/2 in. NPSM (0.01)
min. BKT229-1R
outside for mounting 1
SPDT Adjustable Yes
P32AF-1C (6.895)

bracket2.eps
167°F (75°C)
Low Pressure 0.05 to 5
max. L
connectors are (0.012 to 1.24)
molded, 0.025 BKT182-1R
1/8 in. female NPT (0.006)
P32AF-2C2

bracket1.eps
U
BKT229-1R
1. Maximum overpressure at either connection
2. Supplied with 1/4 in. compression fitting, 4 in. extension tube, two mounting screws, and “O” gasket (angle barbed fitting installed)

Accessories Technical Specifications

The switch can be mounted directly or with the supplied mounting Electrical Ratings
bracket. Motor Ratings VAC 120 208 240
Code Number Description Type P32AC (Standard Differential, 1/2 hp)
FTG18A-600R Remote Mounting Kit: 4 in. flanged sensing tube, AC Full Load A 9.8 5.65 4.9
two barbed fittings, two No. 10 screws, and a gasket AC Locked Rotor A 58.8 33.9 29.4
Non-Inductive or Resistive Load 15 amp 24 to 277 VAC
Pilot Duty – 125 VA, 24 VAC; 360 VA, 120 to 277 VAC
Type P32AF (Close Differential, 1/4 hp)
AC Full Load A 5.8 3.3 2.9
AC Locked Rotor A 34.8 19.8 17.4
Non-Inductive or Resistive Load 10 amp, 24 to 277 VAC
Pilot Duty – 125 VA, 24 VAC; 360 VA, 120 to 277 VAC

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.
Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2009 Johnson Controls, Inc. www.johnsoncontrols.com

1 of 1
 CURRENT MONITORING

SPST Status Relay

42
120 Series
The H120 Zone Ventilation Device provides control Sleek field enclosed relay and current switch
and status for all fractional horsepower motors saves installation time and space
commonly used in Zone specific mechanical system  The current switch and relay are in series...connect the
control. The installation of the relay and current contacts to the load and your current switch is
switch are automatically made by connecting automatically installed
the relay contacts...saves the labor of mounting a  The nipple mount housing can be connected to any
traditional separate current switch. 1/2" conduit knockout for installation versatility

APPLICATIONS  Relay coil LED streamlines job commissioning and

check out
 Unit Ventilators
 HP ratings make the H120 ideal for control and status
 Fan Coil Units of fractional HP motors
 Exhaust Fans
Super-low turn on for the smallest of loads
 Fan Terminal Units
 0.1A turn on easily monitors the smallest motors
 Fractional HP Motors
 Light Resistive Loads

SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature -15ºC to 60ºC (13.8A max.) -15ºC to 50ºC (20A max.)
Operating Humidity 0-95% non-condensing
Expected Relay Life (mechanical) 10 million cycles
Relay Status LED ON=energized
Current Switch:
Current Switch Contact N.O., 100mA@30VAC/DC (H120); N.C., 100mA@30VAC/DC (H120NC)
Minimum Turn On Current 0.1AAC
Dimensions…(LxWxH) 2.92" x 1.80" x 1.58"; (H) 1/2" NPT nipple

���������������������������� ������������������������
���������������������������������� ��������������������� ��������� � ������������������
� � ���������������� � � � ��� � ��
����������������������������������� �������������
� � ����������� ����������������������������� ����� � ����
� � �����������
� � �������������
������������������������������������ �������������
�������������������������������� �������������

*See operating temperature specification

ORDERING INFORMATION

MODEL COIL RELAY CONTACT CURRENT SWITCH CONTACT

H120 24VAC/DC SPST, N.O. N.O. 100mA@30VAC/DC
H120NC 24VAC/DC SPST, N.O. N.C. 100mA@30VAC/DC

CURRENT MONITORING ©2004 VERIS INDUSTRIES 800.354.8556

 CURRENT MONITORING

WIRE COLOR CODES APPLICATIONS/WIRING EXAMPLE

�������������������� ��������������
Nipple mount directly to a panel 43
������� ����� To Load CO R E LA
������ NT Y
� ��

� ��
�������� AC T
�

�
S
�������� ������
�

����
��

��

����� ������
��

��
��

��

����������
������ ����
*Isolation…600VAC
To Controls
DO (coil)
DI (current
CURRENT SWITCH WIRE COLOR CODES switch)

H120 H120NC
Nipple mount to 4x electrical box
GREY BROWN
COMMON COMMON
��������������
��������������
�����
GREY BROWN
������
N.O. N.C.

����������
��������
DIMENSIONAL DRAWING
2.92"
(74 mm)

Hawkeye® 120
actual size
SPST Enclosed Relay/Current Switch
Wire Color Codes Max. 20A Current Limiting
Wht/Yellow Stripe=Common
COIL

Device required
Wht/Blue Stripe=24VAC/DC
Contacts: 20A@277VAC, 28VDC
Orange/Orange = N.O. 1HP@120VAC, 2HP@277VAC
Current Switch: Grey/Grey = N.O. 100mA@30VAC/DC

TYPE 1 Enclosure

2.78" 1.58"
(71 mm) (40 mm)

1.67" 1.80"
(42 mm) (46 mm)

1/2" NPT Nipple

800.354.8556 ©2004 VERIS INDUSTRIES CURRENT MONITORING

 Code No. LIT-1900357
Issued June 1, 2009

M9210-xxx-3 Electric Spring Return Actuators

Description Features
The M9210-xxx-3 Actuators are direct mount, • reversible mounting design — simplifies
spring return electric actuators that operate installation and enables the actuator to
with these available power options: spring return in either direction
• AC 24 V at 50/60 Hz or DC 24 V • removable coupler — adapts to a shorter
(AGx, BGx, GGx, HGx) damper shaft
• AC 120 V at 60 Hz (BAx) • electronic stall detection throughout entire
rotation range — extends the life of the
• AC 230 V at 50/60 Hz (BDx)
actuator by deactivating the actuator motor
These bidirectional actuators do not require a
when an overload condition is detected
damper linkage, and are easily installed on
• integral 48 in. (1.2 m) halogen-free cables
dampers with 1/2 to 3/4 in. or 12 to 19 mm
with colored and numbered conductors —
round shafts, or 3/8 and 1/2 in. or 10, 12, and
simplify field wiring
14 mm square shafts using the standard shaft
clamp included with the actuator. An optional • integral auxiliary switches (xxC models) —
M9220-600 Jackshaft Coupler Kit is available provide one fixed and one adjustable
for 3/4 to 1-1/16 in. or 19 to 27 mm round switch point with line voltage capability
shafts, or 5/8 and 3/4 in. or 16, 18, and 19 mm • NEMA 2 (IP54) rated aluminum enclosure
square shafts. — protects the internal components of the
actuator from dirt and moisture
The M9210-xxx-3 Electric Spring Return M9210-xxx-3 Electric Spring Return
• easy-to-use locking manual override with
Actuators provide running and spring return Actuator
auto release and crank storage — allows
torques of 89 lb·in (10 N·m). Integral line
for manual positioning of the actuator hub
voltage auxiliary switches are available on the
xxC models to indicate end-stop position, or to
• integral connectors for 3/8 in. (10 mm) Repair Information
flexible metal conduit — simplify
perform switching functions within the selected If the M9210-xxx-3 Electric Spring Return
installation and field wiring
rotation range. Actuators fails to operate within its
• microprocessor-controlled brushless specifications, refer to the M9210-xxx-3
Refer to the M9210-xxx-3 Electric Spring DC motor (-AGx, -GGx, and -HGx) types — Electric Spring Return Actuators Product
Return Actuators Product Bulletin provides constant run-time independent of Bulletin (LIT-12011056) for a list of repair parts
(LIT-12011056) for important product torque available.
application information.
Applications
The M9210-xxx-3 Electric Spring Return
Actuators provide reliable control of dampers
and valves in Heating, Ventilating, and Air
Conditioning (HVAC) systems. The
M9210-xxx-3 Actuators are available for use
with on/off, floating, and proportional
controllers.

Selection Chart
Code Number Control Type Auxiliary Power Requirements
Switches
M9210-AGA-3 Floating None AC 24 V at 50/60 Hz or DC 24 V
M9210-AGC-3 Floating Two AC 24 V at 50/60 Hz or DC 24 V
M9210-BAA-3 On/Off None AC 120 V at 60 Hz
M9210-BAC-3 On/Off Two AC 120 V at 60 Hz
M9210-BDA-3 On/Off None AC 230 V at 50/60 Hz
M9210-BDC-3 On/Off Two AC 230 V at 50/60 Hz
M9210-BGA-3 On/Off None AC 24 V at 50/60 Hz or DC 24 V
M9210-BGC-3 On/Off Two AC 24 V at 50/60 Hz or DC 24 V
M9210-GGA-3 Proportional None AC 24 V at 50/60 Hz or DC 24 V
M9210-GGC-3 Proportional Two AC 24 V at 50/60 Hz or DC 24 V
M9210-HGA-3 Proportional w/Adjustable Zero and Span None AC 24 V at 50/60 Hz or DC 24 V
M9210-HGC-3 Proportional w/Adjustable Zero and Span Two AC 24 V at 50/60 Hz or DC 24 V

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.
Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2009 Johnson Controls, Inc. www.johnsoncontrols.com

1 of 5
M9210-xxx-3 Electric Spring Return Actuators (Continued)

Accessories
Code Number Description
DMPR-KC0031 7 in. (178 mm) Blade Pin Extension (without Bracket) for Johnson Controls® Direct-Mount Damper Applications
M9000-158 Tandem Mounting Kit used to Mount Two Models of M9220-xxx-3 Series Proportional Electric Spring Return Actuators
M9000-153 Crank arm
M9000-170 Remote Mounting Kit, Horizontal. Kit includes Mounting Bracket, M9000-153 Crank Arm, Ball Joint, and Mounting Bolts
M9000-171 Remote Mounting Kit, Vertical. Kit includes Mounting Bracket, M9000-153 Crank Arm, Ball Joint, and Mounting Bolts
M9000-200 Commissioning Tool that Provides a Control Signal to Drive 24 V On/Off, Floating, Proportional, and/or Resistive Electric Actuators
M9000-320 Weather Shield Enclosure - NEMA 3R enclosure for protecting a single M9210/20 actuator from rain, sleet, or snow
M9000-604 Replacement Anti-rotation Bracket Kit (with Screws) for M9220-xxx-3 Proportional Electric Spring Return Actuators
M9220-600 1 in. (25 mm) Jackshaft Coupler Kit (with Locking Clip) for Mounting M9220-xxx-3 Proportional Electric Spring Return Actuators on
Dampers with 3/4 to 1-1/16 in. or 19 to 27 mm Round Shafts, or 5/8 and 3/4 in. or 16, 18, and 19 mm Square Shafts
M9220-601 Replacement Coupler Kit (with Locking Clip) for Mounting M9220-xxx-3 Proportional Electric Spring Return Actuators on Dampers
with 1/2 to 3/4 in. or 12 to 19 mm Round Shafts, or 3/8 and 1/2 in. or 10, 12, and 14 mm Square Shafts
M9220-602 Replacement Locking Clips for M9220-xxx-3 Proportional Electric Spring Return Actuators (Five per Bag)
M9220-603 Adjustable Stop Kit for M9220-xxx-3 Proportional Electric Spring Return Actuators
M9220-604 Replacement Manual Override Cranks for M9220-xxx-3 Proportional Electric Spring Return Actuators (Five per Bag)
M9220-610 Replacement Shaft Gripper, 10 mm Square Shaft with Locking Clip
M9220-612 Replacement Shaft Gripper, 12 mm Square Shaft with Locking Clip
M9220-614 Replacement Shaft Gripper, 14 mm Square Shaft with Locking Clip
1. Furnished with the damper and may be ordered separately.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.
Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2009 Johnson Controls, Inc. www.johnsoncontrols.com

2 of 5
M9210-xxx-3 Electric Spring Return Actuators (Continued)

Dimensions
4
(102)
2
(51)
3-3/16
1-19/32 1-19/32
(81)
(40) (40) 1/8 3/4
(3) (19)

A
2-3/16
1-19/32 (56)
(40)

1-1/16
(27)

10-5/16 10
(262) (254)

6-15/16
(176)

1/4 (6.5)
Mounting Hole
(6 Locations)

1 2-3/16
1-3/4 (25) (56)
(44)
FIG:Dmns

M9210-xxx-3 Electric Spring Return Actuator Dimensions, in. (mm)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.
Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2009 Johnson Controls, Inc. www.johnsoncontrols.com

3 of 5
M9210-xxx-3 Electric Spring Return Actuators (Continued)

Technical Specifications
M9210-xxx Electric Spring Return Actuators (Part 1 of 2)
Product Codes M9210-AGx-3 Models: Floating
M9210-Bxx-3 Models: On/Off
M9210-GGx-3 Models: Proportional
M9210-HGx-3 Models: Proportional Adjustable
Power Requirements AGx, GGx, HGx Models AC 24 V (19.2 to 30 V) at 50/60 Hz: Class 2, 9.6 VA Running,
6 VA Holding Position;
DC 24 V (21.6 to 26.4 V); Class 2, 3.9 W Running, 2.1 W Holding Position
BAx Models AC 120 V (AC 102 to 132 V) at 60 Hz: 0.25 A Running, 0.13 A Holding Position
BDx Models AC 230 V (AC 198 to 264 V) at 50/60 Hz: 0.15 A Running, 0.09 A Holding Position
BGx Models AC 24 V (19.2 to 30 V) at 50/60 Hz: Class 2, 17.7 VA Running,
5.1 VA Holding Position;
DC 24 V (21.6 to 26.4 V): Class 2, 15.6 W Running, 2.6 W Holding Position
Transformer Sizing Requirements AGx, GGx, HGx Models 15 VA Minimum per Actuator
Bxx Models 25 VA Minimum per Actuator
Input Signal/Adjustments AGx Models DC 0 (2) to 10 V or 0 (4) to 20 mA with Field Furnished 500 ohm resistor;
Switch Selectable Direct or Reverse Action with Signal Increase, 500 ms minimum pulse
width
GGx Models Factory Set at DC 0 to 10 V, CW Rotation with Signal Increase;
Selectable DC 0 (2) to 10 V or 0 (4) to 20 mA with Field Furnished
500 ohm, 0.25 W minimum resistor;
Switch Selectable Direct or Reverse Action with Signal Increase
HGx Models Factory Set DC 0 to 10 V, CW Rotation with Signal Increase;
Selectable DC 0 to 10 V or 0 to 20 mA with Field Furnished 500 ohm,
0.25 W minimum resistor;
Start Point Programmable DC 0 to 10 V;
Span Programmable DC 2 to 10 V; Switch Selectable Direct or Reverse Action with Signal
Increase
Control Input Impedance GGx, HGx Models Voltage Input: 200,000 ohms;
Current Input: 500 ohms with Field Furnished 500 ohm Resistor
Feedback Signal HGx Models DC 0 to 10 V for Desired Rotation Range up to 90°;
Corresponds to Rotation Limits, 1 mA maximum
GGx Models DC 0 (2) to 10 V for Desired Rotation Range up to 90°;
Corresponds to Rotation Limits, 1 mA maximum
Auxiliary Switch Rating xxC Models Two Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT), Double-Insulated Switches with Gold Flash
Contacts:
AC 24 V, 50 VA Pilot Duty;
AC 120 V, 5.8 A Resistive, 1/4 hp, 275 VA Pilot Duty;
AC 240 V, 5.0 A Resistive, 1/4 hp, 275 VA Pilot Duty
Spring Return Direction is Selectable with Mounting Position of Actuator:
Side A, Actuator Face Away from Damper for CCW Spring Return;
Side B, Actuator Face Away from Damper for CW Spring Return
Running and Spring Return 89 lb·in (10 N·m)
Torque
Rotation Range Adjustable from 30 to 90° CW or CCW with Optional
M9210-603 Adjustable Stop Kit; Mechanically Limited to 90°
Rotation Time AGx, GGx, HGx Models 150 Seconds for 0 to 89 lb·in (0 to 10 N·m) at All Operating Conditions; Independent of Load
Power On (Running) Bxx Models 24 to 57 Seconds for 0 to 89 lb·in (0 to 10 N·m) at All Operating Conditions; 35 Seconds
Nominal at Full Rated Load
Rotation Time AGx, GGx, HGx Models 26 Seconds for 0 to 89 lb·in (0 to 10 N·m) at Room Temperature
Power Off (Spring Returning) Bxx Models 11 to 15 Seconds for 0 to 89 lb·in (0 to 10 N·m) at Room Temperature;
35 Seconds Maximum for 0 to 89 lb·in (0 to 10 N·m) at -22°F (-30°C)
130 Seconds Maximum for 0 to 89 lb·in (0 to 10 N·m) at -40°F (-40°C)
Cycles 60,000 Full Stroke Cycles, 1,500,000 repositions
Audible Noise Rating Power On <40 dBA at 39-13/32 in. (1 m)
(AGx, HGx, GGx Models) (Running)
Power On <20 dBA at 39-13/32 in. (1 m)
(Holding)
Power Off <55 dBA at 39-13/32 in. (1 m)
(Spring
Returning)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.
Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2009 Johnson Controls, Inc. www.johnsoncontrols.com

4 of 5
M9210-xxx-3 Electric Spring Return Actuators (Continued)

M9210-xxx Electric Spring Return Actuators (Part 2 of 2)

Audible Noise Rating Power On <66 dBA at 39-13/32 in. (1 m)
(Bxx Models) (Running)
Power On <18 dBA at 39-13/32 in. (1 m)
(Holding)
Power Off <66 dBA at 39-13/32 in. (1 m)
(Spring
Returning)
Electrical Connections Actuator 48 in. (1.2 m) Halogen-Free Cable with 18 AWG (0.75 mm2) Wire Leads
(All Models)
Auxiliary Switches 48 in. (1.2 m) Halogen-Free Cable with 18 AWG (0.75 mm2) Wire Leads
(GGC Models)
Conduit Connections Integral Connectors for 3/8 in. (10 mm) Flexible Metal Conduit
Mechanical Connections Standard 1/2 to 3/4 in. or 12 to 19 mm Diameter Round Shafts, or
Shaft Clamp 3/8 and 1/2 in. or 10, 12, and 14 mm Square Shafts
Included with
Actuator
Optional 3/4 to 1-1/16 in. or 19 to 27 mm Diameter Round Shafts, or
M9210-600 5/8 and 3/4 in. or 16, 18, and 19 mm Square Shafts
Jackshaft
Coupler Kit
Aluminum Enclosure NEMA 2 (IP54) for All Mounting Orientations
Ambient Conditions Operating -40 to 131°F (-40 to 55°C); 90% RH Maximum, Noncondensing
Storage -85 to 185°F (-65 to 85°C); 95% RH Maximum, Noncondensing
Dimensions See Dimensions.
Compliance North America UL Listed, File E27734, CCN XAPX (United States) and XAPX7 (Canada)
Europe CE Mark, EMC Directive 89/336/EEC (M9210-xGA-3 Models)
CE Mark, Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC
(M9210-BDA-3 and M9210-xxC-3 Models)
Australia and New Zealand C-Tick Mark, Australia/NZ Emissions Compliant
(M9210-xGx-3 and M9210-BDx Models)
Shipping Weight xGx Models 6.4 lb (2.9 kg)
BAx and BDx Models 7.6 lb (3.5 kg)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.
Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2009 Johnson Controls, Inc. www.johnsoncontrols.com

5 of 5
 Code No. LIT-1900502
Issued January 28, 2008

FEC
Standard Control Panel Assembly Mounted in a 16 in. x 20 in.
Enclosure
Description Features
The 16 in. x 20 in. Field Equipment Controller • consistent layout for all standard control
(FEC) control panel is a pre-wired, panel solutions – simplifies installation and
preassembled standard control panel and commissioning
enclosure that contains an FEC digital • controller with screw terminals – provides
controller. Such a predesigned solution saves easily identifiable input/output points at the
both time and money. In addition, the controller
assembly may be tailored to a variety of • power supply with resettable circuit
common applications for additional savings. breaker and transformer – provides high-
The control panel is shipped complete, and low-voltage protection
mounted in a 16 in. x 20 in. steel enclosure. In • space and DIN rail reserved for future
addition to the controller(s), the assembly also component additions – allows easy 16 in. x 20 in. FEC Standard Control Panel
contains a power supply incorporating a 5 A upgrading to a standard-plus control panel Assembly and Enclosure
(PAKB00001FH0 shown, others similar)
circuit breaker, a 96 VA 120/24 VAC • prebuilt, prewired, and pretested in an
transformer, and two 120 VAC outlets. Noted ISO-9002 manufacturing facility – provides
models are provided with an integral display products of consistently high quality
on the face of the controller or a remote • UL 508A rated control panel and UL 50,
mounted display (MS-DIS1710-0), which is CSA approved enclosure – meets local
visible on the face of the panel. Space is and national code requirements for the
reserved in the panel along with a section of United States and Canada (cULus listed)
DIN rail to mount relays and/or transducers, if
desired. Repair Information
These control panels allow for direct wire If the FEC control panel assembly fails to
termination to the controller, making operate within its specifications, replace the
installation, commissioning, and servicing unit. For a replacement assembly, contact the
quicker and easier. nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Components Included with the FEC Standard Control Panel Assembly

Quantity Description
1 Enclosure: 16 in. W x 20 in. H x 6.62 in. D (406 mm W x 508 mm H x 168 mm D), Type 1, with slotted flush latch
1 MS-FEU1610-0, MS-FEU1620-0, MS-FEU2610-0, or MS-FEU2620-0 digital controller
1 MS-DIS1710-0 remote mount display (if applicable)
1 96 VA 120/24 VAC power supply with 5 A primary circuit protection and two 120 VAC outlets

Selection Chart
Product Code Number Description
PAKA00001FH0 MS-FEU1610-0 panel mounted in a 16 in. W x 20 in. H x 6.62 in. D Hoffman® enclosure
PAKA00001FH4 MS-FEU1610-0 panel mounted in a 16 in. W x 20 in. H x 6.62 in. D Hoffman enclosure with remote mount display
PAKB00001FH0 MS-FEU2610-0 panel mounted in a 16 in. W x 20 in. H x 6.62 in. D Hoffman enclosure
PAKB00001FH4 MS-FEU2610-0 panel mounted in a 16 in. W x 20 in. H x 6.62 in. D Hoffman enclosure with remote mount display
PAKD00001FH0 MS-FEU1620-0 panel mounted in a 16 in. W x 20 in. H x 6.62 in. D Hoffman enclosure with integral display
PAKE00001FH0 MS-FEU2620-0 panel mounted in a 16 in. W x 20 in. H x 6.62 in. D Hoffman enclosure with integral display

Technical Specifications
FEC Standard Control Panel Assembly Mounted in a 16 in. x 20 in. Enclosure
Terminals Controller mounted screw termination
Wire Size Ground wire: 14 AWG; Transformer wires: 16 AWG
Enclosure Rating Type 1
Finish ANSI 61 gray polyester powder coating (perforated panel and enclosure)
Ambient Operating Condition 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C)
10 to 90% RH
Dimensions 16 in. W x 20 in. H x 6.62 in. D (406 mm W x 508 mm H x 168 mm D)
(Width x Height x Depth)
Weight 50 lb (22.7 kg)
Ambient Storage Condition -40 to 176°F (-40 to 80°C)
5 to 95% RH
Agency Compliance UL 508A Rated (cULus listed); Enclosure UL 50 Rated, CSA Approved

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.
Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2008 Johnson Controls, Inc. www.johnsoncontrols.com

1 of 1
 Code No. LIT-1900503
Issued January 7, 2009

FEC/IOM
Standard Control Panel Assembly Mounted in a 20 in. x 24 in.
Enclosure
Description Features
The 20 in. x 24 in. Field Equipment Controller • consistent layout for all standard control
(FEC) and Input/Output Module (IOM) control panel solutions – simplifies installation and
panel is a pre-wired, preassembled standard commissioning
control panel and enclosure that contains an • power supply with resettable circuit breaker
FEC and/or IOM digital controller. Such a and transformer – provides high- and
predesigned solution saves both time and low-voltage protection
money. In addition, the assembly may be • space and DIN rail reserved for future
tailored to a variety of common applications component additions – allows easy
for additional savings. upgrading to a standard-plus control panel
The control panel is shipped complete, • prebuilt, pre-wired, and pretested in an
mounted in a 20 in. x 24 in. steel enclosure. In ISO-9002 manufacturing facility – provides
addition to the controller(s), the assembly also products of consistently high quality
contains a power supply incorporating a 5 A • UL 508A rated control panel and UL 50,
circuit breaker, a 96 VA 120/24 VAC Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
transformer, and two 120 VAC outlets; plus an approved enclosure – meets local and
optional second 96 VA 120/24 VAC national code requirements for the United
transformer is available. Noted models are States and Canada (cULus listed)
provided with an integral display on the face of • controller with color-coded and clearly
the controller or a remote mounted display labeled screw terminals – provides easily
(MS-DIS1710-0), which is visible on the face 20 in. x 24 in. FEC/IOM Standard Control
identifiable input/output points at the
of the panel. Space is reserved in the panel Panel Assembly and Enclosure
controller
along with a section of DIN rail to mount relays (PAKBJD002AH0 shown, others similar)
and/or transducers, if desired. Repair Information
These control panels allow for direct wire If the FEC/IOM control panel assembly fails to
termination to the controller, making operate within its specifications, replace the
installation, commissioning, and servicing unit. For a replacement assembly, contact the
quicker and easier. nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Components Included with the FEC/IOM Standard Control Panel Assembly

Quantity Description
1 Enclosure: 20 in. W x 24 in. H x 6.62 in. D (508 mm W x 610 mm H x 168 mm D), Type 1, with slotted flush latch
1 MS-FEU1610-0, MS-FEU2610-0, or MS-FEU2620-0 digital controller
1 MS-IOM1710-0, MS-IOM1720-0, MS-IOM3710-0, and/or MS-IOM4710-0 (if applicable)
1 MS-DIS1710-0 remote mount display (if applicable)
1 96 VA 120/24 VAC power supply with 5 A primary circuit protection and two 120 VAC outlets
1 96 VA 120/24 VAC transformer with secondary protection (if applicable)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.
Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2009 Johnson Controls, Inc. www.johnsoncontrols.com

1 of 2
Standard Control Panel Assembly Mounted in a 20 in. x 24 in. Enclosure (Continued)

Selection Chart
Product Code Number Description
PAKA00001AH0 MS-FEU1610-0 panel mounted in a 20 in. W x 24 in. H x 6.62 in. D Hoffman® enclosure
PAKAJA001AH0 MS-FEU1610-0 and MS-IOM1710-0 panel mounted in a 20 in. W x 24 in. H x 6.62 in. D Hoffman enclosure
PAKAJB002AH0 MS-FEU1610-0 and MS-IOM2710-0 panel mounted in a 20 in. W x 24 in. H x 6.62 in. D Hoffman enclosure with two 96 VA
transformers
PAKAJC002AH0 MS-FEU1610-0 and MS-IOM3710-0 panel mounted in a 20 in. W x 24 in. H x 6.62 in. D Hoffman enclosure with two 96 VA
transformers
PAKAJD002AH0 MS-FEU1610-0 and MS-IOU4710-0 panel mounted in a 20 in. W x 24 in. H x 6.62 in. D Hoffman enclosure with two 96 VA
transformers
PAKB00001AH0 MS-FEU2610-0 panel mounted in a 20 in. W x 24 in. H x 6.62 in. D Hoffman enclosure
PAKB00002AH0 MS-FEU2610-0 panel mounted in a 20 in. W x 24 in. H x 6.62 in. D Hoffman enclosure
with two 96 VA transformers
PAKB00001AH4 MS-FEU2610-0 panel mounted in a 20 in. W x 24 in. H x 6.62 in. D Hoffman enclosure with remote mount display
PAKBJA001AH0 MS-FEU2610-0 and MS-IOM1710-0 panel mounted in a 20 in. W x 24 in. H x 6.62 in. D Hoffman enclosure with one 96 VA
transformer
PAKBJB002AH0 MS-FEU2610-0 and MS-IOM2710-0 panel mounted in a 20 in. W x 24 in. H x 6.62 in. D Hoffman enclosure with two 96 VA
transformers
PAKBJC002AH0 MS-FEU2610-0 and MS-IOM3710-0 panel mounted in a 20 in. W x 24 in. H x 6.62 in. D Hoffman enclosure with two 96 VA
transformers
PAKBJD002AH0 MS-FEU2610-0 and MS-IOU4710-0 panel mounted in a 20 in. W x 24 in. H x 6.62 in. D Hoffman enclosure with two 96 VA
transformers
PAKE00001AH0 MS-FEU2620-0 panel mounted in a 20 in. W x 24 in. H x 6.62 in. D Hoffman enclosure with integral display

Technical Specifications
FEC/IOM Standard Control Panel Assembly Mounted in a 20 in. x 24 in. Enclosure
Terminals Controller mounted screw termination
Wire Size Ground wire: 14 AWG; Transformer wires: 16 AWG
Enclosure Rating Type 1
Finish ANSI 61 gray polyester powder coating (perforated panel and enclosure)
Ambient Operating Condition 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C)
10 to 90% RH
Dimensions 20 in. W x 24 in. H x 6.62 in. D (508 mm W x 610 mm H x 168 mm D)
(Width x Height x Depth)
Weight 50 lb (22.7 kg)
Ambient Storage Condition -40 to 176°F (-40 to 80°C)
5 to 95% RH
Agency Compliance UL 508A Rated (cULus listed); Enclosure UL 50 Rated, CSA Approved

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.
Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2009 Johnson Controls, Inc. www.johnsoncontrols.com

2 of 2
 Functional Devices, Inc. Office: (765) 883-5538

Functional RIB ®
310 South Union Street
Russiaville, IN 46979
Sales:
Fax:
(800) 888-5538
(765) 883-7505
Devices, Inc. www.functionaldevices.com Email: sales@functionaldevices.com
Manufacturing quality products in the United States of America since 1969

RIBU1C Enclosed Relay 10 Amp SPDT with 10-30 Vac/dc/120 Vac Coil
Contact Ratings:
10 Amp Resistive @ 120-277 Vac
10 Amp Resistive @ 28 Vdc
480 VA Pilot Duty @ 240-277 Vac Wht/Blk Blu
480 VA Ballast @ 277 Vac 120 Vac N/C
600 Watt Tungsten @ 120 Vac N/O
240 Watt Tungsten @ 120 Vac N/C
1/3 HP for N/O @ 120-240 Vac
1/6 HP for N/C @ 120-240 Vac
1/4 HP for N/O @ 277 Vac
Wht/Blu Yel
c c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c c
c c c c c 1/8 HP for N/C @ 277 Vac
10-30 Vac/dc Comm
c c c c c c

Functional Devices, Inc. A600D 2006 MADE IN USA

Coil Current:
# Relays & Contact Type:One (1) SPDT Continuous Duty Coil 30 mA @ 10 Vac 12 mA @ 10 Vdc Wht/Yel Org
Expected Relay Life:10 million cycles minimum mechanical 32 mA @ 12 Vac 14 mA @ 12 Vdc Comm N/O
Operating Temperature: -30 to 140° F 42 mA @ 24 Vac 16 mA @ 24 Vdc
Operate Time: 20mS 50 mA @ 30 Vac 18 mA @ 30 Vdc
Relay Status:LED On = Activated 25 mA @ 120 Vac
Dimensions: 1.70” x 2.80” x 1.50” with .50” NPT nipple
Wires:16”, 600V Rated
Approvals:UL Listed, UL916, UL864, UL924, C-UL RIBU1C-RD RIBU1C-N4
Coil Voltage Input:
California State Fire Marshal, CE » Red housing » NEMA 4X housing
10-30 Vac/dc ; 120 Vac ; 50-60 Hz
Housing Rating: Plenum, NEMA 1 Drop Out = 2.1 Vac / 2.8 Vdc
Gold Flash: Yes Pull In = 9 Vac / 10 Vdc
Override Switch: No

NOTES
 FANs 216, 125, 1628.3
Product/Technical Bulletin TE-6001
Issue Date 0897

TE-6001 Hardware Assemblies

for TE-6000 Temperature Elements

TE-6001-2
TE-6001 Hardware Assemblies are used with
TE-6000 Temperature Elements in a wide variety of
TE-6001-3
applications. Hardware and elements are ordered
TE-6001-1
separately and field assembled, depending on the
application. Refer to TE-6000 Temperature Sensing TE-6001-11
Elements Product Bulletin for a description of available
temperature sensors and TE-6100 Series Temperature
Sensors and Completed Sensor/Hardware Assemblies
Product/Technical Bulletin for available factory
assembled units.
TE-6001-6
TE-6001-4 TE-6001-7

Figure 1: TE-6001 Hardware Assemblies

Features and Benefits

❑ Ease of Mounting Some assemblies include plastic clips that
TE-6000 temperature elements snap easily into

❑ Standard All Metal Meets code requirements for metal

Construction electrical boxes

❑ Identical Replacements for Permits maintenance of consistent installation

Many Existing Installations appearance

© 1997 Johnson Controls, Inc. 1

Part No. 24-4034-34, Rev. C
Code No. LIT-216300
A pplications
TE-6001-1 TE-6001-2
The TE-6001-1 Duct Temperature Element Holder is The TE-6001-2 is a metal housing used with a
used with TE-6000 elements in duct insertion TE-6000 Temperature Element in applications
applications. The TE-6001-1 is designed to hold requiring outside air temperature sensing. A factory
one or two temperature sensors. A handi-box is mounted plastic clip is provided to hold the TE-6000
supplied with the element holder. sensor in place.

1 -5/16
33
9-3 /1 6
2 33
4 -3 /16 7/8
10 6 22

1 -5/1 6
2 -3/1 6 1 -1/4 33
55 32

Figure 2: TE-6001-1 Duct Insertion Element Holder 4-1 /2

with Handi-box Dimensions (in./mm) 11 4

Figure 4: TE-6001-2 Dimensions (in./mm)

K no cko ut for
1/2 in. C on du it
(Top a nd B o tto m )
TE-6001-3
13 /1 6
2 0.5 The TE-6001-3 Handi-box (includes packing nut and
fittings) is used with WZ-1000-2, -4, and -5
1 -3/32
2 7.5 Immersion Wells to house TE-6000 elements in well
K no cko uts for
2 -3/1 6 1/2 in. C o nd uit insertion applications.
2-1 /8
55 (B o th S id es)
1 -1/16 54 1
1 3/16
1 7/32 27 20 .5 25 .4
1 3 .5
1 -3/8 1/2 1 4 N P T
17 /32
35 13
13 .5
1 3/1 6 13 /1 6
2 0.5 2 0.5 6-1 /2
1 -1/1 6 1/2
16 5
27 13
1 3/16 13 /16
20 .5 5-1 /8
2 0 .5
4 -3/1 6 13 0
106

1 /4 H oles (4 )
6
5/8
Figure 3: TE-6001-1 and -3 Dimensions (in./mm) 16

Figure 5: WZ-1000-2 and -4

Dimensions (in./mm)

2 TE-6001 Hardware Assemblies for TE-6000 Temperature Elements Product/Technical Bulletin

 7/8
22
Table 1: T-4000 Plastic Covers for
TE-6001-4 Assemblies
2 -5/16
59 Product
Code Description
4 -11 /1 6
11 9 1 /2 in .
Number
14 NPT Horizontal
T-4000-2139 without Setpoint Window or
19 /6 4 Thermometer, with Johnson Controls
2 -3/8
7 .5 Logo, Silver Faceplate
60
T-4000-2140 without Setpoint Window, with F/C
Thermometer and Johnson Controls
3/8
9.5
Logo, Silver Faceplate
T-4000-2639 Concealed Setpoint, without
Figure 6: WZ-1000-5 Dimensions (in./mm) Thermometer, with Johnson Controls
Logo, Gold Faceplate
TE-6001-4 T-4000-2640 Concealed Setpoint, with
Thermometer and Johnson Controls
The TE-6001-4 Temperature Element Holder is used Logo, Gold Faceplate
with TE-6000 sensors in room temperature sensing Horizontal or Vertical
applications. The TE-6001-4 can hold up to
T-4000-2138 without Setpoint Window,
two temperature sensors. A mounting bracket and Thermometer, or Johnson Controls
wallplate adaptor are supplied. Logo, Silver Faceplate
Note: A T-4000 cover is required and must be Vertical
ordered separately. (See Table 1 for T-4000-2144 without Setpoint Window or
ordering information.) Thermometer, with Johnson Controls
1 /1 6 in. Logo, Silver Faceplate
A lle n-h e ad S crew
(E a ch S ide ) TE-6001-5
The TE-6001-5 Dew Point Sensor Kit is used to seal
a TE-6000 1000 ohm sensor inside a Foxboro 2761
2-3 /32 2 -3/4 Dewcel. The kit consists of a packing nut adaptor,
53 70 packing gland, washer, and packing nut.

3 -1 /8
TE-6001-6
79 1 -1 3/1 6 1/8
46 3 TE-6001-6 Adhesive Mounting Pads are used to attach
C le ara nce : A llo w
3-1 /2 in . (8 9 m m ) ea ch TE-6000 sensors to T-4100 and T-4110 Pneumatic
side fo r cove r scre w Room Thermostats. This provides a means of
rem o va l w ith electronic temperature indication. (See Figure 1.)
T-4 00 0 A llen w re nch.
4-1 /2
11 4 TE-6001-7
Figure 7: TE-6001-4 Dimensions (in./mm) TE-6001-7 Mounting Clips are used to attach
TE-6000 sensors to single setpoint T-4002 and
T-4003 thermostats, H-4100 humidistats, and
H-5100 humidity transmitters. This provides a
means of electronic temperature indication on
pneumatic room devices. (See Figure 1.)

TE-6001 Hardware Assemblies for TE-6000 Temperature Elements Product/Technical Bulletin 3

TE-6001-8
The TE-6001-8 Mounting Bracket is used with
1 3/4
TE-6100 and TE-6300 averaging sensors to maintain 19
1 /2 2 5
the minimum bend radius recommended for these 13
sensors. It mounts to ductwork with a single sheet 1 /2
metal screw. 13
1
25

1-1 /2
1 /2 38
13

3/4
19
1-1 /2
38

Figure 10: Hole Pattern for Installation

of TE-6001 -1 and -11 (in./mm)

TE-6001-961 and -962

The TE-6001-961 Momentary Pushbutton Switch is
designed for use with the C210A-1 VAV Controller or
Figure 8: TE-6001-8 Dimensions (in./mm) the C260A-1 Heat Pump Controller.
The TE-6001-962 Maintained Toggle Switch is used
TE-6001-11 with either networked or standalone controllers to
place the zone controller in the occupied mode. The
The TE-6001-11 Duct Temperature Element Holder TE-6001-962 is wired directly to the unoccupied
is used with TE-6000 sensors. It has a rigid terminal on the controller.
aluminum support that extends in the duct to hold
one or two TE-6000 temperature sensing elements. TE-6001-961 and -962 switches are used with either
the TE-6100-960 or TE-6100-961 room temperature
sensing assemblies, which must be ordered separately.

M ounting
TE-6001-1 and -11
The TE-6001-1 and -11 assemblies should be
Figure 9: TE-6001-11 Dimensions (in./mm) attached to ducts with No. 6 sheet metal screws.
Both assemblies have factory mounted plastic clips
that TE-6000 temperature elements easily snap into.
Route element leads through the bracket opening.

TE-6001-2
The TE-6001-2 should be mounted where the effects
of sunlight and radiant heat are minimal. The
housing is threaded to fit 1/2 inch rigid conduit.
Seal-off fittings must be used to prevent
condensation on the element or in the housing.

4 TE-6001 Hardware Assemblies for TE-6000 Temperature Elements Product/Technical Bulletin

TE-6001-3
The TE-6001-3 packing nut and fittings are used with
WZ-1000-2 and -5 wells. These wells are factory
filled with thermal compound for maximum
conductivity.

IMPORTANT: To prevent condensation of 1 /2 in . N P S

H an di-b ox
moisture in the well and failure of S tar N ut
the element, apply plumber’s (S cre w tigh t
a ga in st A d ap to r
putty or some other suitable th rea d relie f
sealant (such as silicon rubber o n a da p tor.)
sealant) around the packing nut G rey S p a ce r
adaptor as well as the point
where the two sensor leads pass
through the adaptor.
T E -6 00 0
Te m pe ra ture
Note: See Figures 11 and 12 for proper positioning S en sor
of the TE-6000 sensor. S et S crew s
(Tig hte n on to
m a tin g groo ve
in ad ap to r.)
P a cking N ut
Im m e rsio n W e ll
W Z -10 00 -5
W a sh er
Figure 12: TE-6001-3 and WZ-1000-5 Assembly
P a ckin g Glan d (with TE-6000 Sensor)
P a cking N ut
A da ptor
TE-6001-4
Mount the TE-6001-4 assembly on a wall where air
is free to circulate around the elements, but away
from nonrepresentative air conditions such as drafts
or heat radiation. Mount the assembly 5 to 6 feet
TE -6 00 0 (1.5 to 1.8 m) above the floor on a standard electrical
S e nsor H a nd i-b ox wallbox. Two factory mounted plastic clips are
provided to hold the TE-6000 elements. Route
S pa nn er N ut element leads through the bracket opening. (See
(S crew tig ht ag ainst
thre ad re lief on Figure 13.)
p a ckin g nu t a da ptor.) W e ll A sse m b ly
W Z -10 00 -2 or -4

Figure 11: TE-6001-3 and WZ-1000-2, -4 Assembly

(with TE-6000 Sensor)

TE-6001 Hardware Assemblies for TE-6000 Temperature Elements Product/Technical Bulletin 5

 N o . 6 -32 x 1 /4 in .
Fla t-h ea d S crew s*

TE -6 0 01 -4 E le m en t
H o lde r w ith
TE -6 00 0 E le m en t C on du it B ox

M o un tin g B ra cket*
T-4 00 0
C ove r

W a llpla te A d ap to r*

N o. 6-32 x 7/8 in.

P an -h ea d S crew s* *S up plie d w ith TE -60 01 -4

Figure 13: TE-6001-4 Assembly Mounting Detail

TE-6001-5
To install the TE-6001-5 Dew Point Sensor Kit:
! CAUTION: Equipment Damage Hazard.
Do not immediately insert the
1. Moisten the Dewcel element with lithium chloride TE-6000 sensor into the Dewcel
salt upon initial installation or after washing of element. Temperatures in the
the element. Dewcel cavity may initially rise
2. Install the Dewcel in the duct, connect to above the upper ambient
VQ-5000 power supply, and wait at least temperature limit of the
20 minutes for the Dewcel to stabilize. TE-6000 sensor, 250°F (121°C),
as the Dewcel attempts to reach
3. Install the TE-6000 sensor as shown in equilibrium temperature.
Figure 14.
TE -6 00 0 -10 0
Tem pe ra ture S en so r

P a ckin g N ut A d ap to r*
P a ckin g G la nd *
W ash er*
D e w cel E lem e nt
P a cking N u t*

*A ll a re pa rt of
TE -60 00 kit.

W h ite L ea ds
of TE -60 00 P o w er S u pp ly
L e ad s

Figure 14: TE-6001-5 Foxboro Dewcel Assembly

6 TE-6001 Hardware Assemblies for TE-6000 Temperature Elements Product/Technical Bulletin

TE-6001-6 TE-6001-961 and -962
A TE-6001-6 Adhesive Mounting Pad is used to The TE-6001-961 and -962 are furnished with a
attach a TE-6000 sensor to a T-4100 thermostat. No. 6-32 x 1/8 in. pan-head screw for mounting the
When mounting, make certain that the sensor does switches to the TE-6100-960 or -961. (See
not restrict the setpoint adjustment. Figure 15 for proper positioning of the TE-6001-961
and -962.) Depressing the pushbutton on the
On T-4110 thermostats, affix the sensor on the
TE-6001-961 connects blue to white/yellow.
mounting plate or on the aspirator cover if an
aspirator is used. Pushing the TE-6001-962 toggle switch to the right
(front view) connects white/yellow to blue, and
TE-6001-7 pushing the switch to the left connects blue to
white/orange.
The TE-6001-7 Mounting Clips snap onto a
pneumatic controller on the side opposite the dial (on
side opposite test point for H-5100). (See Figure 1.)
Pull the TE-6000 element leads around the side of W iring
the instrument and through the mounting bracket
opening. If a terminal connector is used on the
mounting bracket, route the leads through the slot at
! CAUTION: Equipment Damage Hazard.
the bottom of the connector or through the unused Check all wiring connections
hole of the connector if a 3-pipe controller is not before applying power to the
used. If a wallbox is used, the leads may also be run system. Short circuited or
through a spare hole in the bracket itself. improperly connected wires
will result in permanent
damage to the equipment.
TE-6001-8
Attach the TE-6001-8 Mounting Bracket to ducts with IMPORTANT: Make all wiring connections in
a No. 6 sheet metal screw. (See Figure 8.) accordance with the National
Electrical Code and all local
regulations.

Th e T E -6 00 1-96 1 (sh ow n )
o r TE -60 01 -9 62 S w itch K it fo r use N o . 6 -3 2 x 1 /4 in .
w ith TE -61 00 -96 0 an d -96 1 F la t-h ea d S crew s
h as to b e ord e red sep ara te ly.

C o nd uit B ox
Room
S e nsin g E le m en t
A sse m bly
M ou ntin g B racket
T-4 00 0
C ove r
W a llplate A da pto r

N o . 6 -32 x 7 /8 in .
P a n -he ad S cre w s

Figure 15: TE-6100-960 and -961 Mounting Detail

(with TE-6001-961 Switch)

TE-6001 Hardware Assemblies for TE-6000 Temperature Elements Product/Technical Bulletin 7

Table 2: Dewcel to Dew Point Table 3: Models
Temperatures TE-6001- Description
Dewcel Resistance Dew Point
1 Duct Temperature Element Holder
Temperature (ohms) Temperature
with Handi-box
°F °C °F °C 2 Housing for Outside Air Temperature
Sensing Element
93 34 1069 30 -1
3 Handi-box, Packing Nut, and Fittings
99 37 1087 35 2
for Use with WZ-1000 Wells
106 41 1108 40 4
4 Single/Dual Element Holder for TE-6000
112 44 1127 45 7 Elements in Room Temperature Sensing
119 48 1149 50 10 Applications
127 53 1174 55 13 5 Dew Point Sensor Kit
134 57 1196 60 16 6 Ten Adhesive Mounting Pads for Use with
T-4100, T-4110
141 61 1219 65 18
149 65 1245 70 21
7 Ten Clips for Use with T-4002/4003 and
H-4100/5100
156 69 1268 75 24
8 Mounting Bracket for Use with TE-6100 and
163 73 1291 80 27 TE-6300 Averaging Sensors
171 77 1318 85 29 11 Duct Temperature Element Holder
179 82 1345 90 32 (Less Handi-box)
188 87 1375 95 35 961 Momentary Pushbutton Switch
196 91 1403 100 38 962 Maintained Toggle Switch

Specifications
Product TE-6001 Hardware Assemblies for TE-6000 Temperature Elements
Shipping Weight TE-6001-1: 1.3 lb (0.590 kg)
TE-6001-2: 0.5 lb (0.227 kg)
TE-6001-3: 1.0 lb (0.454 kg)
TE-6001-4: 0.5 lb (0.227 kg)
TE-6001-5: 0.3 lb (0.136 kg)
TE-6001-6: 0.2 lb (0.091 kg)
TE-6001-7: 0.2 lb (0.091 kg)
TE-6001-8: 0.8 lb (0.363 kg)
TE-6001-11: 0.7 lb (0.318 kg)
TE-6001-961: 0.5 lb (0.227 kg)
TE-6001-962: 0.2 lb (0.091 kg)
The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For application at conditions beyond these specifications,
consult the local Johnson Controls office. Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products.

Controls Group
507 E. Michigan Street
P.O. Box 423
Milwaukee, WI 53201 Printed in U.S.A.

8 TE-6001 Hardware Assemblies for TE-6000 Temperature Elements Product/Technical Bulletin

 Code No. LIT-1900621
Issued October 8, 2009

TE-6300 Series
TE-6300W Temperature Sensor Thermowells
Description 4.68
Thermowells are used in conjunction with 4.49
remote probe style temperature sensors
2.38
where thermowell insertion into a vessel or TE-6300W-102
container to sense temperature is required.
The TE-6300W thermowells are available in
stainless steel, brass body and copper bulb, C .500
and direct mount (no adapter) style.
O.260
Features 1/2 - 14 NPT THREAD
.875 HEX
1/4 - 20 SET SCREW
• full line of thermowells and probe style
temperature sensing devices
2.375 2.30
• stainless steel thermowells offer maximum
corrosion resistance
• stainless steel thermowells comply with
TE-6300W-101
Canadian Registration Number (CRN) TE-6300W-103 .360 ± .010
pressure vessel rating (.300 ID) O.260 (-101)
• brass body and copper bulb style offer O.530 (-103)
quicker response times .875 HEX
• direct mount (no adapter) style offers faster
installation times 1/2 -14 NPT THREAD 1/4-20 SET SCREW
• supports retro-fit application that require
NPT adapters

A .75

C .625 TE-6300W-110

1/2 - 14 NPT THREAD

A 1/2 - 14 NPT THREAD
O.260
1.125 HEX

TE-6300W Series Thermowell Dimensions

Applications
Thermowell Model Number Thermowell Description Recommended Sensor
TE-6300W-1011 6 inch (152 mm) thermowell, brass with copper bulb, direct-mount TE-63xAM-2
TE-6300W-102 6 inch (152 mm) thermowell, stainless steel, direct-mount TE-63xAM-2
TE-6300W-1031 6 inch (152 mm) thermowell, brass with copper bulb, requires sensor with adapter TE-63xAM-1 (sensor includes adapter)
TE-6300W-110 8 inch (203 mm) thermowell, stainless steel, requires sensor with adapter, threaded TE-63x2M-1 (sensor includes adapter)
1. Model includes installed Thermal conductive compound.

Accessories
Accessory Model Number Thermowell Description Recommended Sensor
F-1000-182 Thermal conductive compound, 8 ounce container 8 ounce tube
TE-6300-611 1/2-14 NPT Threaded adapter, brass for TE-6300W-110 used with 8 inch thermowell
TE-6300-612 Threadless adapter, brass for TE-6300W-103 used with 6 inch thermowell

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.
Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2009 Johnson Controls, Inc. www.johnsoncontrols.com

1 of 1
 Code No. LIT-1900229
Issued October 22, 2007

VG1000 Series Three-Way, Plated Brass Trim, NPT End

Connections Ball Valves with Non-Spring Return Electric Actuators
Description Features
VG1000 Series Ball Valves are designed to • forged brass body — provides 580 psig
regulate the flow of hot or chilled water and, for static pressure rating
some models, low pressure steam in • 200 psi closeoff pressure rating — provides
response to the demand of a controller in tight shutoff
Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning • graphite-reinforced
(HVAC) systems. Available in sizes Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) seats —
1/2 through 2 in. (DN15 through DN50), this include 15% graphite-reinforced ball seals,
family of two- and three-way forged brass providing better wear resistance
valves is factory or field mounted to • 500:1 rangeability — provides accurate
Johnson Controls® VA9104, M9106, M9109, control under all load conditions
and M9100 Series Non-Spring Return and • chrome-plated brass ball and stem
VA2202, M9206, and M9210 Series Spring
assembly standard — handles both chilled
Return Electric Actuators for on/off, floating, or VG1000 Series Three Way, Spring
and hot water applications with a fluid
proportional control. temperature range of 23 to 203°F Return, Plated Brass Ball and Stem Ball
Refer to the VG1000 Series Forged Brass (-5 to 95°C) Valve Assemblies without End Switches
Ball Valves Product Bulletin (LIT-977132) for
important product application information. Repair Information
If the VG1000 Series Ball Valve fails to
operate within its specifications, replace the
unit. For a replacement valve, contact the
nearest Johnson Controls representative.

Selection Charts
Three-Way Non-Spring Return without Switches
Valve Size, in. Cv Closeoff AC 24 V
psig On/Off (Floating) On/Off (Floating) 0 to 10 VDC Proportional
without Timeout1 with Timeout
VA9104-AGA-xS VA9104-IGA-xS VA9104-GGA-xS
M9106-AGA-2 M9106-IGA-2 M9106-GGA-2
M9109-AGA-2 M9109-GGA-2
VG1841AD 1/2 1.2/0.72 200 VG1841AD+9T4AGA3 VG1841AD+9T4IGA3 VG1841AD+9T4GGA3
2 3 3
VG1841AE 1.9/1.2 VG1841AE+9T4AGA VG1841AE+9T4IGA VG1841AE+9T4GGA3
VG1841AF 2.9/1.92 VG1841AF+9T4AGA3 VG1841AF+9T4IGA3 VG1841AF+9T4GGA3
VG1841AG 4.7/2.92 VG1841AG+9T4AGA3 VG1841AG+9T4IGA3 VG1841AG+9T4GGA3
VG1841AL 7.4/4.72 VG1841AL+9T4AGA3 VG1841AL+9T4IGA3 VG1841AL+9T4GGA3
3 3
VG1841AN 11.7/5.8 VG1841AN+9T4AGA VG1841AN+9T4IGA VG1841AN+9T4GGA3
2 3 3
VG1841BG 3/4 4.7/2.9 200 VG1841BG+9T4AGA VG1841BG+9T4IGA VG1841BG+9T4GGA3
VG1841BL 7.4/4.72 VG1841BL+9T4AGA3 VG1841BL+9T4IGA3 VG1841BL+9T4GGA3
VG1841BN 11.7/5.8 VG1841BN+9T4AGA3 VG1841BN+9T4IGA3 VG1841BN+9T4GGA3
2 3 3
VG1841CL 1 7.4/4.7 200 VG1841CL+9T4AGA VG1841CL+9T4IGA VG1841CL+9T4GGA3
VG1841CN 11.7/7.42 VG1841CN+9T4AGA3 VG1841CN+9T4IGA3 VG1841CN+9T4GGA3
VG1841CP 18.7/9.4 VG1841CP+9T4AGA3 VG1841CP+9T4IGA3 VG1841CP+9T4GGA3
VG1841DN 1-1/4 11.7/7.42 200 VG1841DN+906AGA VG1841DN+906IGA VG1841DN+906GGA
VG1841DP 18.7/11.72 VG1841DP+906AGA VG1841DP+906IGA VG1841DP+906GGA
VG1841DR 29.2/14.6 VG1841DR+906AGA VG1841DR+906IGA VG1841DR+906GGA
VG1841EP 1-1/2 18.7/11.72 200 VG1841EP+906AGA VG1841EP+906IGA VG1841EP+906GGA
VG1841ER 29.2/18.72 VG1841ER+906AGA VG1841ER+906IGA VG1841ER+906GGA
VG1841ES 46.8/23.4 VG1841ES+906AGA VG1841ES+906IGA VG1841ES+906GGA
VG1841FR 2 29.2/18.72 200 VG1841FR+909AGA ––– VG1841FR+909GGA
VG1841FS 46.8/29.22 VG1841FS+909AGA ––– VG1841FS+909GGA
VG1841FT 73.7/36.8 VG1841FT+909AGA ––– VG1841FT+909GGA
1. To avoid excessive wear or drive time on the motor for the AGx models, use a controller or software that provides a timeout function to remove the signal at the
end of rotation (stall).
2. Cv has a characterizing disk.
3. Code numbers shown are for a VA9104-xGA-3S actuator with M3 screw terminals. To specify a 48-in. plenum-rated cable, change the 9T4 to 9A4 in the code
number for a VA9104-xGA-2S actuator. For example, VG1841AD+9T4AGA becomes VG1841AD+9A4AGA.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.
Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2007 Johnson Controls, Inc. www.johnsoncontrols.com

1 of 3
VG1000 Series Three-Way, Plated Brass Trim, NPT End Connections Ball Valves with
Non-Spring Return Electric Actuators (Continued)

Three-Way Non-Spring Return with Two Switches

Valve Size, in. Cv Closeoff AC 24 V
psig On/Off (Floating) On/Off (Floating) 0 to 10 VDC Proportional
without Timeout1 with Timeout
M9106-AGC-2 M9106-IGC-2 M9106-GGC-2
M9109-AGC-2 M9109-GGC-2
VG1841AD 1/2 1.2/0.72 200 VG1841AD+906AGC VG1841AD+906IGC VG1841AD+906GGC
VG1841AE 1.9/1.22 VG1841AE+906AGC VG1841AE+906IGC VG1841AE+906GGC
VG1841AF 2.9/1.92 VG1841AF+906AGC VG1841AF+906IGC VG1841AF+906GGC
VG1841AG 4.7/2.92 VG1841AG+906AGC VG1841AG+906IGC VG1841AG+906GGC
VG1841AL 7.4/4.72 VG1841AL+906AGC VG1841AL+906IGC VG1841AL+906GGC
VG1841AN 11.7/5.8 VG1841AN+906AGC VG1841AN+906IGC VG1841AN+906GGC
VG1841BG 3/4 4.7/2.92 200 VG1841BG+906AGC VG1841BG+906IGC VG1841BG+906GGC
VG1841BL 7.4/4.72 VG1841BL+906AGC VG1841BL+906IGC VG1841BL+906GGC
VG1841BN 11.7/5.8 VG1841BN+906AGC VG1841BN+906IGC VG1841BN+906GGC
VG1841CL 1 7.4/4.72 200 VG1841CL+906AGC VG1841CL+906IGC VG1841CL+906GGC
VG1841CN 11.7/7.42 VG1841CN+906AGC VG1841CN+906IGC VG1841CN+906GGC
VG1841CP 18.7/9.4 VG1841CP+906AGC VG1841CP+906IGC VG1841CP+906GGC
VG1841DN 1-1/4 11.7/7.42 200 VG1841DN+906AGC VG1841DN+906IGC VG1841DN+906GGC
VG1841DP 18.7/11.72 VG1841DP+906AGC VG1841DP+906IGC VG1841DP+906GGC
VG1841DR 29.2/14.6 VG1841DR+906AGC VG1841DR+906IGC VG1841DR+906GGC
VG1841EP 1-1/2 18.7/11.72 200 VG1841EP+906AGC VG1841EP+906IGC VG1841EP+906GGC
VG1841ER 29.2/18.72 VG1841ER+906AGC VG1841ER+906IGC VG1841ER+906GGC
VG1841ES 46.8/23.4 VG1841ES+906AGC VG1841ES+906IGC VG1841ES+906GGC
VG1841FR 2 29.2/18.72 200 VG1841FR+909AGC ––– VG1841FR+909GGC
VG1841FS 46.8/29.22 VG1841FS+909AGC ––– VG1841FS+909GGC
VG1841FT 73.7/36.8 VG1841FT+909AGC ––– VG1841FT+909GGC
1. To avoid excessive wear or drive time on the motor for the AGx models use a controller or software that provides a timeout function to remove the signal at the
end of rotation (stall).
2. Cv has a characterizing disk.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.
Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2007 Johnson Controls, Inc. www.johnsoncontrols.com

2 of 3
VG1000 Series Three-Way, Plated Brass Trim, NPT End Connections Ball Valves with
Non-Spring Return Electric Actuators (Continued)

Technical Specifications
VG1000 Three-Way, Plated Brass Trim Ball Valves with Non-Spring Return Electric Actuators
Service1 Hot Water, Chilled Water, and 50/50 Glycol Solutions for HVAC Systems
Fluid Temperature Limits Water 23 to 203°F (-5 to 95°C)
Steam Not Rated for Steam Service
Valve Body Pressure/Temperature Water 580 psig (3,999 kPa) (PN40)
Rating
Steam 15 psig (103 kPa) Saturated Steam
Maximum Closeoff Pressure 200 psig (1,378 kPa)
Maximum Recommended Operating Pressure Drop 50 psi Maximum Differential Pressure for Valves with Characterized Flow Control Disk and
30 psi Maximum for Quiet Service Ball Valves
Flow Characteristics Three-Way Equal Percentage Flow Characteristics of In-line Port A (Coil) and
Linear Flow Characteristics of Angle Port B (Bypass)
Rangeability2 Greater than 500:1
Minimum Ambient Operating Temperature -4°F (-20°C)
Maximum Ambient VA9104 and M9104 with 140°F (60°C): VA9104 and M9104 Series Non-Spring Return Actuators
Operating Temperature3 (Limited by M9000-550 linkage only
the Actuator and Linkage) M9000-520 Linkage 125°F (52°C): M9106 and M9109 Series Non-Spring Return Actuators

Leakage 0.01% of Maximum Flow per ANSI/FCI 70-2, Class 4

1% of Maximum Flow for Three-Way Bypass Port
End Connections National Pipe Thread (NPT)
Materials Body Forged Brass
Ball Chrome Plated Brass
Blowout-Proof Stem Nickel Plated Brass
Seats Graphite-Reinforced PTFE with Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer (EPDM) O-Ring
Backing
Stem Seals EPDM Double O-Rings
Characterizing Disk Amodel® As-1145hs Polyphthalamide Resin
1. Proper water treatment is recommended; refer to the VDI 2035 Standard.
2. Rangeability is defined as the ratio of maximum controllable flow to minimum controllable flow.
3. In steam applications, install the valve with the stem horizontal to the piping and wrap the valve and piping with insulation.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.
Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2007 Johnson Controls, Inc. www.johnsoncontrols.com

3 of 3
 Code No. LIT-1922175
Issued July 16, 2009

Series Y63, Y64, Y65, Y66, and Y69

Transformers
Description Features
The Series Y63, Y64, Y65, Y66, and Y69 • split-bobbin design—provides best primary/
Transformers provide 24 VAC power for loads secondary isolation
of 40 VA through 300 VA. These transformers • multi-tap primaries—reduce stocking
are designed for use on digital controllers, gas requirements and offer application
controls, ignition systems, motor actuators, flexibility
staging controls, and most other 24 VAC • choice of foot, plate, or conduit hub
Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning, and mounting—provides mounting flexibility
Refrigeration (HVACR) control systems. • choice of primary voltages—meets a wide
The Y6x Series meets the requirements of UL range of power requirements from 24 VAC
1585, UL 506, and CSA C22.2 No. 66, through 480 VAC
providing compliance in both the United States • color-coded lead wires—provide simplicity
and Canada. The Y63, Y64, Y65, and Y66 and standardization Y65 Series Transformer
transformers are listed as Class 2 • cULus listed or cURus recognized—meets
transformers (UL 1585, CSA C22.2 No. 66). US and Canadian requirements for Class 2 Repair Information
The Y69 is listed as a general purpose transformers (Y63, Y64, Y65, and Y66) and Do not make any field repairs to transformers.
transformer (UL 506, CSA C22.2 No. 66). general purpose transformers (Y69) For a replacement transformer, contact the
• built-in, easy-reset circuit breakers— nearest Johnson Controls® distributor or
eliminate replacement time and cost sales representative.
caused by burn-out (Y63, Y64, Y66, and
Y69)
• open frame Y65 models—serve as ideal
models when end bells are not required

Technical Specifications
Series Y63, Y64, Y65, Y66, Y69 Transformers
Input Power Requirements 24–480 VAC at 60 Hz
Full Load Secondary Voltage 23.5 VAC (Nominal)
Open Circuit Secondary Voltage (No Load) 27.0 VAC (Nominal)
Full Load Secondary VA Rating Series Volt-Amperes
Y63 50 VA
Y64 92 VA
Y65 40 VA
Y66 75 VA
Y69 300 VA
Finish End bells, frame, feet, and mounting plates are corrosion resistant
Ambient Operating Temperature -40 to 104°F (-40 to 40°C)
Ambient Storage Temperature -40 to 140°F (-40 to 60°C)
Shipping Weight Y63 3.0 lb/1.4 kg
Y64 4.0 lb/1.8 kg
Y65 2.0 lb/0.9 kg
Y66 3.0 lb/1.4 kg
Y69 11.0 lb/5.0 kg
Agency Compliance UL Listed Y63, Y64, Y65, Y66; File E95575, CCN’s XOKV (US) and XOKV7 (Canada)
UL Recognized Y63, Y64, Y65, Y66; File E95575, CCN’s XOKV2 (US) and XOKV8 (Canada)
UL Listed Y69; File E95138, CCN’s XPTQ (US) and XPTQ7 (Canada)
All transformers are Class 2 except the Y69 (300 VA), which is listed as a power transformer.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.
Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2009 Johnson Controls, Inc. www.johnsoncontrols.com

1 of 2
Transformers (Continued)

Selection Chart
Code No. Primary Volt- Secondary Primary Connection Secondary Mounting Agency Requirement
age VAC Voltage VAC Connection
40 VA Capacity Transformers with Energy Limiting Type Overload Protection
Y65G13-0 24 24 Male Fitting Male Fitting Foot cULus Class 2
8 in. primary leads 30 in. secondary leads
Y65A13-0 120 24 Male Fitting Male Fitting Foot cULus Class 2
8 in. primary leads 30 in. secondary leads
Y65A21-0 120 24 End bell holes Three screw terminals 4 in. x 4 in. plate cULus Class 2
8 in. primary leads (one is blind)
Y65T31-0 120/208/240 24 Male Fitting Three screw terminals Foot cULus Class 2
8 in. primary leads (one is blind) 4 in. x 4 in. plate1
Y65T42-0 120/208/240 24 Common Male Fitting Common Male Fitting Hub cURus Class 2
8 in. primary leads 8 in. secondary leads 4 in. x 4 in. plate1
Y65T54-0 120/208/240 24 8 in. primary leads 8 in. secondary leads Foot-skeleton cURus Class 2
Y65S13-0 208/240 24 Male Fitting Male Fittings Foot cULus Class 2
8 in. primary leads 30 in. secondary leads
Y65F13-0 277/480 24 Male Fitting Male Fitting Foot cULus Class 2
8 in. primary leads 30 in. secondary leads
Y65F42-0 277/480 24 Common Male Fitting Common Male Fitting Hub cURus Class 2
8 in. primary leads 8 in. secondary leads 4 in. x 4 in. plate1
50 VA Capacity Transformers with Circuit Breakers
Y63T22-0 120/208/240 24 End bell Hole End bell Hole 4 in. x 4 in. plate cURus Class 2
8 in. primary leads 8 in. secondary leads
Y63T31-0 120/208/240 Male Fitting Three screw terminals Foot cULus Class 2
8 in. primary leads (one is blind) 4 in. x 4 in. plate1
Y63F22-0 277/480 24 End bell Hole End bell Hole 4 in. x 4 in. plate cURus Class 2
8 in. primary leads 8 in. secondary leads
75 VA Capacity Transformers with Circuit Breakers
Y66T12-0 120/208/240 24 Common Male Fitting Common Male Fitting Foot cURus Class 2
8 in. primary leads 8 in. secondary leads
Y66T13-0 120/208/240 24 Male Fitting Male Fitting Foot cULus Class 2
8 in. primary leads 30 in. secondary leads
Y66F12-0 277/480 24 Common Male Fitting Common Male Fitting Foot cURus Class 2
8 in. primary leads 8 in. secondary leads
Y66F13-0 277/480 24 Male Fitting Male Fitting Foot cULus Class 2
8 in. primary leads 30 in. secondary leads
92 VA Capacity Transformers with Circuit Breakers
Y64T15-0 120/208/240 24 Male Fitting Female Fitting Foot cULus Class 2
8 in. primary leads 30 in. secondary leads
Y64T21-0 120/208/240 24 End bell holes Three screw terminals Plate cULus Class 2
8 in. primary leads (one is blind)
Y64T22-0 120/208/240 24 End bell Hole End bell Hole Plate cURus Class 2
8 in. primary leads 8 in. secondary leads
300 VA Capacity Transformers with Circuit Breakers
Y69T15-0 120/208/240 24 Male Fitting Female Fitting Foot cULus
8 in. primary leads 30 in. secondary leads Power Transformer
1. 4 in. x 4 in. plate and nut packed with transformer.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.
Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2009 Johnson Controls, Inc. www.johnsoncontrols.com

2 of 2
TAB PAGE

Directions to printer:

Remove this page and create a Tab titled, “Appendix E: Cable

Guidelines”
 BOS Standard
Uncontrolled copy of an online document.

Title: Metasys Cable Standards Number: 06-07.006.SSA

Sponsor: Director Installation Support Effective Date: 12-August-2008
Owner: David R. Christie (Randy) Revision: 06
Program Manager, Installation Support
david.r.christie@jci.com

I. PURPOSE
This document describes the wiring standards and requirements for Metasys.

II. SCOPE
Asia Europe Japan Americas Specific Applicability / Exceptions
GSS This document IS NOT to be considered “official” technical literature
FMS but rather an advisory document. Please read and follow ALL JCI
SP product literature requirements. If a conflict between this document
SS X and JCI product literature is found please follow the information
outlined in the official JCI Literature.

III. STANDARD PRACTICES

I. Metasys Cable Type Standard

A. General Requirements
Wiring should still be installed in accordance with standard work practices and comply with all
applicable national, state, and local codes plus project specifications for the location in which it
is installed.

B. Low Electromagnet Field Environments

Wiring installations including inputs, outputs, 24VAC power, and communication buses will use
the following generic cable types. Refer to Table 1.

Table 1: Low Electromagnetic Field Environments

Wire Purpose Cable Type
N1, Ethernet Ethernet Cat. 5 Data Cable 24AWG 4 x 2PR
FC 22/3 stranded twisted shielded sheathed.
SA 22/4(2pr) stranded twisted shielded sheathed.
N2 22/3 stranded twisted unshielded sheathed.
AI, AO, BI 22/3 or 22/2 conductor stranded twisted unshielded sheathed.
BO <0.8A@24VAC 22/3 or 22/2conductor stranded twisted unshielded
sheathed (20VA at less than 75’ one way distance).
LON FTT-10 22/2 conductor stranded twisted unshielded sheathed.
LON TP-1250 22/2 conductor stranded twisted unshielded.
24 VAC 1 18/2 conductor stranded twisted unshielded sheathed.
Metastat 24/8 conductor solid unshielded Cat. 3 data cable.
Network Sensor RJ 24/6(3 pair) conductor solid unshielded Cat. 3 data cable
Term (SA)
Network Sensor 22/4(2pr) stranded twisted shielded sheathed.
Screw Term (SA)

1
Please reference the “24 VAC Power Wiring” section of this document regarding wire gauge vs voltage drop limitations.
This document contains trade secrets and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. Disclosure of this publication is absolutely
Page 1 of 12
prohibited without the express written permission of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2002 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.
BOS Standard Metasys Cable Standards
C. High Electromagnetic Field Environment
In an installation where wiring is subjected to transients because of its proximity to sources of
electrical noise, you can install a cable, or multiple cables, of the following cable types to avoid
communication issues. Refer to Table 2.

Table 2: High Electromagnetic Field Environments

Wire Purpose Cable Type
N2, AI, AO, BI 22/3 or 22/2 conductor stranded twisted shielded sheathed.

II. Metasys Cable Sourcing

Anixter remains a source for wire and cable meeting the requirements of the Metasys system.
Worldwide locations and contact information may be found at the following site under the heading
“Global Distribution”. http://web.anixter.com/Anixter/anixter.nsf/Home

Specifications for some of the Johnson Controls cables can be found at:
http://www.anixter.com/johnsoncontrols/

Cable and accessories are available from Anixter.

Anixter
4420 N Harley Davidson Ave., Suite B
Milwaukee, WI 53225
Toll-free: (800) 447-8565
Main: (414) 755-6120
Fax: (414) 755-6121
Contact: Dee Moua (Account Rep)

III. Cable Guidelines

Table 3: General Input and Output Cabling

Type Typical Usage Anixter # Belden # pF/ft Area
22/2c Non-Shielded Open Plenum Installations. CBL-22/2-NS-PLN 6500UE 25 0.012
Plenum Inputs/Outputs. No Spring Return
Actuators
22/2c Non-Shielded EMT (Raceway) Installations. CBL-22/2-NS-PVC 5500UE 25 0.013
PVC Input/Outputs - No Spring Return Actuators
22/3c Non-Shielded Open Plenum Installations. Input/Outputs - CBL-22/3-NS-PLN 6501UE 25 0.013
Plenum No Spring Return Actuators
22/3c Non-Shielded EMT (Raceway) Installations. CBL-22/3-NS-PVC 5501UE 25 0.014
PVC Input/Outputs - No Spring Return Actuators

18/2c Non-Shielded Open Plenum Installations. Input/Outputs. CBL-18/2WHTNS- 6300UE 30 0.019

Plenum Long Runs or Higher Load devices (ie PLN
Spring Return Actuators),
18/2c Non-Shielded EMT (Raceway) Installations. AL-1802C-2-1N-09 5300UE 30 0.020
PVC Input/Outputs. Long Runs or Higher Load
devices (ie Spring Return Actuators),
18/3c Non-Shielded Open Plenum Installations. Input/Outputs. CBL-18/3WHTNS- 6301UE 30 0.022
Plenum Long Runs or Higher Load devices (ie PLN
Spring Return Actuators),
18/3c Non-Shielded EMT (Raceway) Installations. AL-1803C-2-1N-09 5301UE 30 0.023
PVC Input/Outputs. Long Runs or Higher Load
devices (ie Spring Return Actuators),
Refer to the “Resistive Sensor Temperature Offset” and “24VAC Power” Section of this document for more information regarding cable
sizing guidelines.
This document contains trade secrets and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. Disclosure of this publication is absolutely
Page 2 of 12
prohibited without the express written permission of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2002 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.
BOS Standard Metasys Cable Standards
Table 4: N2 Communication Cabling
Type Typical Usage Anixter # Belden # pF/ft Area
22/3c Non-Shielded Open Plenum Installations. 9600 Baud CBL-22/3-NS-PLN 6501UE 25 0.013
Plenum RS-485 Communication in “non-noisy”
environments.
22/3c Non-Shielded EMT (Raceway) Installations. 9600 Baud CBL-22/3-NS-PVC 5501UE 25 0.014
PVC RS-485 Communication in “non-noisy”
environments.
“Non-Noisy” refers to locations with low electromagnetic fields. Common locations with high electromagnetic fields have inductive loads
such as non-electronic ballasts, motors, transformers, etc. For high electromagnetic locations the same cabling as BACNet MS/TP
Field Controller Bus Communication is recommended.

Table 5: BACNet MS/TP Field Controller Bus Communication Cabling

Type Typical Usage Anixter # Belden # pF/ft Area
22/3c Shielded Open Plenum Installations. 38400+ Baud CBL-22/3-FC-PLN 6501FE 25 0.014
Plenum RS-485 Communication.
22/3c Shielded EMT (Raceway) Installations. 38400+ CBL-22/3-FC-PVC 5501FE 31 0.015
PVC Baud RS-485 Communication.

Table 6: BACNet MS/TP Sensor Actuator Bus Communication Cabling

Type Typical Usage Anixter # Belden # pF/ft Area
22/2pr Shielded Open Plenum Installations. 38400+ CBL-22/2P-SA- 6541FE 33 0.033
Plenum Baud RS-485 Communication. PLN
22/2pr Shielded EMT (Raceway) Installations. 38400+ CBL-22/2P-SA- 5541FE 31 0.034
PVC Baud RS-485 Communication. PVC

Table 7: LON Bus Communication Cabling

Type Typical Usage Anixter # pF/ft Area
22/2c Non-Shielded Open Plenum Installations. CBL-22/2-NS-PLN 25 0.012
Plenum
22/2c Non-Shielded EMT (Raceway) Installations. CBL-22/2-NS-PVC 25 0.013
PVC

This document contains trade secrets and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. Disclosure of this publication is absolutely
Page 3 of 12
prohibited without the express written permission of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2002 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.
BOS Standard Metasys Cable Standards

Table 8: Metastat and Network Sensor Cabling (with RJ Jacks)

Type Typical Usage Anixter # pF/ft Area
Metastat 24/4pr Open Plenum Installations from VMA, VAV or UNT CBL-24/8NAT-PLN 17 0.020
Non-Shielded Plenum Controllers to Metastat Sensors..
Metastat 24/4pr CBL-STAT25
Non-Shielded Plenum Pre-Configured Cables come with RJ-45 jacks
25 feet terminated on both ends.
Metastat 24/4pr CBL-STAT50
Non-Shielded Plenum Note: When provided with factory RJ-45 Terminations
50 feet it is best to ensure raceway (if used) is ¾” to allow the
Metastat 24/4pr termination to pull through without damage. CBL-STAT75
Non-Shielded Plenum
75 feet
Metastat 24/4pr CBL-STAT100
Non-Shielded Plenum
100 feet
Network Sensor 24/3pr Open Plenum Installations from Extended CMP-00324SPP-3 0.015
Non-Shielded Plenum Architecture VMA or FEC Controllers to Network
Network Sensor 24/3pr Sensors.. CBL-NETWORK25
Non-Shielded Plenum
25 Feet Pre-Configured Cables come with RJ-12 jacks
Network Sensor 24/3pr terminated on both ends. CBL-NETWORK50
Non-Shielded Plenum
50 Feet
Network Sensor 24/3pr CBL-NETWORK75
Non-Shielded Plenum
75 Feet
Network Sensor 24/3pr CBL-NETWORK100
Non-Shielded Plenum
100 Feet

Table 9: Metastat and Network Sensor Cabling (with Termination Screws)

Type Typical Usage Anixter # pF/ft Area
Metastat 24/4pr Open Plenum Installations from VMA, VAV or UNT CBL-24/8NAT-PLN 21 0.020
Non-Shielded Plenum Controllers to Metastat Sensors.
Metastat 24/4pr EMT (Raceway) Installations from VMA, VAV or UNT CM-00424BKTE-5U- 17 0.027
Non-Shielded PVC Controllers to Metastat Sensors. 10
Network Sensor 22/2pr Open Plenum Installations from Extended CBL-22/2P-SA-PLN 33 0.032
Shielded Plenum Architecture VMA or FEC Controllers to Network
Sensors..
Network Sensor 22/2pr EMT (Raceway) Installations from Extended CBL-22/2P-SA-PVC 31 0.034
Shielded PVC Architecture VMA or FEC Controllers to Network
Sensors..

This document contains trade secrets and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. Disclosure of this publication is absolutely
Page 4 of 12
prohibited without the express written permission of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2002 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.
BOS Standard Metasys Cable Standards

Table 10: N1 Communication Cabling

Type Typical Usage Anixter # pF/ft Area
N1 – Ethernet Open Plenum Installations 24 gauge 8 conductor (4 x 2 pair) CBL-CAT52404P-7U 15 0.031
Plenum unshielded data cable between NCMs, NAEs, NIEs,
UTP CAT5 Workstations, Servers, etc. (330 feet limit between Hubs,
24/4pr Nodes, etc.)
N1 – Ethernet EMT (Raceway) Installations 24 gauge 8 conductor (4 x 2 pair) CM-00424BKTE-5U- 17 0.021
PVC unshielded data cable between NCMs, NAEs, NIEs, 10
UTP CAT5 Workstations, Servers, etc. (330 feet limit between Hubs,
24/4pr Nodes, etc.)
N1 – Ethernet Open Plenum Installations of 10Base2 Ethernet systems CBL-RG62PUR-PLN 12.5 0.033
Plenum between NCMs, NAEs, NIEs, Workstations, Servers, etc. (607
RG62A/U feet limit between Hubs, Nodes, etc.)
Coax Cable
N1 – Ethernet EMT (Raceway) Installations of 10Base2 Ethernet systems CBL-RG62PUR-PVC 13.5 0.045
PVC between NCMs, NAEs, NIEs, Workstations, Servers, etc. (607
RG62A/U feet limit between Hubs, Nodes, etc.)
Coax Cable

Table 11: Optical Fiber Cable Communication Cabling

Outdoor Indoor
Duct/Aerial Direct Burial Duct (Below Frost Non-Plenum Plenum
(Rodent Resistant) Line)
Optical Fiber (Dual Fiber, Glass, 62.5 Micron)
Corning Cable 002KW4-T4130-D20 002KW5-T4130-A20 002KW5-T4130-A20 002K81-31130-24 002K88-31130-29
Systems P/N
Anixter P/N 372-COR62.5-LTD-02 002KW5-T4130-A20 002KW5-T4130-A20 370-947-FDDI-02 370-949-FDDI-02
Generally the recognized distance limitation for Optical Fiber Cable is 6,336 feet but distances vary by manufacturer.

IV. Metasys Cable Color Standard

A. Premium Cable Standard

The Premium Metasys wiring color standard will be available for customers who require a color-
coded wiring system. Refer to Table 12 for premium wiring standard.

Table 12: Premium Wiring Standard

Wire Purpose Standard Color
N2 or FC Bus Blue
SA Bus Brown
Analog Input Cable Yellow
Analog Output Cable Tan
Binary Input Cable Orange
Binary Output Cable Violet
N1 Bus. Ethernet - Cat 5 or Coax Purple
24VAC Cable Gray
Spare White
Lon Pink

This document contains trade secrets and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. Disclosure of this publication is absolutely
Page 5 of 12
prohibited without the express written permission of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2002 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.
BOS Standard Metasys Cable Standards
B. Normal Cable Standard
This Metasys wiring color standard has been added for HVAC Conventional projects that
require competitive pricing. Refer to Table13 for standard wiring standard.

Table 13: Standard Wiring

Wire Purpose Standard Color
N2 or FC Bus Blue
SA Bus (Screw terminating) Brown
All Other Wiring Neutral Color

V. Other Considerations

General

o Make all connections to controllers utilizing copper conductors.

o Locate equipment and route wiring so that signal wiring is separated from line voltage power
wiring.

o Do not run communication bus (N1, N2, ZB, FC, or SA), analog input (AI), binary input (BI),
analog output (AO), or binary output (BO) wiring in the same conduit or bundle as line voltage
wiring at 30 VAC or above, or wiring that switches highly inductive loads (contactor coils,
relay coils, motors, or generators).

o Zone Bus (ZB), AI, AO, and BI wiring may be run in the same conduit or bundle, where
convenient.

o Communication Bus, when shielded,

ƒ May be run in the came conduit or bundle as 24 VAC power wiring.
ƒ Must be handled and terminated properly. (According to the product engineering teams
improper handling of the shields can create installations that are less stable than if no
shield was provided at all.)
ƒ Only one hard ground connection of the Shield exists per bus segment. This hard
ground should be made at the NAE/NCM when it is also an EOL and should be within
one inch after entering an enclosure.
ƒ All other Shield connections MUST be isolated from ground unless communication
problems persist.
ƒ Under this situation an additional level of protection can be added by “soft grounding” the
shield within one inch of entering their respective enclosures with a 560 pF capacitor.(for
the highest level of noise immunity).
ƒ This additional protection should not be needed for most situations.
ƒ Refer to the sections relating to the specific communication bus for additional
precautions and connection details.

o Route cables neatly to promote good ventilation, visibility, testing, and ease of service.
o Run all raceways and cables parallel with and perpendicular to building lines.
o Provide some slack in the wires and cables. If using preconfigured cables, coil and secure
any excess cable.

This document contains trade secrets and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. Disclosure of this publication is absolutely
Page 6 of 12
prohibited without the express written permission of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2002 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.
BOS Standard Metasys Cable Standards
o Protect cables all along their route. Do not run cables near moving parts. Avoid sharp bends,
abrasion, and the potential for severing or crushing the cable.
o When the binary outputs (BO) of a controller are used to source power for an inductive load
(for example a contactor, starter, or other coil) consider using a separate transformer for the
inductive loads. This will avoid creating a current path for inductive spikes to be coupled
directly to the control circuitry of the controller. If a separate transformer is not available,
install surge protection, as follows, across the inductive loads to prevent misoperation of the
controller..
o JCI P/N AS-MOVKIT-0 or Electrocube P/N RG1782-6 or RG2031-6

RJ Style Connections

Plenum Jobs
If you have a plenum job where you can run open wiring, you should use RJ type thermostats and
preconfigured cables. This is much cheaper than trying to crimp cables in the field, since you
don’t have to strip and terminate wire. Verify that you are not being charged by subcontractors for
terminations on preconfigured cables.

EMT or Conduit Jobs

For a conduit job, you should use standard cable and terminal screws, because RJ jacks don’t
pull through a conduit well, and preconfigured cables are seldom the right length. In situations
where preconfigured cables are the right length, you can use them if you cut off one end, pull the
cable, and then terminate the other end.

Cable Installation Tips

When attaching RJ45 and RJ12 connectors to cable, follow proper techniques. Assure that all
wires are fully inserted into the connector, in the proper positions, and that they are securely
crimped.
There is a tool available that allows the wires to be pushed though individual holes in the end of
an RJ connector. This allows the installer to easily confirm proper positioning of the individual
wires. In addition, after confirming the proper pin out, the connector can be pushed tightly against
the cable jacket. The tool crimps the connector and trims the excess wire in a single operation.
The connectors and the tool are manufactured by Bomar Interconnect Products, Inc., are
available fro Anixter (see the “Metasys Cable Sourcing” section for contact information) and really
do help eliminate RJ termination errors. To find this product online, go to
http://www.bomarinterconnect.com/EZ%20modular_plugs.htm.

EZ-RJ45 Crimper
In addition to the crimping tool and connectors, there are other products available that work well to
test these cables and their RJ-45 or RJ-12 connectors. The pin out requirements for Johnson
Controls thermostats that use RJ style connectors match the pin out requirements for standard
cables, making the use of industry standard cable testers a great option. The following tester from
Test-UM (TP600 LANRoverPro), is a good example.

This document contains trade secrets and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. Disclosure of this publication is absolutely
Page 7 of 12
prohibited without the express written permission of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2002 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.
BOS Standard Metasys Cable Standards

The TP600 LANRoverPro can also be used to determine approximate cable footages when used
with the .’pf/Ft’ values in Tables 3 through 10.

It is important to note that there can be considerable time between roughing in a thermostat cable
in a wall and the mounting of the thermostat. Often cables are “roughed-in” before walls are taped
and floated or painted. RJ jacks that accidentally get painted or covered with sheetrock mud
should be replaced before installing the thermostat. As a preventive measure, covering the RJ with
masking tape or another effective means during “rough-in” can help ensure the protection of the
jack until the thermostat is ready to be mounted.

Resistive Sensor Temperature Offset

Resistive temperature sensors, both Nickel (Ni) and Platinum (Pt) types, will experience an error
in their readings due to wire resistance in the cable connecting the sensor to the controller. The
amount error increases with cable length, and becomes more pronounced as the wire size
decreases.
To minimize sensor error due to field wiring, the total resistance of all resistive sensor wiring
should be less that 3.0 Ohms. This will result in approximately a 1.0 degree F offset with Nickel
sensors.

Table 14:
Wire AWG Ohms/1000 ft. Maximum One way Distance
(ft)
16 4 375
18 6.4 234
20 10.1 149
22 16.2 93
24 25.7 58
26 41 37

This document contains trade secrets and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. Disclosure of this publication is absolutely
Page 8 of 12
prohibited without the express written permission of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2002 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.
BOS Standard Metasys Cable Standards

24 VAC Power Wiring

A 24 VAC power transformer can supply multiple devices if the power draw of the devices is
less than the transformer’s rating, the gauge of the power supply wire is large enough for the
load and the device does not require isolated power. Typically, the transformer load consists of
the controller plus any actuators and relays driven by the controller. Power ratings for
controllers and typical actuators & relays are given in the “Power Requirements of Control
System Devices” table below.

Table: 15 Power Requirements of Control System Devices

Device Power Rating *
Supervisory Controllers
NCM-350 90-230 VAC @ 500 mA
N30 5 VA
NAE55 / NIE55 50 VA
NAE35, NAE45, NCM45 25 VA
Digital Controllers
AHU 16 VA
DX-9100 10 VA
LN Series 10 VA
UNT 40 VA
VAV 40 VA
VMA 14xx 10 VA
FEC, IOM & VMA16xx 10 VA
XP / XT 4 VA
Actuators
M100 Series - SR 25 VA
M100 Series - NSR 20 VA
M9200 Series - SR 20 VA
M9100 Series – Floating/Inc NSR 3 VA
M9100 Series – Proportional NSR 7.5 VA
VA2000 Series 5 VA
VA7000 Series 7 VA
VA8000 Series 6 VA
J Series Zone Valve 7 VA
Relays
RIB (Typical) 2 VA
Ice Cube (RLY) Type 2 VA

Note: Requirements are approximate - See individual

product bulletins for exact figures. Also the voltage drop
in the wiring run from the transformer to the load must be
accounted for. The voltage drop on the 24 VAC cabling is
much larger than for line voltage wiring. It is critical to use
a wire gauge large enough for the load
.

This document contains trade secrets and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. Disclosure of this publication is absolutely
Page 9 of 12
prohibited without the express written permission of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2002 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.
BOS Standard Metasys Cable Standards
Controllers in particular are sensitive to variations in their supply voltage. To maintain proper
operation, the supply voltage variation should not exceed 2 Volts.
The Table “24 VAC Voltage Drop Limited to 2 Volts” lists the maximum one way distance that
power wiring can be run for a particular load and wire size. This will limit the voltage drop on a
24 VAC power circuit to 2 Volts (the limit per our product engineers).

Table 16: 24 VAC Voltage Drop Limited to 2 Volts

22 ga
20 ga 18 ga 16 ga 14 ga 12 ga 10 ga AWG
LOAD 16.46
10.35 7.95 4.99 3.14 1.98 1.24 ohms/kFt
AMPS VA Maximum One Way Distance to Load in Feet
0.11 2.5 552 878 1144 1822 2895 4591 7331
0.21 5 289 460 599 954 1517 2405 3840
0.42 10 145 230 302 481 764 1212 1935
0.83 20 73 116 151 240 382 606 968
1.25 30 49 77 101 160 255 404 645
1.67 40 36 58 75 120 191 303 484
2.08 50 29 46 60 96 153 242 387
2.5 60 24 39 50 80 127 202 323
2.92 70 21 33 43 69 109 173 276
3.33 80 18 29 38 60 96 152 242
3.75 90 16 26 34 53 85 135 215
4 96 15 24 31 50 80 126 202
• Data for 18 AWG and greater is from Chapter 9, Table 8 of the 2005 NEC
• Resistances are valid at 75 C. Refer to the table for temperature correction factors
• The following formula was used to approximate the wire runs in this table:
[voltage drop / (ohms per kFt * load in amps)* 1000] /2 = one way run (ft)

To calculate the wire size & length necessary to maintain a maximum 2 Volt drop:
• Add the power requirements (VA) for the controller and any connected devices
• For wire size and total VA lookup the maximum one-way length required for the load.

This document contains trade secrets and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. Disclosure of this publication is absolutely
Page 10 of 12
prohibited without the express written permission of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2002 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.
BOS Standard Metasys Cable Standards

Raceway Sizing
Conduit sizing charts for standard JCI cables are shown below. All calculations are based on a
40% fill rate using recommended cables available from Anixter Inc.

Notes:
Calculations are based on PVC jacketed cables. Plenum cables are normally slightly smaller in size.
Only recommended cables are included in the tables.
Tables assume Anixter Cables as outlined in this document

This document contains trade secrets and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. Disclosure of this publication is absolutely
Page 11 of 12
prohibited without the express written permission of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2002 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.
BOS Standard Metasys Cable Standards
Definitions

Term Definition

IV. SUMMARY OF CHANGES

ƒ Initial release of new document.
ƒ Revised for Metasys Release 2.1

V. REFERENCES

Title Link
Anixter Web Site http://web.anixter.com/Anixter/anixter.n
sf/Home

This document contains trade secrets and proprietary information of Johnson Controls, Inc. Disclosure of this publication is absolutely
Page 12 of 12
prohibited without the express written permission of Johnson Controls, Inc. © 2002 Johnson Controls, Inc. All rights reserved.
TAB PAGE

Directions to printer:

Remove this page and create a Tab titled, “Appendix F:

Communication Bus Technical Literature”
TAB PAGE

Directions to printer:

Remove this page and create a Tab titled, “Appendix G: FAN

410”
MS/TP Communications Bus
Technical Bulletin
Code No. LIT-12011034
Software Release 5.0
Issued January 4, 2010
Supersedes October 6, 2008

Document Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Related Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
MS/TP Bus Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
FC Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

SA Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
End-of-Line Termination on the MS/TP Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Baud Rates on the MS/TP Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Device Addresses on the MS/TP Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Setting a Device Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Enabling Field Controllers for Wireless Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

FC Bus Rules and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

EOL Termination on the FC Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

EOL Terminator Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

TEC26xx Series Thermostats and Third-Party MS/TP Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

SA Bus Rules and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

SA Bus Device Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

EOL Termination on the SA Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

SA Buses with Multiple Network Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

MS/TP Bus Cable Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Screw Terminal Blocks for Connecting the Bus Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Grounding the Bus Cable Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

RJ-Style Modular Jack and Cables for SA Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Commissioning Devices on the MS/TP Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Peer-to-Peer Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
MS/TP Bus Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin 1

Appendix A: FC Bus Auxiliary Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Repeaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Configuring Repeaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Fiber-Optic Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Routing and Connecting the Fiber Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Connecting Modems to MS/TP Bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Fiber Modem between Two Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Setting Termination on Fiber Modems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Modem Set EOL to In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Modem Set EOL to Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Surge Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Appendix B: Maximizing and Troubleshooting the MS/TP Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Maximizing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

MS/TP Bus Health Factors of the Diagnostics Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Bus Health Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Bus Performance Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Statistics Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Analyze Field Bus Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Parameters That Affect MS/TP Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Duplicate Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Common Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Correcting Physical Bus Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Correcting Bus Overload Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Reading the Baud Rate of Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Counting the COVs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Disabling a Device on the Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Changing the Baud Rate of an Entire Bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Automatic Low Resources Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

The Object Engine Input Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Available Free Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

2 MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin

 Protocol Engine Input Queue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Protocol Engine Output Pending Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin 3

4 MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin
MS/TP Communications Bus
Technical Bulletin

Document Introduction
The BACnet® protocol Master-Slave/Token-Passing (MS/TP) communications
bus is a local network that connects supervisory controllers and field controllers to
field point interfaces.
This document describes the specifications, device limits, and rules of the MS/TP
communications bus. This document also describes how to wire and terminate
devices, and troubleshoot device communication on the MS/TP bus.
This document is intended for the person who needs to know the rules,
requirements, limits, specifications, and configuration of the MS/TP bus to design,
wire, or troubleshoot an MS/TP application.

Related Documentation
Table 1 lists the related documentation that describes controllers and systems
related to the MS/TP communications bus.
Table 1: Related Documentation (Part 1 of 2)
For Information On See Document LIT or Part Number
Metasys® System Overview Metasys System Extended Architecture LIT-1201527
Overview Technical Bulletin
Installation and Specifications of NAE55/NIE55 Installation Instructions Part No. 24-10051-0
the NAE55
Installation and Specifications of NAE35/NAE45 Installation Instructions Part No. 24-10050-6
the NAE45 or NAE35
Installation and Specifications of NCE25 Installation Instructions Part No. 24-10143-63
the NCE25
Specifications of the Metasys Metasys System Field Equipment LIT-12011042
System Field Controllers Controllers and Related Products Product
Bulletin
Installation and Specifications of FEC16x0 Field Equipment Controller Part No. 24-10143-4
the FEC1610 or FEC2610 Installation Instructions
FEC26x0 Field Equipment Controller Part No. 24-10143-12
Installation Instructions
Installation and Specifications of VMA16 Series Controllers Installation Part No. 24-10143-20
the VMA16 Instructions
Installation and Specifications of IOM1710 Input/Output Module Installation Part No. 24-10144-9
the IOM1710, IOM2710, IOM3710, Instructions
or IOM4710
IOM2710 and IOM3710 Input/Output Part No. 24-10144-17
Modules Installation Instructions
IOM4710 Input/Output Module Installation Part No. 24-10144-25
Instructions
Specifications of the Wireless Wireless Commissioning Converter Part No. 24-10108-2
Commissioning Converter and Installation Instructions
Setting up a Bluetooth® Wireless
Metasys CCT Bluetooth Technology LIT-12011038
Technology Adapter
Communication Commissioning Guide

MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin 5

 Table 1: Related Documentation (Part 2 of 2)
For Information On See Document LIT or Part Number
Integrating BACnet MS/TP and BACnet Controller Integration with LIT-1201531
BACnet IP Devices into the NAE/NCE Technical Bulletin
Metasys System Network
Installation of and Specifications MS-BACEOL-0 RS485 End-of-Line Part No. 24-10264-4
for the MS-BACEOL-0 Terminator Installation Instructions
End-of-Line Terminator Module
Designing, Installing, ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus LIT-12011295
Commissioning, Operating, and System Technical Bulletin
Troubleshooting a ZFR1800
Series System on a Metasys
Network
Locating, Mounting, and Wiring ZFR1810 Wireless Field Bus Coordinator Part No. 24-10325-2
ZFR1810 Coordinators and Installation Instructions
ZFR1811 Routers
Locating, Mounting, and Wiring ZFR1811 Wireless Field Bus Router Part No. 24-10325-10
ZFR1811 Routers Installation Instructions
Locating and Installing WRZ-TTx WRZ-TTx Series Wireless Room Part No. 24-10332-2
Series Sensors Temperature Sensors Installation
Instructions
Applications, Features, and ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus LIT-12011336
Benefits of the ZFR1800 Series System Product Bulletin
Wireless Field Bus System
Estimating Quantity, Locating, Wireless Metasys System Location Guide LIT-120112941
and Testing ZFR1800,
Coordinators, ZFR1811 Routers,
and WRZ-TTx Series Sensors
Controller Configuration Tool CCT Help LIT-120111472
(CCT) Software

1. This document is only available on the Johnson Controls® Portal intranet site.
2. This LIT number represents a printer friendly version of the Help.

MS/TP Bus Overview

The MS/TP bus is based on BACnet standard protocol SSPC-135, Clause 9.
BACnet MS/TP protocol is a peer-to-peer, multiple master protocol based on token
passing. Only master devices can receive the token, and only the device holding
the token is allowed to originate a message on the bus. The token is passed from
master device to master device using a small message. The token is passed in
consecutive order starting with the lowest address. Slave devices on the bus only
communicate on the bus when responding to a data request from a master device.
IMPORTANT: Do not connect MS/TP devices and N2 devices to the same
bus. MS/TP Communications Buses follow different protocol and wiring rules
from N2 Communications Buses, and MS/TP devices and N2 devices are not
compatible on the same bus.

An MS/TP bus (Figure 1) supports two types/levels of buses: a Field Controller

Bus (FC Bus) and a Sensor Actuator (SA) Bus.

6 MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin

 The FC Bus and the SA Bus are networks of daisy-chained devices. Each bus has
only one bus supervisor. The bus supervisor communicates with devices on the
supervised bus and with devices on the next (higher level) bus on the network. The
bus supervisor typically starts the communication on the FC Bus and SA Bus. If an
SA Bus or FC Bus does not have a bus supervisor, the device with the lowest
device address value on the bus starts the communication.
The ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus System enables wireless communication
on an MS/TP Bus, allowing you to create wireless connections between Field
Equipment Controllers (FECs) or Variable Air Volume Modular Assemblies
(VMA)16s, Input Output Modules (IOMs), and Network Automation Engines
(NAEs) or Network Control Engines (NCEs).
See Enabling Field Controllers for Wireless Operation on page 13 and Related
Documentation on page 5 for detailed information about the ZFR1800 Series
Wireless Field Bus System.

FC Bus
An FC Bus connects a Metasys system NAE or NCE to FECs, VMA16s,
Input/Output Modules (IOMs), and TEC26xx Series thermostats.
Ethernet Network

NAE
FC Bus

FIG_MS-TP
ET SY R

Supervisor

FC Bus
SA Bus
Supervisor CLE AR =LO W RE D=H G
I H
35 N
I - LB (4 Nm) 60 SE CO ND S
FEC
UN I VE RS A L

AL LF IE LD TER M NI ALS A RE PO WER LI M T

I ED
+15 O UT 1
IN
O CO M 1
M A NU A L
I CO M
O VE R RI D E
AD D RE S S 0=O FF

B I NA RY

O UT 2

O CO M 2
ON

S A B US

F AU LT

P O WE R

O UT 3
SE NS O R

O CO M 3

P OW ER
SA
PWR
MS-VM A1 620 -0
SA BU S

CO N FI G UR A B LE

FA U LT
O UT 4
CO M P WR I N: 2 4VA C 2 .5 A, CL AS S 2
O UT PU T S: 24VA C 0 .5 A, CL AS S 2,
S A BU S O CO M 4
–
P IL O T DU TY
FC BU S
+
O UT 5
FC
O CO M 5
EO L
ET SY

SHLD
F CBUS

HO T
CO M
24

–
OP ENE NERG Y
CO M
+ MEQ
A NA
UG
I MEM
P
EN
ENTT
15U0
R

SA Bus
N
O

VMA SA Bus
Supervisor

Network SA Bus
Sensor
Network
Sensor
ON

S A BU S

FA U LT

P O WER

Network
E T SY
R

Sensor
N
O

IOM
Figure 1: Example of an MS/TP Communications Bus

On an FC Bus, the NAE or NCE is the bus supervisor. An FC Bus supports up to

three bus segments that are connected with network repeaters (Figure 5).
See FC Bus Rules and Specifications on page 14 for more information.

MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin 7

SA Bus
The SA Bus connects NCEs, FECs, VMA16s (field controllers), and Variable
Speed Drives (VSDs) to point devices such as IOMs, network thermostats, and
network sensors.
On an SA Bus, an NCE, FEC, or VMA16 is the bus supervisor. The SA Bus does
not support bus segments (Figure 7). See SA Bus Rules and Specifications on page
18 for more information.

End-of-Line Termination on the MS/TP Bus

Daisy-chained RS485-protocol networks typically require some type of
End-of-Line (EOL) termination to reduce interference caused by signal reflection
that occurs when data transmissions reach the end of a bus segment and bounce
back on the segment. The high baud rates on MS/TP bus applications require
robust EOL termination and strict adherence to the EOL termination rules.
Figure 2 shows an example of the EOL termination settings on an MS/TP bus
application.
The EOL termination requirements for the FC Bus are different from the SA Bus
requirements. See EOL Termination on the FC Bus on page 16 and EOL
Termination on the SA Bus on page 20 for more information.
Also, third-party MS/TP devices and TEC26xx Series thermostats have different
EOL termination requirements from Metasys devices on the FC Bus. See TEC26xx
Series Thermostats and Third-Party MS/TP Devices on page 17 for more
information.

NAE Ethernet Network

ET SY

FC Bus Connection
R

T EOL Switch ON

FC Bus Connections
FC Bus Connection
SA Bus Connection VMA
CLE AR =LO W RE D=H IG H
EOL Switch ON
EOL (fixed) ON
35 N
I - LB (4 Nm) 60 SE CO ND S
U NI V ER SA L

+15 AL LF IE LD TER M IN ALS A RE PO WER L IM IT ED

O UT 1
IN O CO M 1
M A NU A L
I CO M
A D DR E SS 0= OFF

O VE R RI D E
BI N AR Y

O UT 2

FC Bus FC Bus FC Bus

O CO M 2

FEC
ON

T
S A B US

F AU LT

P O WE R

O UT 3
S EN SO R

O CO M 3

Device Device Device

P OW ER
SA
PWR MS-VM A1 620 -0
SABUS

C O NF I GU R AB LE

FA U LT
O UT 4
CO M P WR I N: 2 4VA C 2 .5 A, CL AS S 2
S A BU S O UT PU T S: 24VA C 0 .5 A, CL AS S 2,
– O CO M 4
P IL O T DU T Y
FC BU S
+
O UT 5
FC

T
EO L O CO M 5
ET SY

SHLD
FC BU S

CO M HO T
24

–
OP ENE NERG Y
+ MA NAG EMEN T CO M
15U0 EQ UP
I M ENT
R

EOL Switches OFF

N
O

T
Network FC Bus Connection SA Bus Connection
Sensor EOL Switch OFF EOL (fixed) ON
SA Bus
SA Bus

T = EOL switch set to ON Network

Network IOM
Sensor T = EOL (integral fixed) ON Sensor
ON

S A B US

F AU LT

P O WE R

(No EOL)
R
ET SY

T
EOL_TERMS
N
O

SA Bus Connection
EOL Switch ON - Recommended
(EOL OFF or No EOL - Acceptable)

Figure 2: EOL Terminations on an MS/TP Bus

8 MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin

Baud Rates on the MS/TP Bus
An MS/TP bus can be configured to communicate at one of four different baud
rates. It is very important that all of the devices on an MS/TP bus communicate at
the same baud rate.
The baud rate setting determines the rate at which devices communicate data over
the bus. The baud rate settings available on Metasys MS/TP devices are 9600;
19,200; 38,400; 76,800; and Auto. The baud rate setting for Metasys devices is set
in the Metasys software.
We recommend setting all MS/TP bus supervisors (NAEs and NCEs) to 38,400.
We recommend setting all field controllers on the FC Bus (FECs, VMA16s, and
IOMs) to Auto. In the Auto setting, the Metasys devices listen for the bus
supervisor to communicate first, the devices then automatically set their baud rate
to the bus supervisor’s baud rate. FECs, VMA16s, and IOMs ship with a default
baud rate setting of Auto.
TEC26xx Series thermostats automatically set their baud rate to the bus
supervisor’s baud rate.
Typically, the baud rate setting on bus repeaters and third-party MS/TP devices is
configured manually at the device, and the baud rate setting must match the bus
supervisor’s baud rate. Refer to the manufacturer’s product documentation for
information on setting the device’s baud rate.
There are two device attributes in the Metasys software that relate to the baud rate:
• Baud Rate Selection allows you to set the baud rate for the device using the
System Configuration Tool (SCT) for NAEs, or the Controller Configuration
Tool (CCT) for FECs, VMA16s, and IOMs.
• Active Baud Rate allows you to view the baud rate at which the device is
communicating on the active bus when Auto baud is selected for the device.
For more information on Metasys system attributes, refer to the Metasys system
Help.
The high baud rates capable on MS/TP buses limit the range of wire gauges that
can be used on the bus. There is a relationship among the baud rate, wire gauge,
wire length, and the number of devices. Higher baud rates support more devices
but require small gauge wire (which provides lower capacitance). A lower baud
rate may be required to use existing, larger gauge wire (which has higher
capacitance) but may support fewer devices. We recommend 38,400 baud using
22 AWG stranded wire. This provides the best balance between performance and
installation sensitivity.
For information on determining wire gauges, wire lengths, and the number of
devices supported, see MS/TP Bus Cable Recommendations on page 22.

MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin 9

Device Addresses on the MS/TP Bus
Each device connection on an MS/TP bus requires a device address to coordinate
communication on the bus. Each bus has a set of device addresses that is separate
and independent from the device addresses on all other buses. Devices connected
to both an FC Bus and SA Bus have two device addresses, one for each device
connection (Figure 3 on page 11).
In the MS/TP bus hierarchy, device connections on separate buses can have the
same device address. For example, every bus supervisor connection on an MS/TP
bus has a device address of 0 (zero), and the device address for the first network
sensor on many SA Buses is 199. Figure 3 shows a simple example of an MS/TP
bus and the device addresses for connections on the FC Bus and the SA Buses.
An NAE or NCE is the bus supervisor on an FC Bus. The FEC, VMA16, or the
field controller on an NCE is the bus supervisor on an SA Bus. Bus supervisors
have a fixed device address of 0 (zero) that cannot be changed (Figure 3).
Depending on the model, a network sensor has a fixed address of 199 or an
assigned (switch-selectable) address between 200 and 203. Table 2 provides a list
of the valid MS/TP device address values and address value ranges for MS/TP
devices.
Because a token-passing message is sent from address to address in consecutive
order, any gaps in the device address range on a bus reduce bus performance while
the message negotiates the gap to find the next device address on the bus. For
slightly optimal bus performance, start with the lowest device address value and
use consecutive address values for the ranges listed in Table 2.
Note: Sequentially addressing devices only applies to devices that participate in
passing the token. These devices must have addresses below 128.
Note: The devices on the bus do not need to be physically wired in sequential
order as long as there are no gaps in the address value range.

Setting a Device Address

For most devices on an MS/TP bus, the (non-supervisory) device address is set by
positioning the DIP switches on the device’s ADDRESS DIP switch block. The
DIP switch blocks are binary switch blocks, and each switch represents a binary
numerical value when the switch is in the ON position.
The device address set on the ADDRESS DIP switch block applies to the device
connection on the bus where the device is not the bus supervisor. For example, the
DIP switches on FECs or VMA16s (master devices) set the device address for the
device connection to the FC Bus. If the FEC or VMA16 also supervise an SA Bus,
the FEC’s or VMA16’s address on an SA Bus is 0 by default (Figure 3).
An IOM has only one device connection, which can connect to either an FC Bus or
an SA Bus (but not both); therefore, the device address set on an IOM applies to
the bus to which the IOM is connected. (An IOM is never a bus supervisor.)

10 MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin

 Ethernet Network
NAE
ET SY R

FC Bus (Supervisor)
Connection and
0
Address FC Bus Connections
and Addresses FC Bus Connection
VMA 5 6 7 and Address
0 CLE AR =LO WRE D=H IG H 35 IN - LB (4 Nm) 60 SE CO ND S

U N IV ER SA L
+15 AL LF IE LD TER M N I ALS A RE PO WER L M
I T
I ED
O UT 1
IN
O CO M 1
M A NU A L
I CO M

A D DR E SS 0= OFF
O VE R RI D E

BI N AR Y
O UT 2

FC Bus FC Bus FC Bus

O CO M 2

ON
FEC

SA BU S

FA U LT

PO W ER
O UT 3

S EN SO R
O CO M 3

SA
PWR
P OW ER
MS-VM A1 620 -0

Device Device Device 8

SABUS

C O N FI GU R AB LE
FA U LT
O UT 4
P WR I N: 2 4VA C 2 .5 A, CL AS S 2
CO M
S A BU S O UT PU T S: 24VA C 0 .5 A, CL AS S 2, O CO M 4
–
P IL O T DU T Y
FC BU S
+
O UT 5

FC
EO L O CO M 5

E T SY
SHLD

FC BU S
HO T
CO M

24
–
OP ENE NERG Y
+ MA NAG EMEN T CO M
15U0 EQ UP
I M ENT

R
4

N
O
FC Bus Connection 0
and Address
Network
199 Sensor
Network
Sensor 199
IOM
SA Bus Connections 200

ON

SA B U S

FA UL T

PO W ER
and Addresses SA Bus Connections

ET S Y
Network and Addresses

R
Network 4

N
O
Sensor
Sensor

FIG_NET_ADDRSS
201 Network
Sensor
200

Figure 3: MS/TP Bus Showing FC Bus and SA Bus Addresses

Table 2: Valid MS/TP Bus Address Values and Address Ranges for
MS/TP Bus Devices (Part 1 of 2)
Address Value/ Class Devices
Address Range
0 Bus Supervisor FC Bus: NAE or NCE
SA Bus: FECs, VMA16s, or NCE
1 Reserved BTCVT Wireless Commissioning Converter
2 Reserved ZFR1810 Wireless Field Bus Coordinator
3 Reserved DIS1710 Local Controller Display
4-127 Master Range FC Bus: FECs, VMA16s, IOMs, and TEC26xx
SA Bus: IOMs
Note: On applications using an NCE, the
address value 4 is reserved for the
NCE’s integral field controller.
On applications using ZFR1810
coordinators, address values 120 to 127
are reserved for multiple coordinators.

MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin 11

 Table 2: Valid MS/TP Bus Address Values and Address Ranges for
MS/TP Bus Devices (Part 2 of 2)
Address Value/ Class Devices
Address Range
128-131 Slave FECs/IOMs/VMAs - Devices operate as
MS/TP slave in this range
132-255 Reserved FECs/IOMs/VMAs - Wireless mode with address
range of 4-127 and bit 128 active
128-254 Slave Range Slave devices, VSDs, and NS network sensors
on the SA Bus
198 Reserved VAV Balancing Sensor (handheld)
199 Reserved Most NS Series Network Sensor models or VAV
Balancing Sensor (wall-mounted)
200-203 Reserved NS Series Network Sensors (specified models)
204-211 Reserved NS-DTN7043-0 and NS-DTN7083-0 Network
Sensors
212-219 Reserved NS-BCN7004-0 Network CO2 Sensor
255 Broadcast Do not apply address 255 to any device.

IMPORTANT: On FEC and VMA16 Series controllers (only), the 128 DIP
switch on the controller’s device address DIP switch block is used to enable the
controller to operate in a wireless mode using the ZFR1800 Series Wireless
Field Bus System. On any FEC, VMA16, and IOM Series controller that is
hardwired to an MS/TP Bus, the 128 DIP switch must be set to the OFF
position. Operating any FEC, VMA16, or IOM that is hardwired to an
MS/TP Bus with the controller’s 128 DIP switch set to the ON position results
in communication failure on the bus.

As you set the device address, the best-practice is to set the highest switch value
first, then the next highest switch value, and so on, until the total of the switch
values equal the intended device address. For example, positioning switches 16, 4,
and 1 to ON (as shown in Figure 4) sets the device address to 21 for a device on the
FC Bus.

Figure 4: Setting the Device Address and Wireless Operation Mode

on the ADDRESS DIP Switch Block

12 MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin

 Note: Devices may go offline momentarily when a device address is changed on
an active bus. A device reset is not required on field controllers or
supervisory devices after changing the MS/TP address.
Some devices, such as the TEC26xx Series thermostats and third-party MS/TP
devices, use their own configuration settings to establish the device address for
their connection to the bus. Refer to the device manufacturer’s product
documentation for instructions on setting the device address. The device address
values for TEC26xx thermostats and all third-party devices must comply with the
rules and ranges described previously.

Enabling Field Controllers for Wireless Operation

The ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus System enables wireless communication,
allowing you to create wireless connections between FECs and VMA16s, and
NAE/NCEs.
On FEC and VMA16 controllers, you can enable the controller to operate with a
ZFR1800 Series wireless system and connect an MS/TP Bus in a wireless mode by
setting the (FEC/VMA16’s) 128 DIP switch on the device address DIP switch
block to ON. See Figure 4 for more information.
To operate with a ZFR1800 Series field bus, an FEC or VMA16 must be
connected to a ZFR1811 Wireless Field Bus Router, and the associated NAE or
NCE must be connected to a ZFR1810 Wireless Field Bus Coordinator. See
Related Documentation on page 5 for references to more information about the
ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus System, FECs, VMA16s, NCEs, and NAEs.

MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin 13

FC Bus Rules and Specifications
Table 3, Table 4, and Figure 5 provide rules and specifications for the FC Bus.
Metasys MS/TP devices generate less data traffic than third-party MS/TP devices
and TEC26xx thermostats. Connecting third-party devices or TEC26xx
thermostats to the FC Bus increases data traffic, reduces bus performance, and
reduces the number of devices that can be connected to the FC Bus.
Table 3: FC Bus Rules
Category Rules/Limits
General NAE55 Series models can support up to two FC Buses1.
NAE45 Series models can support one FC Bus1.
NAE35 Series models can support one FC Bus1 (but an NAE35 FC Bus supports only
half the number of devices that are supported on an FC Bus on an NAE45 or NAE55).
NCE25 Series models can support one FC Bus1.
Note: An FC port on an NAE/NCE can connect to only one bus segment on an FC
Bus. Only a daisy-chain topology is allowed (no T or Star topology
configurations).
Number of Devices and NCE25 models support 32 MS/TP devices (maximum) on an FC Bus trunk and up to
Bus Segments 3 bus segments.
NAE45 and NAE55 models support the following device limits on an FC Bus trunk:
NAE35 models support half the number of devices that an NAE45 supports.
When all of the devices connected on the FC Bus are Metasys FECs, VMA16s,
and/or IOMs, the device and bus segment limits are as follows:
• 100 devices total per FC Bus (maximum)
• 3 bus segments per FC Bus (maximum)
• 50 devices per bus segment (maximum, not to exceed 100 devices per FC Bus)
When one or more TEC-26xx Series thermostat or third-party MS/TP device is
connected on the FC Bus, the device and bus segment limits are as follows:
• 64 devices total per FC Bus (maximum)
• 3 bus segments per FC Bus (maximum)
• 32 devices per bus segment (maximum, not to exceed 64 devices per FC Bus)
Bus segments on an FC Bus are connected with repeaters (only). Up to two cascaded
repeaters may be applied to an FC Bus (to connect three bus segments).
Cable Length for FC When all of the devices connected on the FC Bus are Metasys FECs, VMA16s,
Bus and Bus Segments and/or IOMs, the cable length limits (using 22 AWG 3-wire twisted, shielded cable) are
as follows:
• Each bus segment can be up to 1,520 m (5,000 ft) in length.
• Each FC Bus can be up to 4,750 m (15,000 ft) in length.
When one or more TEC-26xx Series thermostat or third-party MS/TP device is
connected on the FC Bus, the device and bus segment limits are as follows:
• Each bus segment can be up to 1,220 m (4,000 ft)2 in length.
• Each FC Bus can be up to 3,660 m (12,000 ft)2 in length.
When using fiber-optic connections: 2,010 m (6,600 ft)2 between two fiber modems
Recommended Cable3 22 AWG Stranded, 3-Wire Twisted, Shielded Cable
EOL Termination The EOL switch must be set to On (or an EOL terminator installed) on the two devices
located at either end of each bus segment on an FC Bus.
The EOL switches must be set to Off (or EOL termination disabled) for all other
devices on the bus segment on an FC Bus.
See EOL Termination on the FC Bus on page 16 for more information.

1. Refer to the Network Automation Engine (NAE) Product Bulletin (LIT-1201160) and the Network Controller Engine
Product Bulletin (LIT-12011283) for complete information on MS/TP bus support on NAE and NCE models.
2. If third-party devices are connected to the bus, the cable lengths should be reduced (if necessary) to match the
third-party vendor recommendations.
3. The recommended cable type provides the best bus performance. See MS/TP Bus Cable Recommendations on
page 22 for information on alternative cable types and lengths that may be used in MS/TP applications.

14 MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin

 FC Bus
4570 m (15,000 ft) Maximum
100 Total Metasys Device Connections (Maximum)

Bus Segment Bus Segment Bus Segment

NAE 1520 m (5,000 ft) Maximum 1520 m (5,000 ft) Maximum 1520 m (5,000 ft) Maximum
50 Metasys Device Connections 50 Metasys Device Connections 50 Metasys Device Connections
ET S Y R

T T T T T T
EOL Switch R R
ON

FIG_FC_SEGS
Note: When TEC26xx Series thermostats or third-party MS/TP devices are T = EOL Termination switch ON
connected to an FC Bus, a bus segment supports only up to 32 devices
and the FC Bus supports only up to 64 devices. R = Repeater

Figure 5: FC Bus with Three Bus Segments Connected with Repeaters

The bus segments on an FC Bus are connected using repeaters (only). A repeater
has two device connections, which are independent of each other. Each device
connection on the repeater is connected to a bus segment just like any other device
connection on the segment, and a repeater device connection can be connected at
the end of a bus segment or anywhere along the segment. When a repeater device
connection is at the end of a bus segment, EOL termination must be enabled on
that repeater device connection. See Figure 6 on page 16 for more examples of
repeaters on FC Buses.
Table 4: FC Bus Specifications
Category Specification
Error Checking Message Headers checked using 8-bit Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) test.
Message data check using 16-bit CRC test.
Device Addressing 0 - 255 (See Device Addresses on the MS/TP Bus on page 10 for more
information.)
Data Transmission Standard RS485
Signaling Method BACnet MS/TP
Signaling Rate 9,600; 19,200; 38,400; or 76,800 baud as selected by bus supervisor. (See
Baud Rates on the MS/TP Bus on page 9.)
Transient Immunity Meets ENG1000-4 Requirements for heavy industrial applications. Protected
against misapplication of 24 VAC.
EOL Termination Method Integral EOL Termination switch or add-on EOL Terminator module
(See EOL Termination on the FC Bus on page 16.)
Shield Grounding One (only) hard ground connection per bus segment when using shielded
cable. (See Grounding the Bus Cable Shield on page 24.)
Physical Configuration Daisy-chained
Optional Vendor Components Repeaters
• Acromag 4683-TTM-1F (115 VAC)
• Acromag 4683-TTM-2F (230 VAC)
Note: A repeater is required to connect bus segments on an FC Bus.
Transient Eliminator
Advanced Protection Technologies Transient Eliminator TE/JC04C12
Fiber Modem
• S.I. Tech 2110 Fiber Optic Modem and S.I. Tech 2121 Power Supply
• 9-pin Male Connector Kit (required by 2110 modem)
• Does not support 76,800 baud.

MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin 15

EOL Termination on the FC Bus
The FC Bus requires EOL termination at the end of each bus segment on the FC
Bus. Figure 6 shows four examples of EOL termination on the FC Bus.
FC Bus (Single Segment)
NAE
Scenario 1 1520 m (5,000 ft) Maximum
FC Bus with an
ET SY R

NAE at the end T

T
of the line
EOL Switch
ON

FC Bus (Single Segment)

1520 m (5,000 ft) Maximum
NAE
Scenario 2
FC Bus with an ET SY R

NAE not at the

end of the line T EOL Switch T
OFF

FC Bus

Bus Segment Bus Segment

NAE
1520 m (5,000 ft) Maximum 1520 m (5,000 ft) Maximum
Scenario 3
FC Bus in two ET SY R

segments with T
the repeater at T T T
the end of both EOL Switch R
segments ON

FC Bus
NAE Bus Segment
Scenario 4 1520 m (5,000 ft) Maximum
ET SY

FC Bus in two
R

segments with T T
the repeater not R
at the end of both EOL Switch
segments ON T

T = EOL Terminating Device

(EOL switch set to ON.)
Bus Segment
R = Repeater 1520 m (5,000 ft) Maximum

= FC Bus Device
FC_EOL

Figure 6: FC Bus Segment EOL Termination Scenarios

Note: Set the EOL termination switch on a repeater’s device connection to ON

only when the repeater connection terminates a bus segment. See Scenarios
3 and 4 in Figure 6.
Third-party MS/TP devices and TEC26xx Series thermostats have different
EOL termination requirements on the FC Bus. See TEC26xx Series
Thermostats and Third-Party MS/TP Devices on page 17 for more
information.

16 MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin

EOL Terminator Module
The MS-BACEOL-0 RS485 EOL Terminator provides EOL termination on FC
Bus segments when the device connected at the end of a bus segment does not
have integral EOL termination capability.
The EOL is a compact, lightweight, module wrapped in a protective cover that can
be quickly installed in the field in a variety of ways. The EOL connects directly to
the terminating device on a bus segment with the attached wire leads. The EOL
requires 24 VAC, Class 2 power supplied by the field device or other 24 VAC
source.
An EOL is required in all Metasys MS/TP applications wherever a terminating
device on an FC Bus segment does not have integral EOL termination (for
example, TEC26xx Series thermostats).
The EOL is designed for Metasys RS485 buses and provides better FC Bus
performance than the integral EOL termination on third-party devices. An EOL is
recommended wherever a third-party device terminates an FC Bus segment. If the
EOL terminator is connected to a third-party device that has integral EOL
termination, the integral EOL termination on the third-party device must be
disabled.

TEC26xx Series Thermostats and Third-Party MS/TP Devices

TEC26xx Series thermostats and third-party MS/TP devices generate more data
traffic than Metasys MS/TP devices. Increased data traffic reduces FC Bus
performance and reduces the number of devices that can be connected to the bus.
When TEC26xx thermostats or third-party devices are connected on an FC Bus,
different device and cable length limits apply to the bus segments and bus.
If one or more TEC26xx Series thermostat and/or third-party BACnet MS/TP
device are connected on an FC Bus, the supported maximum device counts, bus
segments, and bus length are as follows:
• 64 devices total per FC Bus (maximum)
• 3 bus segments per FC Bus (maximum)
• 32 devices per bus segment (maximum, not to exceed 64 devices total on FC
Bus)
• 1,220 m (4,000 ft) maximum per bus segment (using 22 AWG stranded, 3-wire
twisted, shielded cable)
• 3,660 m (12,000 ft) maximum per FC Bus (using 22 AWG stranded, 3-wire
twisted, shielded cable)
TEC26xx Series thermostats and third-party MS/TP devices also have different
EOL termination requirements. When a TEC26xx thermostat is at the end of a
bus segment, an EOL Terminator must be wired to the FC Bus terminals on the
TEC26xx thermostat. Third-party devices should not be connected to the end of a
bus-segment unless the third-party device’s EOL termination capability is disabled
and an EOL Terminator is wired to the bus terminations at the third-party device.

MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin 17

SA Bus Rules and Specifications
The SA Bus connects IOMs, VSDs, and NS-Series network sensors to field
controllers. Figure 7 shows some SA Bus examples. Table 5 and Table 6 provide
SA Bus rules and specifications.
Table 5: SA Bus Rules
Category Rules/Limits
General Each bus supervisor supports one SA Bus (and each SA Bus is a single segment).
Number of Devices An SA Bus supports up to 10 devices.
Supported on the Bus Note: Only four NS sensor addresses are available for use on an SA Bus. In addition,
the SA Bus supervisor provides power for NS network sensors and some of the
other devices connected on the bus. Exceeding the SA bus power limit can result
in devices going offline and poor bus performance. See SA Bus Device Limits on
page 19 for more information on SA Bus power limits.
SA Buses do not support repeaters.
Cable Length 365 m (1,200 ft) maximum bus length
152 m (500 ft) maximum distance between an NS network sensor and the bus
supervisor (FEC or VMA16 supplying power to the sensor) using bus cable connected to
the SA Bus screw terminal blocks
30 m (100 ft) maximum length for network sensors using bus cables connected to the
RJ-Style modular jack (6-Pin SA Bus Port)
366 m (1,200 ft) maximum Bus Length
Recommended Screw Terminal Connections: 22 AWG Stranded 4-wire, 2-Twisted Pairs, Shielded
Cable Type1 Cable for screw terminals
Modular Jack Connections: 6-Pin RJ-Style Modular Connectors with 24 or 26 AWG
Solid 6-Wire, 3 Twisted-Pairs
EOL Termination Each SA Bus supervisor has integral (fixed ON) EOL termination, which typically
provides sufficient EOL termination on an SA Bus. Long SA Bus runs or persistent
communication problems on an SA Bus may require EOL termination at the last device
on the SA Bus (in addition to the integral EOL termination at the SA Bus supervisor).

1. The recommended cable types provide the best bus performance. See MS/TP Bus Cable Recommendations on
page 22 for information on alternative cable types.

Table 6: SA Bus Specifications

Category Specification
Error Checking Message Headers checked using 8-bit CRC test.
Message data check using 16-bit CRC test.
Device Addressing 0-255 (See Device Addresses on the MS/TP Bus on page 10 for more
information.)
Data Transmission RS485
Standard
Signaling Method BACnet MS/TP
Signaling Rate 9,600; 19,200; 38,400 (default); or 76,800 baud as selected by the bus
supervisor
Transient Immunity Meets ENG1000-4 Requirements for heavy industrial applications. Protected
against misapplication of 24 VAC.
Shield Grounding One hard ground per bus when using shielded cable
Physical Configuration Daisy-chained (screw terminal only).
Optional Vendor Transient Eliminator:
Components Advanced Protection Technologies Transient Eliminator TE/JC04C12
Fiber Optic Modem:
• S.I. Tech 2110 Fiber Optic Modem and S.I. Tech 2121 Power Supply
• 9-pin Male Connector Kit (required by 2110 modem)

18 MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin

SA Bus Device Limits
The SA Bus is limited to 10 devices total to ensure good communication on the bus
and is limited to four NS sensors because only four unique addresses can be set on
the sensors.
The SA Bus is also limited by the total power consumption of the devices
connected on the bus.

IMPORTANT: The total power consumption on an SA Bus is limited; do not

exceed the SA Bus power consumption limit. Exceeding the total power
consumption limit can cause poor bus communication and devices to go offline.

Table 7 provides the power consumption of devices commonly connected to the

SA Bus.
Table 7: Power Consumption by Common SA Bus Devices
SA Bus Device Power Consumption on the SA Bus
Discharge Air Sensors (NS-DTN70x3-0) 12 mA
Network Sensors without display 13 mA
Network Sensors with display no RH 21 mA
Network Sensors with display and RH 27 mA
ZFR1811 Wireless Field Bus Router 90 mA
DIS1710 Local Controller Display 90 mA - may be a temporary load
BTCVT Wireless Commissioning Converter 90 mA - temporary load
Variable Speed Drives NA (self-powered)
IOM Series Controllers NA (self-powered)
Romutec® Modules NA (self-powered)

SA Bus applications are limited to a temporary power load of 210 mA.

The best practice when configuring an SA Bus is to limit the total available
operating power consumption to 120 mA or less. This power level allow you to
temporarily connect a BTCVT Wireless Commissioning Convertor or a DIS1710
Local Controller Display to the bus for commissioning, adjusting, and monitoring.
On SA Bus application where a DIS1710 display or ZFR1811 Wireless Field Bus
Router is permanently connected to the bus, you should limit the additional
available operating power consumption to 30 mA, to allow for the temporary use
of a Wireless Commissioning Convertor on the bus.

MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin 19

EOL Termination on the SA Bus
On an SA Bus, the minimum requirement is that EOL termination must be enabled
on at least one device on the bus, and because an SA Bus supervisor always has
EOL termination enabled, this requirement is always met; however, for enhanced
bus performance, it is preferable to have EOL termination enabled on the devices
at each end of the SA Bus. See Figure 7 for SA Bus EOL termination scenarios.
FEC or VMA
(SA Bus Supervisor) T = EOL switch set to ON
TT = EOL integral fixed ON
P O WE R ET S Y R

Best
FA U LT

S A BU S

ON
O
N
SA Bus Devices

T T IOM
EOL ON EOL
(Fixed) Switch ON

FEC or VMA
(SA Bus Supervisor)

P O WE R ET S Y R

Acceptable
FA U LT

ON
S A BU S

O
N
SA Bus Devices

T
EOL ON
(Fixed)
EOL Switches OFF
or No EOL

FEC or VMA
(SA Bus Supervisor)

P O WE R ET S Y R

FA U LT

Acceptable
S A BU S

ON O
N

SA Bus Devices SA Bus Devices

T
EOL ON
(Fixed)
SA_EOL

EOL Switches OFF EOL Switches OFF

or No EOL or No EOL

Figure 7: SA Bus EOL Termination Scenarios

Note: The MS-BACEOL-0 RS485 End-of-Line Terminator module is not

designed for EOL termination on the SA Bus.

SA Buses with Multiple Network Sensors

An SA Bus supports up to four network sensors. Figure 8 shows an example of two
SA Buses, each with four network sensors. To place multiple network sensors on
the bus, three of the network sensors must be DIP switch addressable.
Some NS Series Network Sensors and NS Series Discharge Air Sensors models
are DIP switch addressable.

20 MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin

 Ethernet Network
NAE55

FC Bus
SA Bus with 3 Daisy-Chained Network Sensors SA Bus with 4 Daisy-Chained Network Sensors
Using Terminal Blocks Plus Using Terminal Blocks
1 Network Sensor with a Modular Jack

VMA

=1 0

to 0
0
ss 02-
99

ed 3-
20

to 0
1

to 0
ed 3-

2
to 0

20
2

ss 00
dre 70

ed 3-
to 0

20
ed 3-

1
20

FEC

ss 00
ed 3-

to 0
20

dre N7

ss 00
Ad -xxx
ss 700

ed 3-
20

dre N7
ss 00

dre N7
ss 700

Ad S-xT
dre N7
dre N

Ad -xT
NS

Ad -xT
Ad S-xT

dre N
Ad -xT

NS
N
Ad -xT

NS
=1 0
NS
N

ss 01-
99
NS

dre 70

FIG: ns_example
Ad -xxx
NS

Figure 8: SA Bus Example Showing Multiple Networks Sensors

MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin 21

MS/TP Bus Cable Recommendations
The MS/TP bus supports much higher baud rates than the N2 Bus. Higher baud
rates make the MS/TP bus less fault tolerant and less immune to interference from
inductive noise sources that may be present in the application environment.
For the best performance on MS/TP bus applications, 22 AWG stranded wire in a
shielded cable with proper cable shield grounding is recommended. Other wire
gauges and non-shielded cable may provide acceptable bus performance in many
applications, especially applications that have short cable runs and low ambient
inductive noise levels.
Table 8 provides cable recommendations for MS/TP applications. The
recommended FC Bus and SA Bus cables are available from Belden CDT, Inc.,
and Anixter, Inc.
Alternative cables may be used in MS/TP applications. Table 9 provides
information regarding the relationship between baud rate, wire gauge, wire length,
and supported device numbers. You can also use the information provided in
Table 9 to determine if existing cable runs may be used in a retrofit or upgrade
MS/TP application.
Table 8: Recommended Cable for FC Buses and SA Buses
Bus and Cable Type Non-Plenum Applications Plenum Applications
Part Number O.D. Part Number O.D.
FC Bus: 22 AWG Stranded, Anixter: 0.138 in. Anixter: CBL-22/3-FC-PVC 0.140 in.
3-Wire Twisted Shielded Cable1 CBL-22/3-FC-PVC Belden: B6501FE
Belden®: B5501FE
SA Bus (Terminal Block): Anixter: 0.209 in. Anixter: CBL-22/2P-SA-PLN 0.206 in.
22 AWG Stranded, 4-Wire, CBL-22/2P-SA-PVC Belden: B6541FE
2 Twisted-Pair Shielded Cable1 Belden: B5541FE

SA Bus (Modular Jack)2: — — Anixter preassembled: 0.15 in.

26 AWG Solid 6-Wire, CBL-NETWORK25
3 Twisted-Pair Cable CBL-NETWORK50
CBL-NETWORK75
CBL-NETWORK100
FC Bus: 22 AWG Stranded, Belden: B5501UE 0.135 in. Belden: B6501UE 0.131 in.
3-Wire Twisted Non-Shielded
Cable
SA Bus (Terminal Block): Belden: B5541UE 0.206 in. Belden: B6541UE 0.199 in.
22 AWG Stranded, 4-Wire,
2 Twisted-Pair Non-Shielded
Cable

Recommended Acceptable

1. A 3-wire (for FC Bus) and 4-wire, 2 twisted-pair (for SA Bus), 22 AWG stranded, shielded cable is strongly
recommended. 22 gauge cable offers the best performance for various baud rates, cable distances, and
number of trunk devices primarily due to lower conductor-to-conductor capacitance. Shielded cable offers
better overall electrical noise immunity than non-shielded cable. Observe the shield grounding requirements.
2. 26 AWG solid, 6-wire, (3 twisted pairs) cable is recommended as the best fit for fabricating modular cables with
the modular jack housing assembly. Be sure the cable you use fits the modular jack housing. The
preassembled cables that are available from Anixter (Part No. CBL-NETWORKxxx) use 24 gauge wire.

22 MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin

 Table 9: FC Bus Wire Gauge and FC Bus Baud Rate
AWG Maximum Cable Baud Rate
Wire Length and Node
96001 19,2001 38,4002 76,8003
Gauge Connections Limit
18 Maximum Cable 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 1,219 1,524 305
Length per Bus (5,000) (4,000) (5,000) (1,000)
Segment (m [ft])
Maximum Number of 25/25 50/50 40/100 50/100 10/30 50/100
Nodes (per Segment /
per FC Bus)
20 Maximum Cable 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 1,219
Length per Bus (5,000) (4,000)
Segment (m [ft])
Maximum Number of 25/25 50/50 50/100 40/100 50/100
Nodes (per Segment /
per FC Bus)
22 Maximum Cable 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 (5,000)
Length per Bus
Segment (m [ft])
Maximum Number of 25/25 50/50 50/100 50/100
Nodes (per Segment /
per FC Bus)
24 Maximum Cable 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 (5,000)
Length per Bus
Segment (m [ft])
Maximum Number of 25/25 50/50 50/100 50/100
Nodes (per Segment /
per FC Bus)
26 Maximum Cable 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 (5,000) 1,524 (5,000)
Length per Bus
Segment (m [ft])
Maximum Number of 25/25 50/50 50/100 50/100
Nodes (per Segment /
per FC Bus)

Best Acceptable Acceptable with Possible Restrictions Not Recommended

1. The maximum number of devices is reduced at lower baud rates due to increased token loop times.
2. 3 conductor (FC Bus), 22 AWG stranded, shielded cable is recommended. 22 gauge cable offers the best
performance for various baud rates, cable distances, and number of trunk devices primarily due to lower
conductor-to-conductor capacitance. Shielded cable offers better overall electrical noise immunity than
non-shielded cable.
3. The MS-NAE55xx-0 cannot communicate at 76,800 baud.

MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin 23

Screw Terminal Blocks for Connecting the Bus Cable
Both the FC Bus and SA Bus terminations have pluggable screw terminal blocks
that allow you to connect the bus devices in a daisy-chain configuration. Connect
the devices to the FC Bus segments and SA Bus as shown in Figure 9.
Note: The SHLD terminal on the FC Bus terminal block is electrically isolated
from ground and is provided as a convenient terminal for connecting the
cable shield in a daisy-chain on the bus segment.
SHLD
COM
_
+

SA PWR
COM
FC Bus

FIG_FC&SA_TERM
Terminal

+
Block Isolated Shield
Connection
SA Bus
Terminal Terminal
Block

To Next Device To Next Device

on the FC Bus on the FC Bus
To Next Device To Next Device
22 AWG Stranded, 3-Wire Twisted, Shield Cable on the SA Bus on the SA Bus

22 AWG Stranded, 4-Wire (2 Twisted Pair) Shielded Cable

(One pair is + and - leads. The second pair is COM and SA PWR.)

Figure 9: FC Bus and SA Bus Terminal Block Wiring Details

Grounding the Bus Cable Shield

Inductive interference and Radio Frequency (RF) interference can adversely affect
MS/TP applications, causing poor bus performance and frequent device offline
occurrences. Experience has shown that installing a properly grounded shielded
bus cable in MS/TP applications greatly reduces the impact of ambient inductive
noise and RF interference. Applications installed without shielded cable are much
less tolerant to ambient interference.
We recommended installing MS/TP bus applications using shielded cable. In
applications using shielded cable, it is very important to ground the cable shield
properly. Improper shield grounding can also result in poor bus performance and
frequent device offline occurrences.

24 MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin

 To properly ground the cable shield on an MS/TP application, the cable shields on
each bus segment must be connected in a daisy-chain as shown in Figure 9. Each
daisy-chained segment must be connected at one point (only) to a hard ground
connection. We recommend connecting the cable shield to hard ground close to the
bus supervisor’s bus terminations. In metal panel or enclosure applications,
connect the cable shield to ground where the bus cable enters the panel or
enclosure that contains the bus supervisor. On bus segments without a bus
supervisor, the best practice is to connect the cable shield to hard ground at a bus
device near the middle of the bus segment.

IMPORTANT: Ensure that the cable shield is connected to hard ground at

only one point on the bus segment and is completely isolated from hard
ground at all other points on the bus segment. Multiple hard ground connections
on a bus segment can create transient currents in the cable shield, which can
result in poor bus performance and frequent device offline occurrences.

In certain environments with high ambient inductive interference or strong radio

frequency transmissions, an MS/TP application may require the addition of soft
ground connections along the bus segments to enhance bus performance and
reduce device offline occurrences.
Examples of potential inductive interference include large motors, contactors,
relays, welding equipment, high voltage conductors that are not in metal conduit or
raceways, other high wattage devices within 10 m (30 ft) of the bus cable, and
areas of frequent lightning.
Examples of potential radio frequency interference include locations near airports
hospitals, radio or television transmission towers, police and fire stations, or
factories. Mobile transmitters in police, fire, emergency, and fleet vehicles are also
potential sources of radio frequency interference.
Note: The majority of properly grounded MS/TP applications do not require soft
ground connections, but you should assess the potential interference that
your application may encounter (before you install the bus). It is more
efficient to prepare for soft ground connections when making the bus
terminations at the initial installation than to return and do it later.

MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin 25

 Soft ground connections should be made within 2 inches of the bus terminations of
any bus device that experiences frequent offline occurrences resulting from high
ambient inductive or RF interference (Figure 10).

SHLD
COM

FIG_FC_SFT_GRND
_
+
FC Bus
Terminal
Block

Cable Shield
Connections
to Soft Ground

To Next Device To Next Device

on the FC Bus on the FC Bus
560 pF
Capacitor

Figure 10: Applying a Soft Ground

Connection to an FC Bus

RJ-Style Modular Jack and Cables for SA Bus

The 6-pin modular jack SA Bus connection is a straight-through (not a crossover)
connection and that uses a 6-wire connector cable (with 6-pin RJ-style modular
jacks) to connect SA devices to network sensors, DIS1710 Local Controller
Display, and the VMA Balancing Sensor. On the 6-wire cable, two wires are used
for network communication, two wires for network sensor power, and two wires
supply 15 VDC (200 mA maximum) power to the devices connected to the sensor.
The Wireless Commissioning Converter (MS-BTCVT-1) is also connected
(temporarily) to the SA Bus modular jack to commission the controller.
The cable connected to the SA Bus 6-pin modular jack is a straight-through cable
and can not exceed 30 m (100 ft). Do not use crossover cables on the SA Bus.
The SA Bus 6-pin modular jack supports only one device and no other SA device
may be daisy-chained to the port.

IMPORTANT: Failure to adhere to these wiring details may cause your

network sensor to function incorrectly. You are not able to connect to the system
using the Wireless Commissioning Converter, the Handheld Variable-Air-
Volume (VAV) Balancing Sensor, nor can you expand the system with future
offerings.

26 MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin

 Every MS/TP device (except the NAE55) has at least one 6-pin modular jack.
Modular jacks on the network sensors allow you to connect a Wireless
Commissioning Converter (MS-BTCVT-1) or VMA Balancing Sensor. Figure 11
shows the SA Bus modular jack pinout.

RJ_6-PIN_JCK
Pin Number Assignment for
Straight-Through Cable
SA+

3 2 1

Printed Circuit Board

SA-
SA Bus Port SA Bus Common (Power from Sensor to Tool*)
Modular
SA Power (Power to from Sensor Tool*)
4
Jack
SA Bus Common (Power from Bus to Network Sensor)
6 5

SA Power (Power from Bus to Network Sensor)

* Provides power from the Network Sensor SA Bus terminal block

to a Wireless Commissioning Converter (MS-BTCVT-1) or
handheld VAV balancing sensor connected to the modular jack.

Figure 11: 6-Pin Modular Jack Pinout Details

MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin 27

Commissioning Devices on the MS/TP Bus
Commission the devices on the MS/TP bus using the CCT software. Refer to CCT
Help for information on commissioning an MS/TP bus application.
Applications and device configurations are downloaded to the hardware from the
CCT computer using the Wireless Commissioning Converter (MS-BTCVT-1) or
through the NAE/NCE from the Metasys User Interface (UI). Refer to the BACnet
Controller Integration with NAE/NCE Technical Bulletin (LIT-1201531) for more
information.
Hardware points can be auto discovered from the online UI of the NAE, the
Application and Data Server (ADS), or the Extended Application and Data Server
(ADX).

Peer-to-Peer Communication
Peer-to-Peer communication allows non-supervisory devices on a bus to
communicate system data with each other directly, bypassing the supervisory
device (NAE/NCE) on the bus. Release 2.2 (and later) FECs support Peer-to-Peer
Communication on an MS/TP bus.

MS/TP Bus Operating Environment

Maintain the operating environment for the MS/TP bus and its components within
0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F) and <90% RH (nonconducting). The operating
environment for the repeater must be maintained within 0 to 70°C (32 to 158°F)
and <95% RH (nonconducting).

28 MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin

MS/TP Communications Bus
Technical Bulletin

Appendix A: FC Bus Auxiliary Devices

Repeaters
Repeaters are optional components on the FC Bus that increase the maximum
allowable length and device counts of the FC Bus. One repeater is counted as one
device on the FC Bus. Repeaters are not allowed on the SA Bus. Table 10
describes how the length and device maximums of the bus change when you add
repeaters. The repeater is specified in FC Bus Rules and Specifications on page 14.
A maximum of two repeaters can be between any two points on the FC Bus.
Table 10: Repeaters on the FC Bus1,2
Maximums With No Repeater With 1 Repeater With 2 Repeaters
Maximum Segment Length (ft) 5,000 5,000 5,000
Maximum Total Length (ft) 5,000 10,000 15,000
Maximum Device Count Per 50 50 50
Segment
Maximum Total Device Count 50 100 100

1. The values in this table represent the recommended 3 conductor, 22 AWG stranded, shielded cable.
2. Some device models and third-party devices may have reduced capabilities.

Configuring Repeaters
The instructions for configuring the repeater for use with the FC Bus require that
you perform the following:
• Set the baud rate to match the FC Bus baud rate.
• Wire the repeater between two segments of the MS/TP bus. If you are using
this repeater in a branch, the side with the branch has double the number of
wires terminated. See Figure 12.
• Set the EOL jumpers on the repeater according to Table 11.
Note: The EOL jumpers are located below the cover of the repeater.
Note: Sides A and B have separate EOL settings. Determine the settings
individually.
For repeater installation instructions and important safety information, refer to the
repeater manufacturer’s literature.
WARNING: Risk of Electric Shock.
! Disconnect or isolate all power supplies before making electrical
connections. More than one disconnect or isolation may be required
to completely de-energize equipment. Contact with components
carrying hazardous voltage can cause electric shock and may result
in severe personal injury or death.

MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin 29

 Table 11: EOL Settings for Repeater
Side Jumper Instructions
Side A J1 and J2 At end-of-line: Install both jumpers over Pins 1 and 2 (EOL In).
Not at end-of-line: Install both jumpers over Pins 2 and 3 (EOL Out).
Side B J3 and J4 At end-of-line: Install both jumpers over Pins 1 and 2 (EOL In).
Not at end-of-line: Install both jumpers over Pins 2 and 3 (EOL Out).

3 21
J4 EOL
J3 Jumpers
FC Bus Repeater Side B
FC Bus Side B (Out)
Com REF-OUT
D FC OUT(-)
D FC OUT(+)
3 21
J1 EOL
FC Bus Side A Jumpers
J2
Side A
Com REF-IN
D (In)
FC IN(-) Baud Rate
D FC IN(+) Switches
120 VAC

G GND
W LO
N1
HI

FC_Repeater

Figure 12: Configuring the Repeater

Fiber-Optic Modems
The 2110 fiber modems can be installed in any location on the FC Bus. Just as only
two repeaters can be cascaded on the FC Bus, only two pairs of 2110 modems can
be cascaded.
The first installation step is to route the optical fiber and connect each modem to
the ends of the fiber. The second step is to connect the FC Bus on both sides of the
modems.

30 MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin

Routing and Connecting the Fiber Cables
To route and connect the fiber cables, follow these steps and see Figure 13:
1. Route the optical fiber in a manner that is required for the application.
2. Connect the fiber cable from the T (Transmit) output of the modem nearest to
the NAE to the R (Receive) input of the modem near the MS/TP devices.
3. Connect the fiber cable from the T (Transmit) output of the modem near the
MS/TP devices to the R (Receive) input on the modem nearest to the NAE.
4. Plug in the power supply for each modem.
FC Devices
NAE
Side
Side
R Optical Fiber R
FC Bus S.I. TECH FC Bus
S.I. TECH
MINI OPTICAL BIT-DRIVER MINI OPTICAL BIT-DRIVER
MODEL 2110 MODEL 2110
T T

CONNECT
Figure 13: Connecting the 2110 Modems

Connecting Modems to MS/TP Bus

Connect the MS/TP bus to the 2110 modem by soldering the MS/TP wires to pins
on the 9-pin connector, which can also configure the modem as an EOL device. To
connect the bus, see Setting Termination on Fiber Modems.

Fiber Modem between Two Segments

If you need to place the 2110 modem between two segments of MS/TP bus, wire a
stub length of 6 inches or fewer as shown in Figure 14, and terminate the two pairs
of MS/TP bus cable at the end of the stub length.

MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin 31

 If the fiber modem is at the end of a segment, set the EOL to In.
FC +
FC -
REF
Maximum stub Use wire nuts to
length is six inches join FC cable to
stub length

S.I.Tech
2110
T R
FC Bus To FC
To NAE
Devices

S.I.Tech
2110
T R

Fiber
Cable

T R
S.I.Tech
2110

STUBCONN
To FC Devices
Terminate if EOL

Figure 14: Connecting 2110 Modem in between

Two MS/TP Bus Segments

Setting Termination on Fiber Modems

The 2110 modem does not have an EOL jumper. Instead, establish EOL
termination on a 2110 modem by properly terminating the FC Bus wires to the
9-pin connector. Soldering the wires to specific pins and soldering two jumper
wires configures the modem as an end-of-line device (see Figure 15, Figure 16,
and Table 12 for more information).
Do not set the fiber modem as an EOL device on the SA Bus.

32 MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin

 Modem Set EOL to In
To set the modem as an end-of-line device, wire the 9-pin connector using solder
connections as shown in Figure 15.

Optional
Shield
REF
Fold back
and tape.

9-pin Connector
FC -

FC +

eol-in
Solder jumper wires between Pins 3-7 and Pins 8-9.

Figure 15: Modem Cable Connector: EOL Set to In

Modem Set EOL to Out

To set the modem with the end-of-line selection set to Out, wire the 9-pin
connector using solder connections as in Figure 16.

Optional
Shield

FC + REF
Fold Back
and Tape
eol-out

9-pin Connector
FC -

Figure 16: Modem Cable Connector: EOL Set to Out

Table 12: EOL Connections Summarized

FC Bus Signal For EOL Selection For Non-EOL Selection
FC + Terminal 7, Jumper 7-3 Terminal 3
FC - Terminal 8, Jumper 8-9 Terminal 9
REF Terminal 1 or 5 Terminal 1 or 5
SHIELD Tape Back Tape Back

MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin 33

Surge Protectors
Surge protection is strongly recommended if the MS/TP bus is wired between
buildings. The protection is provided by a voltage surge suppressor/protector,
which is installed on the MS/TP bus near the MS/TP device. Example applications
are shown in Figure 17.

Surge
Protector
FC Bus

protect1
Surge
Protector
FC Bus

N2 Bus
FC Bus

Figure 17: Surge Protector Installation on MS/TP Bus

Note: Fiber optic bus connections between buildings are immune to transient
voltage and other problems associated with hard wire bus connections.
Fiber optic bus connections do not require surge protection and may be less
costly to install. See Fiber-Optic Modems on page 30 for information.
The recommended surge protector is the Transient Eliminator, model
TE/JC04C12, manufactured by Advanced Protection Technologies, Inc. (APT).
The device protects the MS/TP bus from indirect lightning. It shunts both common
and normal mode voltage surges to ground repeatedly without damage to MS/TP
bus components.

IMPORTANT: The surge protector is capable of protecting the MS/TP bus

from indirect lightning strikes, not direct lightning strikes. A direct strike may
cause actual damage to the bus cable or surrounding property. An indirect
lightning strike may cause induced voltage transients that could cause electronic
malfunction without visible damage to equipment if the equipment were not
protected.

Use the surge protector with the standard MS/TP bus wiring. Do not use it with
any other type wiring such as leased line. If you need surge protection for other
wire types, contact APT or another transient noise protection company.

34 MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin

Table 13 lists the specifications of the surge protector.
Table 13: Surge Protector Specifications
Category Specification
Product Name Transient Eliminator
Generic Name Surge Protector
Model Number TE/JC04C12
Design Three stage solid-state design using both metal oxide
varistors and silicon avalanche diodes for suppression
Response Time Less than one nanosecond
Maximum Impulse Current 10 kA per conductor
(8/20 ms current impulse)
Maximum Energy Dissipation 80 Joules per conductor (10/1000 us)
Maximum Operating Voltage 12 VDC
Protection Common and normal modes
Suppression Voltage Levels 100 kHz ringwave @ 200 A: 15.8 volts
(Common mode) 100 kHz ringwave @ 500 A: 16.8 volts
3 kA combination wave: 20.8 volts
Maximum Number of Protectors One pair per bus segment
Allowed on MS/TP Bus
Maximum Length of MS/TP Bus 1,524 m (5,000 ft) (standard MS/TP bus specification)
Between Two Buildings Using
Protector
Other Mechanical Features Encapsulated in Ceramgard™ composition for insulation
and environmental protection.
Two part design for easy connection and replacement of
protective device to base using edge connector.
Durable UL Recognized plastic enclosure material
Dimensions (H x W x D) 63.5 x 50.8 x 25.4 mm (2.5 x 2.0 x 1.0 in.)

One pair of surge protectors is required whenever the MS/TP bus wire is routed
outside between two buildings. APT recommends that the protector be installed
close to the MS/TP device that first receives the bus wires from the outside.
Figure 18 shows an FC Bus surge protector wiring example.

MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin 35

 The protector does not require that you use any special type of wire for the
MS/TP bus, such as double-shielded twisted cable. Use the standard recommended
twisted cable types.

Building One Building Two

Metal Enclosure Metal Enclosure

Protected Unprotected Unprotected Protected

NAE FEC
FC Bus + FC Bus FC Bus
FC+ 2 1 + 1 2 FC+
- Surge - Surge
FC- 4 3 3 4 FC-
COM R Protector 5 R Protector
6 5 6 COM
S S
8 SG SG 7 7 SG SG 8
SG 10 HG HG 9 9 HG HG 10 SG
560 pF
560 pF
HG HG
HG HG
HG

Notes:
Hard Ground (HG) bus shielding connections should be at a single location in each bus segment. Introducing
multiple hard ground points of bus shielding in a single bus segment may result in large circulating ground
currents in the shield.

For the surge protector's hard ground, use 12 AWG stranded wire, 4.57 m (15 ft) maximum length, connected
to Pin 9 or 10 (pins 9 and 10 are internally connected on the surge protector).

FC_Bus_Surge
Make sure wires entering the surge protector's enclosure are not close to the wires leaving the enclosure.

Soft Ground (SG) the Bus shield at all other controllers wired to the FC Bus.

Figure 18: FC Bus Surge Protector Wiring Example

36 MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin

 The surge protector consists of two sections: the terminal block and the main
assembly. These sections separate to make the unit easier to install and replace
(Figure 19).
Surge Protector

Unprotected Side Protected Side

10 HG

Hard Ground (HG) 9

8 SG

Soft Ground (SG) 7

6 FC COM

FC COM 5
4 FC-

FC- 3
2 FC+

FC+ 1
Main Assembly
Keypin Between
Terminals 1 and 2

protectr
Terminal Block

Figure 19: Sections of Surge Protector

The surge protector is wired depending on which device requires protection.

Follow these general steps:
1. Mount the Transient Eliminator device per local codes. Install in an enclosure
(if required) as close as possible to the first MS/TP device connecting the trunk
segment entering the building. Any electrical box with a cover is acceptable.
Bond the transient eliminator enclosure to the MS/TP device enclosure by
connecting the two with the conduit that carries the MS/TP cable.
2. Connect the MS/TP segment from the outside to the unprotected side of the
device. If possible, run the segment inside metallic conduit because the conduit
acts like a shield for lightning.
3. Connect the MS/TP segment that goes to the MS/TP device to the protected
side of the device. Keep this segment away from the unprotected segment.
4. Connect the protector to earth ground with 12 AWG stranded green wire
(Figure 18). The total length of ground wire cannot exceed 4.57 m (15 ft),
which means an earth ground must be available within 4.57 m (15 ft) of the
MS/TP device. (Your installation design must accommodate this requirement.)
5. For hard ground installation, connect the shield to Pin 9.
For soft ground installation, connect the shield to Pin 7.
For more details on installation, refer to the specific manufacturer’s literature.

MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin 37

38 MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin
MS/TP Communications Bus
Technical Bulletin

Appendix B: Maximizing and Troubleshooting the MS/TP

Bus
Maximizing Tips
Observe the following guidelines to maximize the performance of an MS/TP bus.
Table 14: Optimization Guidelines
Guideline Description
Use Sequential Master Assign the master range of addresses on the FC Bus sequentially, starting
Addresses at 4, up to 127. Do not skip addresses. Gaps in the master address range
cause the bus to wait while devices poll for the next master.
The devices on the bus do not have to be physically sequential to follow
this guideline. For example, the devices on the bus can be 4, 7, 6, and 5
as long as the range does not skip numbers.
Limit the Number of Change of COV reports account for the highest amount of traffic on the bus. For best
Value (COV) Report Rates over performance, keep the COV rate at 500 COVs per minute or fewer for
the MS/TP Bus each network. To reduce the COV traffic:
• Set the COV increment to the largest value that still provides
acceptable performance.
• Do not map more points in the NAE than are required.
For mapped analog points, where the values are changing frequently,
consider the following to limit COV reports:
• Increase the COV increment on the point.
Note: For some Analog Inputs (AIs), this value cannot be modified.
• Set the Use Cov Min Send Time flag to true, which causes the COVs
to be sent on a timed basis. The time value is specified in the controller
device object.
Do Not Place Slave Devices on Slave devices on the FC Bus are not supported. The SA bus only supports
the FC Bus a specific set of slave devices.
Carefully Evaluate Third-Party Third-party devices can seriously degrade both hardware and software
Devices performance depending on their quality and configuration. Consider and
configure third-party devices carefully according to the manufacturer’s
specifications.
Do Not Add Extra Traffic Once the system is configured, commissioned, and running, avoid adding
extra traffic to the bus by performing unnecessary auto-discovery
operations, downloads, or bus analysis.
Observe the MS/TP Wiring Follow the wiring rules carefully. The tolerances of the MS/TP bus are
Guidelines tighter than other, slower protocols may be. Improper terminations may
result in errors causing serious network degradation.
See MS/TP Bus Cable Recommendations on page 22.
Check the MS/TP Statistics for See Statistics Attributes on page 42.
Errors
Use Default MS/TP Settings Avoid changing default MS/TP bus settings, especially settings you may
be unfamiliar with. Some parameters set improperly or randomly can
cripple the MS/TP bus completely.

MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin 39

MS/TP Bus Health Factors of the Diagnostics Tab
The Diagnostics tab of the MS/TP field bus integration, viewed from the
Metasys system UI, provides a snapshot of the condition of the bus. The attributes
that are most illustrative of the bus condition are the Bus Health Index and Bus
Performance Index attributes, both located under Calculations (Figure 20). The
Statistics attributes also provide a useful look into the condition of the MS/TP bus.

Figure 20: MS/TP Object Diagnostic Tab

Bus Health Index

The Bus Health Index is a snapshot of the immediate number of errors on the bus.
This index provides a weighted moving average of four MS/TP bus error counters:
Framing Errors, Header CRC Errors, Data CRC Errors, and Lost Tokens.
The ideal value for the Bus Health Index is zero.

40 MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin

 Because the average is reevaluated every 30 seconds, the average gradually returns
to zero if no new errors are occurring. As such, if errors occur only periodically
(for example, only when a source of bus interference [such as a welder] is in use),
the Bus Health Index may return to zero before you see the value indicate that
there are errors. If you suspect that errors are occurring, look at the four error
counter attributes. Alternatively, you can trend the Bus Health Index to see when
or if it changes during the course of the day.
The Weighted Bus Health Constant attribute is an adjustment factor that
determines how quickly the Bus Health Index returns to zero if there are no new
errors. The smaller the value of the constant, the slower the index returns to zero.
Typically, the errors indicated by the Bus Health Index are physical bus problems.
See Correcting Physical Bus Problems on page 46.

Bus Performance Index

The Bus Performance Index provides a snapshot of the performance of the network
by taking the weighted moving average of the ratio of the actual loop time to the
predicted loop time.
The Weighted Bus Performance Constant attribute is an adjustment factor that
determines how quickly the index changes when the actual loop time changes.
Because a master device is allowed to originate messages only when it holds the
token, the token loop time is closely related to network performance. During
normal operation, the token loop time should not exceed 2 seconds
(2,000 milliseconds). Special Operations (such as Auto Discovery, device
downloads, or bus analysis) may cause the loop time to exceed this value
temporarily, but this is no cause for concern; unless, the token loop time
continually exceeds 2 seconds, then the bus may be experiencing excessive errors
or data overload. The 2-second loop time figure is the upper limit of an ideal token
loop time; however, the Bus Performance Index predicts what the token loop time
should be, based on the number of devices, the baud rate, and the number of
messages.
The ideal value for the Bus Performance Index is 1. Table 15 provides the
guidelines of the Bus Performance Index.
Table 15: Bus Performance Index
Index Value Description
1.0 - 1.9 Best performance, no performance problems
2.0 - 2.9 Acceptable performance
3.0 - 5.9 Possible slower performance, bus may be overloaded
6.0 or Greater Poor performance, devices going offline, other problems

High numbers (around 6 and higher) can indicate a physical problem or that the
bus communication is overloaded. If the Bus Health Index is zero, the problem is
probably due to an overloaded bus. See Correcting Bus Overload Problems on
page 47.

MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin 41

Statistics Attributes
The Statistics attributes of the MS/TP Field Bus Integration object Diagnostics tab
(Advanced View) provide useful information about what is happening on the
MS/TP bus. Table 16 describes some of the attributes and values that indicate that
there is a problem on the bus. For more details on the following attributes, refer to
the MS/TP Field Bus Integration Attributes section of the Metasys system Help.
Send the Latch Statistics command to the MS/TP Field Bus integration before
comparing your values to Table 16. If the statistics have already been latched and
represent old data, send the Clear Statistics command. Wait a minute or longer for
new data to accumulate and send the Latch Statistics command.
For more information on statistics, refer to the Metasys system Help.
Table 16: Statistics Attributes
Attribute Error Condition Indicated
Unexpected Frames Possible network disruption
Rxed
Packets Timed Out Noise, bad wiring, or another device did not respond.
Framing Errors Noise, bad wiring, or mismatched baud rates
Overrun Errors This node is too busy.
Header CRC Errors Noise or bad wiring
Data CRC Errors Noise or bad wiring
Reply Too Slow Another device is slow to respond.
Datalink Errors
Reply Too Slow The node is too busy to build the reply at this time.
Application Errors
Internal Errors Low memory or unexpected conditions
Buffer Overflows The node is trying to send or receive too much at this time.
Lost Token Network disruption (includes initial startup, so 1 is common)
Retries Problems passing the token message

Analyze Field Bus Command

The Analyze Field Bus command provides detailed information about the devices
that currently reside on the MS/TP bus. The command tells the NAE to poll each
address on the FC Bus, in order from 1 to 254. The polling takes several minutes to
complete. Once it finishes, the Bus Analysis Progress attribute reads Complete and
the Bus Device Configuration List displays each device on the bus.
This command attempts to show the address, make, and other attributes of each
device on the bus. You can use this information to identify devices you are
unaware of and to identify third-party devices on the bus. The results of the scan
can vary depending on the device type and manufacturer of the devices on the bus.
To issue the Analyze Field Bus command:
1. Right-click on the MS/TP Field Bus Integration object in the navigation tree
and select Commands from the pop-up menu. The Select Command dialog
box appears.

42 MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin

 2. Select Analyze Field Bus and click Send. The Bus Analysis Progress
attribute value changes to In Progress.
3. After the Bus Analysis Progress changes to Complete, read the devices from
the Bus Device Configuration List drop-down menu (Figure 21) using
Table 17.

Figure 21: Bus Device Configuration List Example

Table 17: Bus Device Configuration List (Part 1 of 2)

Label Description Possible Values/Exception Values
Object Displays the name of the field device. The Any name or number
Name name is derived from following in this order:
1. If the field device appears in the navigation
tree, the name on the tree is used initially.
2. If the device is communicating on the field
bus, its name is read directly and overwrites
the current name.
3. If the device does not appear on the
navigation tree and it is communicating, but
its name cannot be read, the field is left
blank.
Address Displays the MS/TP address of a device if the 1 - 255
device appears in the navigation tree or the
device responds to the analyze field bus
command poll.

MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin 43

 Table 17: Bus Device Configuration List (Part 2 of 2)
Label Description Possible Values/Exception Values
Mapped Indicates whether devices are mapped to the True indicates that the device is mapped and
Metasys system. appears on the navigation tree.
False indicates that the device is not mapped
and does not appear on the navigation tree.
Note: Currently, the Device Mapped label only
applies to the FEC, IOM, and VMA16
Series controllers. Other devices may
return a False value even though they
are mapped and appear on the
navigation tree.
Status Indicates whether the device responded to the Responding indicates that the device
analyze bus poll. responded to the poll.
No Response indicates that the device
appears in the navigation tree but did not
respond to the poll.
Max Displays the Max Master attribute of the device. <127 indicates that the Max Master attribute
Master If the device is configured, the default value is has been altered. See Parameters That Affect
127. If the attribute cannot be read, the value MS/TP Communication.
displayed is 255. 127 is the default value and indicates that the
device is configured.
255 indicates that the poll could not read the
Max Master attribute.
Max Info Displays the Max Info Frames attribute of the 10 is the default value and indicates that the
Frames device. If the device is configured, the default device is configured.
value is 10. If the attribute cannot be read, the 255 indicates that the poll could not read the
value displayed is 255. Max Info Frames attribute.
Code Indicates the state of the operating code within Boot indicates that the device is starting and is
State Johnson Controls® field devices. This field is not completely functional.
meaningful only for Johnson Controls field Main indicates that the device is functional and
devices. operating.
Unknown indicates that the device is not
responding or does not support the Code State
attribute.
EOL Displays the End-of-Line termination status of a True indicates the FEC, IOM, or VMA16 EOL
Metasys FEC, IOM, or VMA16 (only). switch is On.
False indicates the FEC, IOM, or VMA16 EOL
switch is Off.
Note: All other devices on the bus display
False regardless of the status of their
EOL status.

Parameters That Affect MS/TP Communication

The following parameters can be adjusted to tune MS/TP communication.

IMPORTANT: Do not adjust attributes with which you are unfamiliar. If set
improperly, the following parameters can adversely affect MS/TP
communication.

The Baud Rate Selection attribute specifies the baud rate. If the baud rate is
forced to be different from other devices on the bus, communication ceases. To
change the baud rate, see Changing the Baud Rate of an Entire Bus on page 49.

44 MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin

 The Max Master attribute specifies the highest address that can be a master on the
bus. By adjusting this value, you can prevent some devices from coming online as
bus masters. All devices on the bus must have the same Max Master attribute value
to prevent the token from going to a device with an address above the Max Master
attribute value.
The Max APDU Length Accepted attribute specifies the largest data packet that
is allowed on the bus. If set improperly, this parameter can cripple the bus.
The APDU Timeout attribute determines how long the NAE waits for an
acknowledgement from a device when the message can be sent in one
transmission. If set too low, most messages fail. If set too high, error recovery is
delayed. You can change this value in special situations when dealing with
third-party devices or overloaded networks.
The APDU Segment Timeout attribute determines how long the NAE waits for an
acknowledgement from a device when the message is sent in multiple segments. If
set too low, most segmented messages fail. If set too high, error recovery is
delayed. You can change this value in special situations when dealing with
third-party devices or overloaded networks.
The APDU Retries attribute determines how many retries are allowed when trying
to recover from an error. If changed improperly, the network may slow down or
become more sensitive to noise. You can change this value in special situations
when dealing with third-party devices or overloaded networks.

Duplicate Addresses
Two or more devices on a bus cannot have the same address. If two devices on the
same bus have the same address, performance can degrade or serious
communication problems can occur, including devices not coming online and the
cessation of all communications on the bus.
Check for duplicate addresses in the following ways, depending on the severity of
the situation:
• If bus performance is degraded, check the address switch settings at the
devices with unreliable communications.
• If the bus communications problems are severe, and there is no communication
or you cannot determine where communication is unreliable, partition
(disconnect and isolate a portion of the bus for testing purposes) and test the
bus portion connected to the NAE (or Wireless Commissioning Converter
[MS-BTCVT-1]).

MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin 45

Common Problems
Several factors can influence the behavior of the MS/TP bus. In addition, certain
problems can affect the bus in multiple ways and have more than one symptom,
making the exact diagnosis difficult. For example, duplicate addresses on the bus
can degrade performance, make a device go offline, or stop communication
completely. Table 18 lists common problems that you should consider when
troubleshooting an MS/TP bus. The first row, Multiple Symptoms, lists possible
problem causes that can have multiple symptoms.
Table 18: Common Problems
Symptom Possible Causes
Multiple • Excessive bus errors are occurring.
Symptoms • A device was added or changed with a duplicate address (may not be the same address as
some devices having problems, and may have happened some time before the problem was
noticed).
• Wiring errors or wire problems exist.
• The baud rate was changed on some devices on the network, but not all devices.
• Max Master was changed incorrectly (this may have happened some time before the problem
was noticed).
• A download is in progress.
• There is a fault at a device.
• A repeater is needed or configured incorrectly.
• There is a duplicated Device Object name or instance.
• The EOL termination is improperly set.
Poor In addition to the causes listed in Multiple Symptoms, possible causes include:
Performance • Excessive bus traffic exists (bus overload).
• Baud rate may be set too low.
• Too many devices may exist on the network.
• Unaccounted devices are on the network (that is, not mapped to the NAE).
• Unusually slow devices are on the network or devices that are slow to pass the token.
Devices Go In addition to the causes listed in Multiple Symptoms, possible causes include:
Offline • Power or other failure occurred at the device.
• Communication is disabled at the device.
Device Does In addition to the causes listed in Multiple Symptoms, possible causes include:
Not Come • The device may be connected to the wrong bus.
Online • The baud rate of a new device is incompatible with the baud rate of the running network.
• No device on the network is configured to use a specific baud rate (normally the NAE), but all
devices are set to use auto baud. At least one device, typically the bus supervisor (NAE), must
have an assigned baud rate. Set the baud rate in the bus supervisor and set all other devices
to Auto baud.
• Device failed to download Main Code.

Correcting Physical Bus Problems

The MS/TP bus is subject to a number of physical factors that can affect
performance. Consider the following common physical attributes:
• Check wires.
- Verify proper wire gauge, connections, polarity, and lengths.
- Look for opens and shorts.
• Check terminations.
- Verify that EOL terminations are only at the ends of daisy chains.

46 MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin

 • Check addresses.
- Check for duplicate addresses.
- Verify that the address range is sequential.
• Check for and eliminate T-Taps (wire configurations that create a T shape) and
star configurations.
• Check for consistent baud rates.
• Check for sources of interference.

Correcting Bus Overload Problems

Excessive data communication on the MS/TP bus can degrade system
performance. To reduce the load on the bus, consider the following:
• Unmap points you do not need.
• Minimize the number of COVs on the bus; see Counting the COVs.
- Check and increase the COV increment for noncritical points.
- Use a timed COV interval for fast changing points. Set the Use COV Min
Send Time attribute to True.
- Lengthen the COV timed interval COV Min Send Time 10-255 in the
device object. The default is 15 seconds.
• Check for and correct unstable sensors.
• Reduce the number of devices on the bus, if possible.
• If running at less than 38.4k baud, increase the baud rate if possible.
• Verify repeaters, if applicable.
- Verify that repeaters are used where needed.
- Verify that repeaters are configured and wired correctly.

Reading the Baud Rate of Devices

Attributes in the Metasys system UI display the baud rate settings and current baud
rates of devices on the bus. Figure 22 shows an example of the baud rate attributes
in the NAE.
If the NAE is connected to an MS/TP bus that is already communicating at an
unknown baud rate, you can temporarily set the NAE Field Bus Integration object
Baud Rate Selection to Auto. Once you do, you can read the current baud rate from
the Active Baud Rate attribute in the NAE.

MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin 47

 To read the baud rates of devices, see Table 19.
Table 19: Reading Baud Rates in the Metasys System UI
Device To Read the Baud Rate Setting and the Current Baud Rate
NAE 1. From the Metasys system UI, display the Field Bus integration.
2. Select the Hardware tab, Baud Rate Selection indicates the baud rate
selection specified for the NAE.
3. On the Diagnostics tab, Active Baud Rate displays the current baud
rate of the bus.1
Field Device on 1. From the Metasys system UI, access the Field Bus integration.
the FC Bus2 2. On the Engineering Tab, expand the field device object.
3. Double-click the desired MS/TP bus object.
Baud Rate Selection indicates the baud rate selection specified for the
field device.
Active Baud Rate displays the current baud rate of the bus.1

1. This attribute displays the baud rate at which the device is currently communicating. If the
device Baud Rate Selection is set to Auto, you can use this attribute to see what baud rate
actually is.
2. This applies to Johnson Controls field controllers. Metasys system TEC Series thermostats and
third-party devices may have different means of reporting the baud rate.

Figure 22: MSTP Master Summary Showing Baud Rates

48 MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin

Counting the COVs
You can check the COV report rates on the main device object Diagnostics tab of
each device that supports this measurement. The two attributes are COV Tx Rate
and COV Rcv Rate. The NAE COV Rcv Rate is the total for all connected
networks including the Ethernet and should not exceed 500 per minute. The COV
Tx Rate counts only the reports originated by this device. For more information on
these attributes, refer to the NAE Object and the MS/TP Field Device Object in the
Metasys system Help.

Disabling a Device on the Bus

If a device is causing communication problems, the Disable command from the UI
allows you to take the device offline. Once disabled, the device no longer sends or
receives data, but remains in the token loop to maintain bus integrity and pass the
token to the next device.
This procedure only prevents data related problems and has no effect on
addressing or token loop problems.
Note: This command works on specific devices; it is not available on TEC
Thermostat Controllers and may not be available on third-party devices.
To disable a device on the bus:
1. On the navigation tree, right-click the device you want to disable and select
Commands from the pop-up menu. A dialog box appears for the device.
2. Select Disable and click Send. The device goes offline and a red X appears in
front of the device in the navigation tree.
The device remains offline until you repeat this procedure and send the Enable
command.

Changing the Baud Rate of an Entire Bus

The following procedure represents recovery steps to synchronize the baud rate on
the MS/TP bus. You may need to perform this procedure if:
• the baud rate of the bus supervisor (typically, the NAE) does not match that of
the bus
• you need to change the baud rate of the bus
• you connect two buses operating at different baud rates
In general, we recommend that you set the bus supervisor (NAE) to 38,400 baud
and set all of the other devices on the bus to Auto.
Note: To change the baud rate of the bus, you need a Wireless Commissioning
Converter (MS-BTCVT-1), and you need access to the Metasys system UI
and the laptop where CCT and the Wireless Utility are installed.
Note: A TEC Thermostat Controller must not be the lowest numbered address on
the bus.

MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin 49

 To change the baud rate of a bus:
1. Connect the Wireless Commissioning Converter (MS-BTCVT-1) directly to
the bus you want to change.
IMPORTANT: This procedure disrupts bus communication until completed.
Be sure you have connected the Wireless Commissioning Converter to the
correct bus before proceeding.

2. Start the Wireless Utility. (Refer to the Metasys CCT Bluetooth Technology
Communication Commissioning Guide [LIT-12011038] for more information
on the Wireless Utility.)
3. From the Metasys system UI, change all of the devices whose baud rate is
manually specified (that is, not set to Auto) to the new baud rate.
Note: Change the baud rate of the bus supervisor last.
4. Change the baud rate of all bus repeaters, bus modems, and third-party devices
to the new baud rate.
Note: Devices may appear to go offline as you change baud rates.
5. From the Wireless Utility, specify the new Baud Rate, select Force New Baud
Rate, and click Change. This process takes approximately 3 minutes.
Note: TEC Thermostat Controllers do not assume the new baud rate for
10 minutes.
6. Once the Force New Baud Rate process is complete, access the
Metasys system UI and verify the baud rate from the UI and that all devices
came online.
Note: If the old baud rate is still the active baud rate, a device on the bus may
still be manually set to use the old baud rate.

Automatic Low Resources Monitoring

Resources such as available memory and internal queues are continually
monitored by the BACnet communications software including the Internet
Protocol (IP) communications and MS/TP components of the controllers. If any
resource becomes overloaded, the BACnet communications software reduces the
throughput (throttles it back) to allow the controller a chance to recover.
Exceeded resources are classified into degrees of severity as follows:
• Warning means the resource is in short supply.
• Trouble means the resource may cause some observable problems.
• Alarm means the resource is causing observable problems.
• Critical means the resource is almost exhausted and operation may fail.

50 MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin

 In some cases, there are statistical counters that count when recovery actions have
been taken. The following sections define four resources monitored by the
BACnet software and describe what you may notice if the resource throughput is
reduced.

The Object Engine Input Queue

The Object Engine Input Queue handles all incoming messages intended for object
level operations. The Object Engine processes these messages in order by priority,
one at a time. If this queue is backing up, operation is slow and applications
sending messages may encounter errors.
If the Object Engine Queue is overloaded, you may notice the following:
The BACnet protocol messages (starting with the lowest priority) received by the
queue are aborted (discarded if in the Alarm or Critical state). The Protocol Engine
counter, Rcv Messages Discarded (under BACnet Protocol Eng, Diagnostic tab),
counts and displays the number of discarded messages.
If the Object Engine Queue is critical, all messages sent to the queue (including
internal messages) receive an error and BACnet protocol messages received from
the IP port are discarded. Discarded Frames (under Eth IP Datalink, Diagnostic
tab) counts and displays the number of discarded messages.

Available Free Memory

Free memory is required to buffer all incoming and outgoing messages, as well as
to save information needed for internal processing. If available free memory
becomes low, some communications fail and devices may drop offline. If available
free memory becomes completely depleted, all processing fails.
If the free memory available is low, received BACnet protocol messages (starting
with the lowest priority) are aborted (discarded if in the Alarm or Critical state).
The Protocol Engine counter, Rcv Messages Discarded (under BACnet Protocol
Eng, Diagnostic tab), displays the number of discarded messages. Additionally,
BACnet protocol messages waiting to be transmitted are also discarded. If there is
an external node waiting for a reply, an abort is sent unless the condition is alarm
or critical. The number of aborted messages are counted and displayed in
Abort Tx (under BACnet Protocol Eng, Diagnostic tab). The Protocol Engine
counter, Tx Messages Discarded (under BACnet Protocol Eng, Diagnostic tab),
displays the number of discarded messages. If this state exists for more than a few
seconds, external BACnet protocol devices may be flagged offline.
If the free memory available is at the alarm level or worse, checking for the
online/offline status of external BACnet protocol devices stops; this may cause
external BACnet protocol devices to be flagged offline if they are not frequently
sending data to their supervisory device.

MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin 51

 If the free memory is critical, messages to be routed from one network to another
through the controller are discarded. Additionally, information for routing to
previously unknown network numbers are not saved. BACnet protocol messages
received from the IP port are discarded. The IP port counter, Discarded Frames
(under Eth IP Datalink, Diagnostic tab), displays the number of messages received
and discarded by the IP port.

Protocol Engine Input Queue

The BACnet Protocol Engine receives messages from external BACnet devices
and holds them until the Protocol Engine can process them. If this queue becomes
too large, the Protocol Engine is not capable of holding all of the messages in
progress, causing some communications to fail.
If the Protocol Engine input queue is critical, BACnet protocol messages received
from the IP port are discarded. The IP port counter, Discarded Frames (under the
IP Datalink, Diagnostic tab), displays the number of discarded messages.

Protocol Engine Output Pending Queue

The BACnet Protocol Engine has an output pending queue used to hold messages
when slower communications links, such as MS/TP, are not able to keep up with
the rate that outgoing messages are being generated. If this queue becomes too
large, the time required to send a message becomes excessive, resulting in slow
operation. When this occurs, applications begin to encounter errors and some
devices may drop offline.
If the Protocol Engine output pending queue is in the trouble state or worse,
reading the initial values at startup is delayed.
If the Protocol Engine output pending queue is critical, originated outgoing
messages are discarded and the sending applications receive an error.

Building Efficiency
507 E. Michigan Street, Milwaukee, WI 53202
Metasys® and Johnson Controls® are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.
All other marks herein are the marks of their respective owners. © 2010 Johnson Controls, Inc.

52 MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin

Published in U.S.A. www.johnsoncontrols.com

Johnson Controls literature may be ordered through the Product Sales Team in Milwaukee.
North American branch offices can call 1-800-445-4757, select option #1.
If you are a front liner in North America, call 1-800-524-1330 select option #4, and then option #3.
If you are calling from a location outside of the US or Canada, please contact the Johnson Controls location
where you order products.

From the portal:

1 Click on ‘Tools & Applications’ in the heading menu.
2 Under the page section heading ‘Literature and Reference Material Ordering Site’ click on link ‘Click here to
access.’
3 Under the ‘Part#’ enter ‘FAN-410’
4 Complete your order form and checkout.
This page is intentionally blank.